Databook CEBE-319613 312053

Client / Customer / Kunde: METITO (OVERSEAS) LTD
Commande n° / Purchase Order / Auftrag: CEBE-319613 / 329220017
Affaire / Project / Projekt: 312053
Site / Location / Ort: -
N° Série / Serial N° / Serien Nr: 070P140007051,070P140007052
Matériel / Material / Bezeichnung
Integrated PCM EcoMoineau™ M progressing cavity pump

type 6M12S. Horizontal mounting.
1 / 396
Dossier technique / Data Book /
Betriebsanleitung
CUSTOMER METITO (OVERSEAS) LTD SERIAL N°: 070P140007051,070P140007052

ORDER N° CEBE-319613 / 329220017 TYPE : 6M12S
DATE : 23/09/2022 TAG N° A-110-PuE-01/02
Table of content
TECHNICAL DATASHEET & PERFORMANCE CURVE ................................ 3

1.1. Technical datasheet ...................................................................................... 4
1.2. Performance curve ........................................................................................ 7
DRAWINGS & PARTS LIST ............................................................................ 9
2.1. General Arrangement Drawing .................................................................... 10
2.2. Cross section & parts list ............................................................................. 12
TEST REPORTS ............................................................................................ 15
CERTIFICATES.............................................................................................. 18
4.1. Statement of conformity (NF L 00-015C) ..................................................... 19
4.2. EC Déclaration of Conformity ...................................................................... 23
INSTALLATION, OPERATING & MAINTENANCE MANUALS .................... 25
5.1. Pump ........................................................................................................... 26
5.2. Mechanical seal ........................................................................................... 61
5.3. Gearmotor ................................................................................................... 74
5.4. Temperature sensor .................................................................................. 386
PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

6, boulevard Bineau – 92300 Levallois Perret – France – +33 (0)1 77 68 31 00 – contact@pcm.eu
SAS au capital de 44 223 806 € – 803 933 472 RCS Nanterre – SIRET 803 933 472 00018 – APE 4669B – TVA FR 91 803 933 472
www.pcm.eu
2 / 396
Betriebsanleitung

DATE : 23/09/2022 TAG N° A-110-PuE-01/02
1. TECHNICAL DATASHEET & PERFORMANCE CURVE
PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

www.pcm.eu
3 / 396
Betriebsanleitung

DATE : 23/09/2022 TAG N° A-110-PuE-01/02
Technical datasheet
PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

1.1.
www.pcm.eu
4 / 396
OPERATING CONDITIONS
Medium Data Technical Data

Requested nominal flow
Medium concentrated grease/scum 1
rate (m3/h)
Viscosity (cpo) 5000 Minimal flow rate (m3/h)
Density 1-1.05 SG Maximal flow rate (m3/h)
Abrasity No Suction pressure (bar) 0
Size of Solids (mm) TBC Discharge pressure (bar) 6
Concentration >10 Food certification Non
Function Transfer
ATEX No
Operating mode Continu
ATEX CODE
Duty (h/day) 8h/d
NPSHa (mH2O)
Fluid temperature (°C) 20 - 30
NPSHr (mH2O)
Ambient temperature (°C) TBC Remarks 1 pump on duty + 1 pump stand by
pH TBC
Flow directions Suction on sealing side
Comments
We quoted standard pumps with DRT, temperature sensor, pressure swith and spare parts as well for 2 years of
running.
The warranty period for 2 years and standard documents provided.
The delivery conditions is FCA CHamptocé S/Loire.
Serial Number : 312053
TECHNICAL PROPOSAL
Quote Reference : CEBE-366522-1

Description : concentrated grease/scum
Tag Number : A-110-PuE-01/02
Pump Integrated PCM EcoMoineau™ M progressing cavity pump type 6M12S. Horizontal mounting.
Cast iron body with PN40/CLASS150 DN65/NPS2,5'' ISO flanges, 2 handhole(s). - suction on
Housing sealing side (M) / rotation direction of the rotor counterclockwise as seen from the drive side -
Body connection orientation : upwards (4). Maximal pressure on sealing side : 10 bar.
Rotor AISI 420 stainless steel rotor
Connecting shaft in harderned steel. Articulated joints with protective Nitrile sheaths. No wetted
Shaft line
metallic parts. Patented connecting system for ease of maintenance.
Stator Specific option: Stator drilled to plug the temperature sensor Ø6
Stator Stator in NBR 0-60°C
Sealing Single carbide/carbide/FKM mechanical seal
Flange-mounted geared motor type SK372.1F-90SP/4, 290 rpm (i=4.66), 1.1 kW, 230/400V 3-
Drive
phase - 50 Hz - IP55/F (PTC thermistors)., IE3 Premium efficiency.
12-month warranty extension of equipment in accordance with general sales conditions.
Service (assistance of an on-site technician not included). Departure on the billing date. Valid on the
ranges: Moineau - Delasco - Grinder - Lagoa - Dosymix
5 / 396
Run test on water and at customer process temperature. Report of flow, pressure and abs.
Testing
power (Regarding PCM spec n°1)
Painting process colour blue RAL 5019, procedure for C3 corrosivity ambience class following
Painting
ISO 12944-2
Manufacturer documentation, in a paper format, supply attached with the product (Pump and
Documentation
drive Instruction Manual, CE/ATEX/Food Certificates if applicable)
Packing Wooden case, protection by heat sealable foil (SEI standard cat. Ivc)
Shipment Shipment
Frequency inverter to be supplied by customer ***WARNING*** Constant torque frequency
Accessory
inverter is mandatory.
Temperature sensor PT1000 mounted on stator, probe Ø6-Lg100mm, with display unit. G1/4
Accessory male fitting with progressive ring. Spacing washer Ht 8,5mm. 24Vdc electrical supply to be set by
the customer
12-month warranty extension of equipment in accordance with general sales conditions.
Spare part (assistance of an on-site technician not included). Departure on the billing date. Valid on the
ranges: Moineau - Delasco - Grinder - Lagoa - Dosymix (WARRADD)
Generic Databook in electronic format, in english ((Technical description + Curves + 2D
Spare part drawings + parts list + Test report if applicable + applicable declarations of conformity +
Manuals) (DOC01EN)
Spare part 5-meter PVC cable (4 x 0.34 mm²) with moulded M12 plug (C05044E010)
6 / 396
Betriebsanleitung

DATE : 23/09/2022 TAG N° A-110-PuE-01/02
Performance curve
1.2.
PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

www.pcm.eu
7 / 396
6M12S
Date: 20/09/2022
PCM pump selector V3.8.3
Information
Max rpm (rpm): 1500 Starting torque (N.m): 20 Fluid: grease

Viscosity (cPo): 5000 Max pressure (bar): 12
Revision: B
Ce document est la propriété de PCM. Il ne peut être reproduit ou diffusé sans autorisation préalable.
This document is the property of PCM. Permission to copy or to disclose os subject to prior approval.
Este documento es la propiedad de PCM. Se prohibe su reproductión o difusión sin autorización previa.
8 / 396
Betriebsanleitung

DATE : 23/09/2022 TAG N° A-110-PuE-01/02
2. DRAWINGS & PARTS LIST
PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

www.pcm.eu
9 / 396
Betriebsanleitung

DATE : 23/09/2022 TAG N° A-110-PuE-01/02
General Arrangement Drawing

2.1.
PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

www.pcm.eu
10 / 396
80 296 177
3.17 11.65 6.97
7.28
185
14
0.55 (x6)
465 A-110-PuE-01
18.31
A-110-PuE-02
z
286 RACCORD/CONNECTION
11.24 AMS Sensor ISO FLANGE - P4 (x2)
PN40 DN65
CLASS150 NPS2.5"
m
6.50
165
13.72
348
12.20
t
310
5.71
145
Positions des raccords

Positions of fittings
4
1088 225
275 42.81 8.86
Z : [10.82]
1 7
Z = Cote minimum pour le démontage du stator / Minimum distance for stator dismantling / Minimaler platzbedard für demontage / Cota minima para el desmontaje del estator.
Créé par / Created by : A.SYED 09-Aug-22
276 Rue René Moineau
49 123 Champtocé/Loire
Titre / Title : MI6M12S Révisé par / Revised by : A.SYED 09-Aug-22
FRANCE N° de série / Pump Number : 312053 Masse / Weight : 62 Kg / 136 Lbs Vérifié par / Checked by : M.FAROOQ 09-Aug-22
Phone : +33 1 77 68 31 00 Entrainement / Drive : SK372.1F-90SP/4 Tol. : ISO 2768-vK Rev. Folio
www.pcm.eu Diffusion ou reproduction interdite sans autorisation. / No copy or diffusion unless authorized. N°: GAM-007178 A 1/1
11 / 396
Betriebsanleitung

DATE : 23/09/2022 TAG N° A-110-PuE-01/02
Cross section & parts list

2.2.
PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

www.pcm.eu
12 / 396
BILL OF MATERIAL: 070P140007051
(6M12S)
Date : 20/09/2022 PCM Spare Select V1.3.2
Landmark Réf. Article Description Qty Weight (Kg)
22 T220061030N Kit ligne d'arbre disponible 1 0.186
22 LA2316-PD SHAFT LINE KIT M4 NBR P3/ 22/ 105A/ 106/ 127/ 127A 1 1.150
PRJT JT190-PD GASKET KIT NBR P13/ P47 1 0.115
36632-1646DS0
1 0-60°C NBR stator 6-2 (drilled stator for temperature probe 6mm) 1 2.300
6
1 36632-1646 0-60°C NBR stator 6-2 - Primer finish 1 2.300
3 NM-1368-PR SHEATH KIT C4/M4 NBR H P3/ 105A / 127/ 127A 2 0.300
13 40725-160 O-RING NBR P13 1 0.004
16/17 C09056C186 SINGLE MECH SEAL D20 SIC/SIC/FKM P16/ 17 1 0.064
20 T200142001 ROTOR 6-2 SS420 R1 P20 1 1.200
47 T900016160 Gasket D131x3 M4 NBR 3 0.040
50 T500379C051 BODY M4 CAST IRON P50 1 16.500
54 T540085C051 OUTLET PIPE CAST IRON P54 1 6.000
54A T540090051 INLET PIPE CAST IRON PN40 CL150 DN65 P54A 1 4.000
80 C06087S018 STUD P80 2 0.219
88 T880050051 BEARING HOUSING F115 M4 P88 1 1.900
103 C06013F043 WASHER 14 0.003
Page 1/2
13 / 396
BILL OF MATERIAL: 070P140007051
(6M12S)
Date : 20/09/2022 PCM Spare Select V1.3.2
104 C06079J043 SCREW P104 12 0.020
105A/106 C06113B014 SCREW HC M8-10 TR 6 0.010
107 40308-046J NUT 16 0.012
127 C01042P014 STEPLESS EAR CLAMP COLLAR D42.3 - 45.5 MM 2 0.006
127A C01042F014 STEPLESS EAR CLAMP COLLAR D22.4 - 25.6 MM 2 0.000
143 C12231E000 G1/2 TEMPERATURE SENSOR-PROBE Ø6 LG 100MM-WITH DISPLAY UNIT 1 0.304
144 C14276A014 G1/4 MALE FITTING WITH PROGRESSIVE RING FOR PROBE Ø6 1 0.050
145 M-002748B085 SPACING WASHER HT 8.5MM 1 0.002
172 T000113278 HANDHOLE PLATE CAST IRON P172 2 0.508
250 C06118E018 BOLT M8 BM10-50 BBS 4 0.200
261 C06002E046J NUT Hm8 4 0.004
328 C06013D043 WASHER P328 4 0.001
AGEKBCC0466
C11 SK372.1F 1.1KW-290T 1 0.000
ANLL
: 1st Emergency : Maintenance 6000/8000h
Page 2/2
14 / 396
Betriebsanleitung

DATE : 23/09/2022 TAG N° A-110-PuE-01/02
3. TEST REPORTS
PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

www.pcm.eu
15 / 396
PROCES VERBAL D'ESSAIS
TEST REPORT
AFFAIRE SUIVIE PAR / PCM CONTACT : Imane Lrhoul REF. CLIENT / CLIENT REF : 329220017
NUMERO DE SERIE / SERIAL NUMBER : 070P140007051 TEST N°: 070P140007051
ER52_F_Procès verbal d'essais_000350_RevD MODELE / MODEL : 6M12S
CONDITIONS DE SERVICE / OPERATING CONDITIONS

Données produit / Medium data Données de performance / Performance data
Produit pompé / Medium concentrated grease/scum Débit demandé / Flow-rate 1
Viscosité / Viscosity 5000

Pression d'aspiration / Suction
0
pressure
Densité / Specific gravity 1-1.05 SG
Abrasivité / Abrasivity No Pression de refoulement /

6
Discharge pressure
Taille des particules / Size of
TBC
solids Utilisation (h/jour) Duty (h/day) 8h/d
Concentration >10 Fonction / Function Transfer
Temperature 20 - 30 Atex No
pH TBC Remarque / Remarks 1 pump on duty + 1 pump stand by
NUMERO DU MOTEUR NUMERO DU REDUCTEUR

52368309 52478062
MOTOR NUMBER GEARMOTOR NUMBER
DESCRIPTION DE L'ENTRAINEMENT
DRIVE DESCRIPTION
RESULTATS DU TEST / TEST RESULTS

Réf. stator Ind. noyau Traçabilité stator Date moulage
36632-1646 A 22062101 14/03/2022
Stator ref. Core ind. Stator traceability Molding date
TEMPERATURE DU FLUIDE
°C 20 20
FLUID TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE DU STATOR
°C 20 20
STATOR TEMPERATURE
VITESSE DE ROTATION tr/min

307 307
OUTPUT SPEED rpm
PRESSION D'ASPIRATION
bar 0 0
SUCTION PRESSURE
PRESSION DE REFOULEMENT
bar 0 6
DISCHARGE PRESSURE
DEBIT
m3/h 1.3 1.27
FLOW-RATE
TENSION
V 405 406
VOLTAGE (Umot=230/400V)
INTENSITE
A 1.52 1.65
INTENSITY (Imot=2.38A)
PUISSANCE ABSORBEE
kW 0.45 0.64
NOMINAL POWER (Pmot=1.1kW)
VARIATION DE FREQUENCE
Hz 50 50
FREQUENCY VARIATION
VF FOURNI PAR CLIENT / VFD SUPPLIED BY CUSTOMER

OBSERVATIONS
Date de l'essai / Test date Test effectué par / Test carried out by
17/06/2022 Thibault Guillet
PCM EUROPE S.A.S – 6 Boulevard Bineau – 92300 Levallois-Perret

Tel. : +33 (0)1 77 68 31 00
16 / 396
PROCES VERBAL D'ESSAIS
TEST REPORT
AFFAIRE SUIVIE PAR / PCM CONTACT : Imane Lrhoul REF. CLIENT / CLIENT REF : 329220017
NUMERO DE SERIE / SERIAL NUMBER : 070P140007052 TEST N°: 070P140007052
ER52_F_Procès verbal d'essais_000350_RevD MODELE / MODEL : 6M12S
CONDITIONS DE SERVICE / OPERATING CONDITIONS

Données produit / Medium data Données de performance / Performance data
Produit pompé / Medium concentrated grease/scum Débit demandé / Flow-rate 1
Viscosité / Viscosity 5000

Pression d'aspiration / Suction
0
pressure
Densité / Specific gravity 1-1.05 SG
Abrasivité / Abrasivity No Pression de refoulement /

6
Discharge pressure
Taille des particules / Size of
TBC
solids Utilisation (h/jour) Duty (h/day) 8h/d
Concentration >10 Fonction / Function Transfer
Temperature 20 - 30 Atex No
pH TBC Remarque / Remarks 1 pump on duty + 1 pump stand by
NUMERO DU MOTEUR NUMERO DU REDUCTEUR

52368310 52478063
MOTOR NUMBER GEARMOTOR NUMBER
DESCRIPTION DE L'ENTRAINEMENT
DRIVE DESCRIPTION
RESULTATS DU TEST / TEST RESULTS

Réf. stator Ind. noyau Traçabilité stator Date moulage
36632-1646 A 22162103 10/05/2022
Stator ref. Core ind. Stator traceability Molding date
TEMPERATURE DU FLUIDE
°C 20 20
FLUID TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE DU STATOR
°C 20 20
STATOR TEMPERATURE
VITESSE DE ROTATION tr/min

307 307
OUTPUT SPEED rpm
PRESSION D'ASPIRATION
bar 0 0
SUCTION PRESSURE
PRESSION DE REFOULEMENT
bar 0 6
DISCHARGE PRESSURE
DEBIT
m3/h 1.32 1.27
FLOW-RATE
TENSION
V 406 405
VOLTAGE (Umot=230/400V)
INTENSITE
A 1.73 1.85
INTENSITY (Imot=2.38A)
PUISSANCE ABSORBEE
kW 0.47 0.65
NOMINAL POWER (Pmot=1.1kW)
VARIATION DE FREQUENCE
Hz 50 50
FREQUENCY VARIATION
VF FOURNI PAR CLIENT / VFD SUPPLIED BY CUSTOMER

OBSERVATIONS
Date de l'essai / Test date Test effectué par / Test carried out by
17/06/2022 Thibault Guillet
PCM EUROPE S.A.S – 6 Boulevard Bineau – 92300 Levallois-Perret

Tel. : +33 (0)1 77 68 31 00
17 / 396
Betriebsanleitung

DATE : 23/09/2022 TAG N° A-110-PuE-01/02
4. CERTIFICATES
PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

www.pcm.eu
18 / 396
Betriebsanleitung

DATE : 23/09/2022 TAG N° A-110-PuE-01/02
Statement of conformity (NF L 00-015C)
PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

4.1.
www.pcm.eu
19 / 396
DECLARATION DE CONFORMITE (NF L 00-015C)
STATEMENT OF CONFORMITY (NF L 00-015C)
ÜBEREINSTIMMUNGSERKLÄRUNG (NF L 00-015C)
PROCESSUS : WM2 CODE : ERWA0149 INDICE : E

EMIS PAR : Odin TAILLADE LE : 2020-07-17 PAGE : Page 1 sur 3
CONFIDENTIALITE : Externe
PCM REF / PCM REF / PCM REF: CEBE-319613 REF. CLIENT / CUSTOMER REF / KUNDEN REFERENZ: 329220017
FOURNISSEUR - Supplier / Lieferand CLIENT – Customer / Kunde
Nom : PCM EUROPE S.A.S. Nom : METITO (OVERSEAS) LTD

Name / Name Name / Name
Etablissement : 6, boulevard Bineau Etablissement: METITO (OVERSEAS) LTD
Company / Betrieb 92300 Levallois-Perret Company / Betrieb
France
N° de la commande ou du contrat: 329220017
Numéro de la déclaration : CEBE-319613 Order or contract number / Vertragsnummer
Statement n°/ Nummer der Erklärung
PCM Référence : SO366522 / SO366420 /
SO366425 / SO366433 / SO366443 / SO366453 /
SO366511 / SO406036 / SO406223 / SO406230 /
SO406248 / SO367307 / SO406264 / SO419681 /
SO419686 / SO419687 / SO419689
PCM reference / Gerätenummer PCM
LIVRAISON – Delivery / Lieferschein
Référence et date du bordereau de livraison:

Number and date of delivery note / Nummer und Datum des Lieferscheins
DENOMINATION REFERENCE OU N° DE SERIE / N° DE LOT QUANTITE OBSERVATIONS

Designation Reference or serial number or batch number Quantity Observations
Bezeichung Gerätenummer oder model Stückzahl Sonstige Angaben
Integrated PCM EcoMoineau™ M

070P140007051,070P140007052
progressing cavity pump type 2
(Tags N°A-110-PuE-01/02)
6M12S. Horizontal mounting.
070P140007375, 070P140007376,
070P140007377, 070P140007378,
070P140007379, 070P140007380
(Tags N°A-131-PuE-01/02/03/04)
Integrated PCM EcoMoineau™ M 070P140007310, 070P140007311,

progressing cavity pump type 070P140007312 3
60M6S. Horizontal mounting. (Tags N°A-201-PuE-01/02)
Integrated PCM EcoMoineau™ M 070P140007328, 070P140007329,

progressing cavity pump type 070P140007330, 070P140007331 4
90M6L. Horizontal mounting. (Tags N°A-241-PuE-01/02/03)
Integrated PCM EcoMoineau™ M 070P140007286,070P140007287,

progressing cavity pump type 070P140007288,070P140007289 4
30M6L. Horizontal mounting. (Tags N°A-241-PuE-04/05/06)

40M6S. Horizontal mounting. (Tags N°A-242-PuE-01/02/03)

: +33 (0)1 77 68 31 00 – contact@pcm.eu – www.pcm.eu
20 / 396


070P140007332,070P140007333,
progressing cavity pump type 070P140007337,070P140007338, 9
90M6L. Horizontal mounting. 070P140007339,070P140007340
(Tags N°B-131-PuE-01/02/03/04/05/06)

60M6L. Horizontal mounting. (Tags N°B-211-PuE-01/02/03)
070P140007384, 070P140007385,
Bearing PCM EcoMoineau™ M
070P140007386, 070P140007387,
070P140007388, 070P140007389
180M6L.
(Tags N°B-250-PuE-01/02/03/04)
070P140007170,070P140007171,
070P140007172,070P140007173,
070P140007174,070P140007175
40M6L. Horizontal mounting.
(Tags N°B-250-PuE-09/10/11/12)

070P140007103,070P140007104
(Tags N°B-245-PuE-01)

50M6L. Horizontal mounting. (Tags N°B-232-PuE-01/02/03)



6M6S. Horizontal mounting. (Tags N°B-250-PuE-05/06/07/08)

070P140007369
(Tags N° A-110-PuE-01/02)
Nous déclarons que la fourniture citée est conforme aux exigences du contrat et que, après vérifications et essais, elle
répond en tout point, aux exigences spécifiées, aux normes et règlements applicables, sauf exceptions, réserves ou
dérogations énumérées dans la présente déclaration de conformité.

21 / 396

We hereby declare, barring exceptions, reservations, or exemptions listed in this statement of conformity, that the listed
supplies comply with the contract requirements and that, after completion of testing and verification, they completely
satisfy all specified requirements, and applicable standards and regulations.
Wir erklären, daß die vorliegende Lieferung in Übereinstimmung mit den Vertragsanforderungen hergestellt wurde und
daß sie, nach Durchführung aller Kontrollen und Prüfungen , in jeder Hinsicht den in den diesbezüglich gültigen Normen
und Vorschriften fesgelegten Anforderungen , bis auf die in dieser Übereinstimmungserklärung genannten Ausnahmen ,
Vorbehalte oder Abweichungen , entspricht.
RESPONSABLE QUALITE FOURNISSEUR RESERVE A L’ORGANISME DE

RESPONSABLE PROJET FOURNISSEUR
Supplier Quality Manager / SURVEILLANCE
Supplier Project manager / Projektmanager
Qualitätsbeauftragter der Lieberfirma Inspection body only / Die beauftarge Prüfstelle
der Lieberfirma
Nom et fonction Nom et fonction Aurélien HAMON

Name and title / Name und Stellung Nom et fonction
Name and title / Name und Stellung
Odin TAILLADE (Quality manager) Name and title / Name und Stellung
Date : Digitally Date :

Datum signed by Date :
Datum
21/09/2022 Datum
Taillade 09/2022
21/09/2022
Signature: Date: nature:

Signature:
Unterschrift Signature:
2022.10.06 terschrift
Unterschriftft
ft
Unterschrift
13:47:19
+02'00'

22 / 396
Betriebsanleitung

DATE : 23/09/2022 TAG N° A-110-PuE-01/02
EC Déclaration of Conformity
4.2.
PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

www.pcm.eu
23 / 396
DECLARATION DE CONFORMITE UE - EU Declaration of
conformity - DECLARACION DE CONFORMIDAD
PROCESSUS: WR0 CODE: ERWA0278 INDEX: D
CONFIDENTIALITE: External AUTEUR: O.TAILLADE DATE D EMISSION: 2018-12-20
à l'emission de l'enregistrement, s'assurer que le support utilisé est au dernier indice.
FOURNISSEUR - SUPPLIER - PROVEEDOR
Personne autorisée à constituer Sebastien Cloarec
le dossier technique :
Person authorized to compile technical
file
Persona autorizada a realizar el
expediente técnico
Fabricant PCM Manufacturing France S.A.S.
Manufacturer
Fabricante
6 Boulevard Bineau
Adresse :
92300 LEVALLOIS PERRET
Address
177683129
Dirección
N° DE SERIE: from : 070P140007051 to: 070P140007052

SERIAL N°:
Nous déclarons que le matériel désigné ci-après : N° DE SERIE
CODE ARTICLE:
312053
We herewith declare that the below mentioned equipment here:
Product code:
Declaramos que el material mencionado aquí:
CODIGO DEL ARTICULO
POMPE MOINEAU MI6M12S

DESCRIPTION DU MATERIEL
Product description:
DESCRIPCION DEL MATERIAL
est conforme aux dispositions des directives suivantes :
complies with the requirements of the following directives:
cumple con los requisitos de las siguientes directivas:
Directive " Machine " (2006/42/CE) / CE - Directive Machinery (2006/42/EC) / Maschinenrichtlinie 2006/42/EG / Directiva de Máquinas (2006/42/EC)
Directive " Basse tension " (2014/35/UE) / Low-voltage directive (2014/35/EU) / Directiva de baja tensión (2014/35/EU)
Directive " Compatibilité électromagnétique " (2014/30/UE) / Electromagnetic compatibility directive (2014/30/EU) / Directiva de compatibilidad electromagnética (2014/30/EU)
Directive " Equipements sous pression " (2014/68/UE) / Pressure Eqipment directive (2014/68/EU) / Directiva de equipos bajo presión (2014/68/EU)
POUR LA SOCIETE :
For the Company PCM Manufacturing France S.A.S.

Por la compañia
Nom et fonction Odin TAILLADE Signature:

Signature:
Name and position :
Nombre y cargo
Cluster Quality Manager Firma
Date :
Date: 17/06/2022
Fecha
6 Boulevard Bineau - 92300 LEVALLOIS PERRET - FR -177683129 -contact@pcm.eu

www.pcm.eu
24 / 396
Betriebsanleitung

DATE : 23/09/2022 TAG N° A-110-PuE-01/02
5. INSTALLATION, OPERATING & MAINTENANCE MANUALS
PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

www.pcm.eu
25 / 396
Betriebsanleitung

DATE : 23/09/2022 TAG N° A-110-PuE-01/02
Pump
5.1.
PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

www.pcm.eu
26 / 396
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
TO BE KEPT FOR FUTURE REFERENCE
PCM EcoMoineau™ Pump

Models: 6M6S – 6M12S – 6M24S – 13M6S – 13M12S –
20M6L – 25M6L
Assembly type: integrated
Document No.: NIPMM4I05EN-EU (genuine manual)

Date issued: 02/2015
PCM Technologies S.A.S.

6 Boulevard Bineau – 92300 Levallois-Perret – France
Phone: +33 (0) 1.77.68.31.00 – www.pcm.eu – contact@pcm.eu
27 / 396
Declaration of Conformity
We declare that the subassembly described below complies with the requirements of the Machinery Directive
2006/42/EC.
The subassembly complies with harmonised standards EN ISO 12100.
Champtocé sur Loire, 16/02/2012
2 PCM EcoMoineau™ Pump – Instruction Manual – NIPMM4I05EN-EU
28 / 396
Table of contents
1. Introduction........................................................................................................................................... 5
1.1. General ................................................................................................................................................... 5
1.2. Limits of Guarantee ................................................................................................................................ 5
1.3. Information regarding residual risks........................................................................................................ 5
1.4. Environment............................................................................................................................................ 6
2. Specifications and Installation ............................................................................................................ 7
2.1. Operating Principle ................................................................................................................................. 7
2.1.1. Principle of the pump ...................................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.1.2. Pump rotation direction ................................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.2. Markings ................................................................................................................................................. 8
2.3. Build Specifications................................................................................................................................. 8
2.3.1. Allowable force and torque ............................................................................................................................................................. 8
2.4. General Dimensions ............................................................................................................................... 9
2.5. Operating Specifications......................................................................................................................... 9
2.5.1. Pump performance curves .............................................................................................................................................................. 9
2.6. Equipment Installation .......................................................................................................................... 10
2.6.1. Installation Precautions ................................................................................................................................................................. 10
2.6.2. Pipework Connection .................................................................................................................................................................... 11
2.6.3. Pump position ............................................................................................................................................................................... 11
2.6.4. Motor Connection.......................................................................................................................................................................... 11
3. Operation............................................................................................................................................. 14
3.1. Commissioning ..................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1.1. Before Start-Up ............................................................................................................................................................................. 14
3.1.2. Start-Up......................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
3.2. Normal Operating Procedure................................................................................................................ 15
3.2.1. Start-Up Procedure ....................................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.2.2. General Operating Precautions .................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.2.3. Shutdown Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.2.4. Operating Procedure in the Event of an Incident .......................................................................................................................... 16
3.2.5. Automatic Control ......................................................................................................................................................................... 16
4. Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 17
4.1. List of Spare Parts ................................................................................................................................ 17
4.1.1. Diagram of the pump .................................................................................................................................................................... 17
4.2. Handling Equipment and Procedure..................................................................................................... 18
4.3. Storage conditions ................................................................................................................................ 18
4.3.1. In PCM standard packaging.......................................................................................................................................................... 18
4.3.2. After Unpacking ............................................................................................................................................................................ 19
4.3.3. In Packaging according to S.E.I. 4c .............................................................................................................................................. 19
4.4. Specialist Tools..................................................................................................................................... 19
4.5. Rules on preventive maintenance operations....................................................................................... 19
4.6. Periodic Inspection ............................................................................................................................... 19
4.7. Cleaning................................................................................................................................................ 19
4.7.1. External Cleaning.......................................................................................................................................................................... 19
4.7.2. Internal cleaning............................................................................................................................................................................ 20
4.8. Lubrication ............................................................................................................................................ 20
4.9. Thread locking ...................................................................................................................................... 20
4.10. Torque .................................................................................................................................................. 20
4.11. Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................... 21
4.11.1. Incidents and Causes ................................................................................................................................................................... 21
4.11.2. Solutions ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
PCM EcoMoineau™ Pump – Instruction Manual – NIPMM4I05EN 3
29 / 396
4.12. Removing the pump ............................................................................................................................. 23
4.12.1. Disassembly chart......................................................................................................................................................................... 24
4.12.2. Step 1: Disassembling the Pump on the Operating Site ............................................................................................................... 24
4.12.3. Removing the Stator (1) ................................................................................................................................................................ 25
4.12.4. Step 2a: Disassembly of Mechanical Seal (16/17) ....................................................................................................................... 25
4.12.5. Step 3: Disassembling the Shaft line (20/22) ................................................................................................................................ 26
4.12.6. Step 4: Disassembly of Connecting Rod Assembly (22) and Rotor (20) ...................................................................................... 27
4.12.7. Step 4a: Disassembly of Mechanical Seal (16/17) ....................................................................................................................... 27
4.12.8. Step 5: Removing the sheaths (3) ................................................................................................................................................ 27
4.13. Remounting the pump .......................................................................................................................... 27
4.13.1. Reassembly chart ......................................................................................................................................................................... 28
4.13.2. Step 1: Reassembly of Mechanical Seal (16/17) .......................................................................................................................... 29
4.13.3. Step 1b: Reinstalling the sheath (3) .............................................................................................................................................. 29
4.13.4. Step 2b: Reinstalling the Connecting Rod Assembly (22) ............................................................................................................ 30
4.13.5. Step 3: Reassembling the Shaft Line (20/22) ............................................................................................................................... 30
4.13.6. Step 4: Reassembly of Motor Unit and Shaft Line (20/22)............................................................................................................ 31
4.13.7. Step 5: replacing the stator (1)...................................................................................................................................................... 31
4.13.8. Step 6: Reinstalling the Cover Plates (172) .................................................................................................................................. 32
4.13.9. Step 7: Reinstalling the Pump on the Operating Site.................................................................................................................... 32
4.14. Equipment Storage when not in Use .................................................................................................... 32
4.14.1. Preserving the Rubber Components............................................................................................................................................. 32
5. Appendices ......................................................................................................................................... 33
30 / 396
1. Introduction
1.1. General
The pump you have just acquired was manufactured and inspected with the utmost care.
This manual contains information for qualified and authorised personnel on how to install, commission, run and
maintain the equipment mentioned on the front cover. It also contains important information regarding safety and
potential hazards related to the equipment. Users should read these instructions carefully before carrying out
any commissioning, repair or maintenance work on or near the equipment.
The information contained in this manual may not be copied or published in any form whatsoever, whether by
printing, photography, recording on microfilm or any other means (electronic or mechanical) without the prior
written consent of PCM SA.
The information given in this manual is subject to change without notice.
PCM SA or its representatives decline all responsibility in the event of damage resulting from the use of
this manual. This exemption from responsibility applies to damage of all types, including (without any limit)
compensatory damages, whether direct or indirect, loss of data, profits or return of capital, loss or damage
caused to the property of others, and third-party claims.
PCM SA or its representatives accept no responsibility and do not guarantee the accuracy, completeness, or
up-to-date nature of the information contained in this manual.
1.2. Limits of Guarantee
Before performing any maintenance operations on the pump, check that all necessary precautions have
been taken: upstream and downstream valves closed, pipework cleaned and purged, electrical power
supply disconnected and disabled. Check also that all the usual precautions have been taken in accordance
with the regulations in force regarding the safety of personnel.
On receiving the pump, examine it immediately to check that no signs of damage are apparent. If the pump is
visibly damaged, indicate clearly on the carrier's documents that the merchandise was received damaged, with
a brief description of the type of damage observed. If you decide to accept such equipment, send a registered
letter with return receipt, to reach the carrier within forty-eight hours, with a copy to PCM Services.
Comply with handling and storage conditions (see page 18).
To avoid all risk of damage or accidents (in particular when the products being conveyed are hazardous), it is
essential that you do not use the equipment for an application other than the one provided for in our Technical
description (see Appendices).
WARNING: To maintain the original qualities of the pump and to preserve the PCM guarantee on the
equipment as well as compliance with the machines directive, it is essential to use PCM parts only.
1.3. Information regarding residual risks
PCM have taken into account all internal risks for the equipment and draw the attention of the user to the residual
risks if the following verifications are not carried out:
• Compliance with the pump conditions of use.
• Fixing of the pump.
• Connections of the pipework to and from the pump.
31 / 396
• Installing security devices against overpressure, cavitation, frost.
• Installing accessories to prevent foreign bodies from entering the pumping circuit.
• Compliance with the electrical wiring instructions.
• Continuous feeding of the pump.
• Leaktightness of the assembly.
• For maintenance purposes, all necessary precautions against hazardous fluids.
• Compliance with the operating and maintenance instructions.
• Protection casing in place.
• Exclusive use of original PCM parts.
1.4. Environment
PCM is committed to an environmental protection initiative in accordance with the recommendations of the ISO
14001 standard.
PCM has set up a system through which its customers can ask PCM to handle the disposal of waste material
(used pumps and spare parts). This system is especially useful for the disposal of parts containing elastomers,
such as the stators of pumps or tubes from peristaltic pumps.
All returns must be sent to the PCM factory, carriage paid. The equipment must be clean, with the pump and
drive completely emptied of products, and must arrive with the sheet entitled: risk prevention (see Appendices)
All items returned for this purpose must be legibly marked with the words 'Equipment to be recycled'.
Send to: PCM – Rue René Moineau – 49123 Champtocé-sur-Loire – France
32 / 396
2. Specifications and Installation
2.1. Operating Principle
2.1.1. Principle of the pump
A: Flange (discharge or suction port). B: Pump housing. C: Flange (discharge or suction port). D: Spacer. E:
Rotor. F: Body. G: Connecting rod. H: Flange cover.
The PCM EcoMoineau™ progressive cavity pump (or eccentric screw pump) essentially consists of two internal
helical gears, which both have the following features:
• The stator, which is the external element, has one more tooth than the rotor, which is the internal element.
• In any given cross-section, each section of the rotor is in contact with the stator.
• The helical pitches of the two elements (rotor/stator) are in the same ratio as the numbers of teeth.
The rotation generates an axial displacement, from the suction to the discharge, of the closed cavities bounded
by the rotor and stator.
The PCM EcoMoineau™ pump is a volumetric pump whose capacity is equal to the volume of a cavity. The drive
system is directly attached to the pump by a flange, and drives the rotation of the rotor via a connecting rod.
The body design allows the port to be positioned in the most suitable orientation for the pumping conditions
(vertical, horizontal, right or left).
2.1.2. Pump rotation direction
For a discharge on the stator port side, the rotor rotates anticlockwise when viewed from behind the pump drive.
The suction connection (flange) is marked on the pump. The other connection (flange) is for the discharge (see
"Equipment Installation" section, 10).
33 / 396
2.2. Markings
Information shown on the pump motor unit or on an identification plate attached to the pump:
• Manufacturer name and address.
• Serial Number
• The displacement and the rotation frequency of the pump unit.
• Maximum allowable pump pressure, according to its motor.
• Customer reference (optional).
This information is essential when ordering spare parts (contact PCM Services).
Pump characteristics (e.g. flow rate, pressure, speed of rotation, construction, direction of rotation of pump,
etc.) must not be modified without written permission from PCM Services.
2.3. Build Specifications
The materials used are as follows:
Element Material(s) used
Pump housing NBR, FPM
Sheath NBR, FPM
Single mechanical seal Silicon carbide
Rotor X30Cr13 (1.4028 / AISI 420)
Body / Port / Spacer EN-GJL250 (EN-JL-1040 / A48 Class 40B)
The material designation comply with the AFNOR standard.

NOTE: By default, our pumps are protected by a particular paint. The procedure and details of the application of
this paint are defined in the technical description.
PCM EcoMoineau™ eccentric rotor pumps, M series, are equipped with round flange connectors, denoted Class
and PN.
2.3.1. Allowable force and torque
Examples of maximum admissible forces and moments on the suction and discharge flanges, for one flange PN
40 / Class 150 DN65 (NPS 2" 1/2) :
Max. force Fx, Fy or Fz 310 N
F total 438 N (98 lbf)
Max. torque Mtx, Mty or Mtz 157 Nm (116 lbf ft)
Max. total torque (Mt total) 230 Nm (170 lbf ft)
The values of Fx, Fy and Fz or Mtx, Mty and Mz must not all have the maximum values at the same time:
34 / 396
2.4. General Dimensions
The general dimensions and weights are available in the appendix as per the following drawing(s):
Model Drawing number
6M6S TPE0362
6M12S TPE0362
6M24S TPE0362
13M6S TPE0362
13M12S TPE0362
20M6L TPE0362
25M6L TPE0362
2.5. Operating Specifications
WARNING: Pumps do not tolerate dry running.
WARNING: Pump specifications (capacity, pressure, speed of rotation, construction, etc.) must not be
changed without written authorisation from our Customer Service Department.
The specifications are indicated on the technical description of the equipment supplied.
The A-weighted sound pressure level (SPL) of pumps manufactured by PCM is below 80 dB(A), in compliance
with the European directive in force concerning noise from motor-driven equipment.
M Series EcoMoineau™ pumps are used in the following industries: starch industry, construction, ceramics,
sanitation & environmental, oil production, mines, paper mills, petrochemical industry, petroleum, soap
manufacture and sugar refineries, etc.
With their robust design, M Series EcoMoineau™ pumps are used to convey a variety of liquids: clear, viscous,
abrasive, heterogeneous, charged, fragile, or emulsifying.
IMPORTANT: The maximum temperature for use is determined by the stator material and the specifications
given in the technical description provided in Appendix.
The maximum speeds are provided in the reference curves below.
WARNING: Do not use the pump under conditions other than those described in this document without first
obtaining authorization from PCM Services.
2.5.1. Pump performance curves
The rotational speeds and pressures shown on the curves represent typical performance characteristics
obtained with water at 20°C. When operating conditions differ from this standard, the performance characteristics
must be adjusted according to:
• Product characteristics (viscosity, fragility, abrasion).
• The characteristics of the application (operating speed, discharge pressure, available NPSH).
The performance curves are available in the appendix as per the following drawing(s):
35 / 396
Model Drawing number
6M6S TC00145
6M12S TC00146
6M24S TC00147
13M6S TC00148
13M12S TC00149
20M6L TC00150
25M6L TC00151
2.6. Equipment Installation
All EcoMoineau™ pumps are inspected in our workshop before dispatch.
2.6.1. Installation Precautions
Always wear personal protective equipment (at least shoes, gloves and goggles/mask) when working on or
near the pump.
It is important to leave enough space around the pump to allow access for maintenance and adjustments. Avoid
installing the pump in a location where the ambient temperature might not be within the operating temperature
limits of the pump (refer to the technical description in Appendix). For an outdoor installation, it is advisable to
provide shelter above the equipment, and protection against freezing.
WARNING: In the event of vertical installation, it is essential to drain the pump motor unit via the plug
located on the spacer (88) to prevent dry running of the friction surfaces of the mechanical seal.
It is also recommended that you install a removable fitting for ease of servicing the entire pump motor unit. The
pump must not support the weight of the pipework.
A safety valve or pressure-sensitive switch and a pressure gauge located at the discharge will give protection
and allow the pump's operating characteristics to be monitored. A dry running protection probe will protect the
pump when there is a shortage of the product to be pumped. Please ask PCM about its wide selection of
accessories to suit your requirements.
2.6.1.1. Tips for Optimum Pump Operation:
• Preferably the pump should have have a flooded suction.

• Place the pump as close as possible to the suction point.
• If a valve is present in the circuit, it is ESSENTIAL to provide a safety valve or pressure-sensitive switch.
Without protection on the circuit, a valve at the discharge is often the cause of operating errors leading to
damage to the pump or pipework, and presents a danger to personnel and equipment nearby.
36 / 396
A: Press. gauge &/or press. switch. B: Discharge valve. C: Return to tank or drain. D: To process. E: Dry running
protection probe. F: From storage tank.
2.6.2. Pipework Connection
An easily removable component should be installed on the stator end side. This allows the stator and the rotor to
be removed easily, without removing the whole pump from its mounting location. The weights of the pipes must
not be supported by the pump. The allowable torques and forces on the fittings are given in "Build Specifications"
section, page 8.
2.6.3. Pump position
The pump and its drive mechanism must be securely fixed to an adequately sized concrete block using screws
and rawl plugs or holding bown bolts. The unit shall be placed on a flat surface so that the body and the stator
ports are maintained on the installation plane. If necessary, use shims to ensure that the unit is stable.
The pump equipped with a bearing box shall be secured to a rigid base and aligned with its drive by a coupling
system. The pump, mounted by PCM on a base with its motor assembly, is aligned in our workshop, but the
alignment must also be checked after final installation (sealing, anchoring, etc.). To do this, remove the coupling
protective casing, and check that the alignment characteristics comply with manufacturer instructions (refer to
the specific instructions in Appendix).
2.6.4. Motor Connection
WARNING: All procedures must be performed by qualified personnel. PCM declines all responsibility if this
requirement is not fulfilled. Before performing any connections, ensure that the electrical power supply has
the characteristics listed on the motor plate. There is also a wiring diagram in the motor terminal box (see
also the instructions in the Appendix).
For thermal protection, the setting value is the current indicated on the motor.
When all connections have been made, the motor should be run at low speed for a few seconds (if possible using
a mechanical or frequency variator) in order to check the sense of rotation as indicated by the arrow marked on
the pump.
WARNING: Pumps do not tolerate dry running.
37 / 396
2.6.4.1. Examples of wiring diagrams
Device Configuration Diagram
Three-phase IEC Y connection

motor (Nord™) High voltage
Δ connection
Low voltage
Three-phase Y connection
NEMA motor High voltage
(Nord™)
YY connection
Low voltage
38 / 396
Device Configuration Diagram
Forced ventilation Single-phase

(Nord™) operation
Steinmetz
connection
230V - 277V
50 + 60Hz
Three-phase
operation
Δ star connection
220V - 290V 50Hz
220V - 332V 60Hz
Three-phase
operation
Y star connection
380V - 500V 50Hz
380V - 575V 60Hz
39 / 396
3. Operation
3.1. Commissioning
near the pump.
3.1.1. Before Start-Up
Ensure that:
• The electrical connections are correct and their arrangement does not lead to supplementary risks (falls).
• The gearbox has been filled with lubricant or that the level is correct.
• The gearbox screw (or vent valve where relevant) has been correctly installed and activated.
Activation of the vent screw
Installation of the vent valve

NOTE: for the positioning, see the drive instructions in the appendix.
• The sense of shaft rotation corresponds to the desired direction of circulation of the product.
• The product to be pumped is present in the tank and the pump body.
• The mechanical seal is lubricated if the pump is equipped with a self-lubricating seal (quench).
• The mechanical seal is lubricated in the event of vertical installation.
• All valves installed upstream and downstream from the pump are open.
• The variator end stops are properly adjusted.
• The temperature and type of product to be pumped are correct.
Also refer to the motor manufacturer's instructions (supplied separately).
3.1.2. Start-Up
WARNING: Never allow the pump to run dry!

To prevent dry running, PCM can supply a dry run protection system.
40 / 396
If the pump is not primed, you are advised to fill the pump body by hand. If the pump is temporarily not
primed, the small amount of liquid remaining in the pump is enough to lubricate the stator until the next
priming.
During the first few minutes of operation, check the following:

• The liquid being pumped reaches the end of the discharge pipe.
• The pump has been drained, in the event of vertical installation.
• The pump does not vibrate.
• No unusual noise.
• Sealing system functioning well.
• Check that the pressure stabilises, if a pressure gauge is installed.
• No abnormal heating of the stator or sealing system.
Check that the parameters (speed, flow rate, pressure, viscosity, and temperature) match the design parameters
of the pump.
WARNING: If the values are not those indicated, consult PCM Services.
3.2. Normal Operating Procedure
The pump and its drive system can reach significant surface temperatures.
near the pump.
3.2.1. Start-Up Procedure
Before each start-up, check the following:

• Presence of product,
• Valves open on the suction and discharge pipes.
• In the event of vertical assembly, the pump housing is drained through the spacer cap.
• Correct temperature of the product to be pumped.
Start the pump.
3.2.2. General Operating Precautions
During operation, ensure that:

• The pump is continuously supplied with product and power.
• The discharge pressure remains stable and below the maximum capacity of the pump.
• The temperature of the product being pumped remains within the operating limits.
• The operating instructions in force at the production site are observed.
3.2.3. Shutdown Procedure
This shutdown procedure depends on the type of product being pumped. Refer to the specific characteristics on
the technical description (see Appendices).
The shutdown procedure is therefore defined by the process.
41 / 396
Nonetheless, the minimum procedure is to switch off the pump, then close the suction and discharge valves.
WARNING: for a product which settles, clean the pump using a suitable product in order to enable the pump
to be restarted without damage.
It is important to protect the pump against water hammer, which could destroy the equipment and cause a
risk to staff and other equipment nearby.
WARNING: it is important to limit the time for which food is in contact with the pump components, and to
flush the pump in the event of a prolonged stoppage (over 30 minutes).
3.2.4. Operating Procedure in the Event of an Incident
In the event of operating irregularities, such as:

• Pump does not start,
• Pump does not prime itself,
• Flow rate too low or irregular,
• Pump stops,
• Pump is not delivering,
• Pump is abnormally noisy.
Proceed as follows:
• Shut down the pump according to the shutdown procedure (see page 15).
• Hydraulically isolate the pump (suction, discharge).
• See "Troubleshooting" section (see page 21).
3.2.5. Automatic Control
It is advisable to use devices that automatically control the operation of the pump.
Examples: pressure-sensitive switch, valves with electrical position contact, dry running protection probe
(capacitance probe).
42 / 396
4. Maintenance
4.1. List of Spare Parts
For the list of spare parts for your pump, contact PCM Services giving the serial number of your equipment. This
number is shown on the manufacturer identification plate.
You can ask us to repair your pump. Within three days of receiving it, we will supply a quotation showing the cost
of the overhaul and how long it will take to do.
PCM Services address:
PCM – Rue René Moineau – 49123 Champtocé-sur-Loire – France
Phone: +33 (0) 1.77.68.31.00 – contact@pcm.eu
4.1.1. Diagram of the pump
43 / 396
4.2. Handling Equipment and Procedure
WARNING: To handle the complete pump, refer to the procedure in force and comply with legislation
concerning the safety of personnel. Slinging must be performed by trained, qualified personnel in
accordance with the instructions given in this manual. Any failure to observe this rule releases PCM from all
responsibility.
Before lifting the pump, ensure that all its components are securely fastened to each other. Do not sling
with a single sling or an endless sling that can slip on the lifting hook.
Use two single slings working in a loop on the stator port (A) and the motor unit (B), whilst using a lining to protect
the slings from sharp edges.
Use a protective thimble or a sliding hook where the loop is situated. The max. loads on the pump units are
available in the appendix.
Use an adjustable sling with an adequate working load limit (WLL)1 . Perform the adjustment with a series of
tests to place the centre of gravity (G) of the load vertically below the hook (with latch), or position two slings of
different lengths by attaching the shorter one on the heavier side so that the centre of gravity (G) of the load is
positioned vertically below the hook (with latch).
The parts of the pump that cannot be handled may be lifted using a hoist and slings (or any similar lifting
equipment). Metallic slings (chain, cable, etc.) are not recommended. Fragile parts must be handled with
particular care to avoid impact. After removal, they must be laid in a stable position on wooden blocks, and
protected from shocks.
4.3. Storage conditions
4.3.1. In PCM standard packaging
Pumps and pump parts must be stored in their original packaging, in a stable position, protected from impact
and in a dry location.
1. WLL. : Maximum allowable mass (kg) that can be hung vertically from the sling in normal use
44 / 396
4.3.2. After Unpacking
• Protect the equipment from impact and from dust.
4.3.3. In Packaging according to S.E.I. 4c
Every six months:

• Replace the desiccant pouches.
• Check machined surfaces, and lubricate if necessary,
Every month:
• Turn the pump through four or five revolutions using the fan or bearing shaft.
4.4. Specialist Tools
No specialist tools.
Pliers would be useful for the installation and removal of the collars (127/127A).
4.5. Rules on preventive maintenance operations
WARNING: All servicing must be carried out by trained, qualified personnel in accordance with the
instructions given in the present manual.
Any failure to observe this rule releases PCM from all responsibility.
4.6. Periodic Inspection
If the equipment is used continuously 8 hours per day, 5 days per week, the following should be verified:
• Complete leaktightness of the pump (once a week).
• Tightness of the assembly mounting hardware (port, stator, body, spacer, drive) (once a month).
• Level of lubricant in the drive, if applicable (once a month).
• Anchoring (once a year).
• Motor current and cleanliness of drive ventilation grid (once a month).
• Condition of power supply electrical ducts (once a year).
4.7. Cleaning
near the pump.
4.7.1. External Cleaning
Remove any dirt that could damage the paint and corrode the pump.
45 / 396
4.7.2. Internal cleaning
Cleaning procedures and frequency depend on the specific application of the pump, and the product being
pumped. In any case, the minimum procedure is described below.
With the pump running, feed in the cleaning product that is compatible with the pumped product and pump
materials at the suction end.
Cleaning time is defined according to the process using the pump. When this time has expired, shut down the
pump according to "Shutdown Procedure" section of the chapter "Normal Operating Procedure" (see page 15).
4.8. Lubrication
The pump drive is supplied with oil. Check the oil level before putting the pump in service.
Consult the manufacturer documentation supplied in Appendix for the precautions to be taken when lubricating
the drive, where applicable.
The following table indicates the recommended lubricants to be used when servicing the pump:
Component to be lubricated Recommended lubricant Supplier
Sheathed connections (30 g/duct ) TOTAL AXA grease, grade 1 TOTAL
Gearbox / drive system (E) connection GERALYN 2 grease FUCHS LUBRITECH
Drive (E) / rotor (20) connection GERALYN 2 grease FUCHS LUBRITECH
Stator (1) (for assembly) GLYCERINE
4.9. Thread locking
The following table indicates the recommended products to use when reassembling the pump:
Element to be locked Recommended product Supplier
Screws (105A/106A) LOCTITE® 243 HENKEL
4.10. Torque
Torque general values for the fixing elements hardware are defined in the following table:
Screw diameter Min. torque Max. torque
M4 0.9 N.m [0.66 lbf ft] 1.6 N.m [1.18 lbf ft]
M8 7.4 N.m [5.45 lbf ft] 13 N.m [9.58 lbf ft]
M10 15 N.m [11.06 lbf ft] 27 N.m [19.91 lbf ft]
46 / 396
4.11. Troubleshooting
4.11.1. Incidents and Causes
Incident
or vibrates abnormally
does not prime itself
Pump stops running
(see section below)

Discharge pressure
Joints deteriorate
does not deliver
Pump is noisy
does not start
not constant
Flow rate is
overloaded
stator wear
Solutions
Premature
Premature
rotor wear
shaft seal
Flow rate
Drive is
Leak in
too low
too low
quickly
Pump
Pump
Pump
Causes
The stator is swollen.

● ● ● ● ● 1
Rotor drive system is

broken. ● ● ● ● 2
Product temperature
is too high. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 3
Sedimentation or
precipitation of the ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 4
fluid in the pump body
The solid bodies

contained in the liquid ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 5
are too voluminous.
The electrical
installation is not ● ● ● ● ● ● 6
compliant.
The devices driving

the pump are worn or ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 7
broken.
Pump is blocked by a
foreign body. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 8
The stator has

become hard and ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 9
brittle.
The stator is
sectioned at its rim. ● ● ● 10
The stator is worn.

● ● ● ● ● ● 11
The rotor is worn.

● ● ● ● ● ● 12
Leak in mechanical
seal. ● ● 13
Incorrect direction of
rotation. ● ● 14
Product temperature
is lower than ● ● ● ● 15
expected.
47 / 396
Incident
or vibrates abnormally
does not prime itself
Pump stops running
(see section below)

Discharge pressure
Joints deteriorate
does not deliver
Pump is noisy
does not start
not constant
Flow rate is
overloaded
stator wear
Solutions
Premature
Premature
rotor wear
shaft seal
Flow rate
Drive is
Leak in
too low
too low
quickly
Pump
Pump
Pump
Causes
Net positive suction

head is too low ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 16
NPSHd<NPSHr
The pump suction is

aspirating air. ● ● ● ● ● 17
Speed of rotation is
too low. ● ● ● 18
Pump installation
location, pipework
and accessories ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 19
should all be checked
The pump is running

dry. ● ● ● ● 20
Viscosity of the
pumped product is ● ● ● ● 21
higher than expected.
Pressure at discharge
is too high. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 22
Speed of rotation is
too high. ● ● ● ● ● 23
For a new pump or

new stator: excessive ● ● 24
static tightening.
Shaft is damaged
(according to model). ● ● ● ● ● ● 25
The roller bearings

are worn (according ● ● 26
to model).
Stability of pump
motor unit (according ● 27
to model).
4.11.2. Solutions
Remedy Description
no.
1 The stator material swells when in contact with the product being pumped. Check that the material and the
product are those specified in the order. If necessary, contact PCM Services.
2 Determine the cause of failure by checking points 1, 3, 4, 5, 8, 22, and 23, and then replace the damaged
parts.
3 The operating temperature limit is defined according to the stator material.
48 / 396
Remedy Description
no.
4 Clean the pump body and rinse the pump after each use.
5 Remove these bodies using a strainer, or consult PCM Services about obtaining another pump.
6 Check the network voltage, motor connections, circuit breaker calibration, and number of phases.
7 Replace defective parts and check the load on the drive.
8 Disassemble the pump, clean it, and replace any defective components.
9 Check that the temperature is not higher than initially planned and that the product being pumped is the
intended product. For any change of parameters, consult PCM Services to determine a different pump
construction.
10 This type of damage is typically caused by an overpressure. Consult PCM Services.
11 Replace the stator and check the condition of the rotor.
12 Determine the cause of the wear: abrasion, corrosion, cavitation; consult PCM Services to define a new
rotor material if necessary, and install the new part.
13 Remove the mechanical seal and replace it with a new one.
14 Change the electrical connections.
15 Contact PCM Services, who will recommend a tighter stator.
16 Reduce head loss in the suction pipe, lower the temperature, and raise the suction level.
17 Check the installation for leaks.
18 Consult PCM Services to determine the best way to increase the speed.
19 Check all pipes for obstruction by a foreign body, for a defective or improperly sealed valve, for a leaky
poppet, etc.
20 Re-arrange the overall layout of the installation, or provide a dry running protection system.
21 For any viscosity change, consult PCM Services who will re-calculate the parameters.
22 Measure the pressure using a pressure gauge, and compare it to the pressure stated in the technical
description.
23 Consult PCM Services to determine the best way to decrease the speed.
24 Fill the pump, and rotate the motor fan about ten revolutions by hand.
25 Replace the shaft and the mechanical seal.
26 Remove the bearing box or gearbox, and replace the roller bearings and seals.
27 Adjust the feet or check the mountings.
4.12. Removing the pump
Note: part numbers in the text refer to the drawings in chapter "List of spare parts" (see page 17).
WARNING: Before performing any maintenance operations on the pump, check that all necessary
precautions have been taken: upstream and downstream valves closed, pipework cleaned and purged,
electrical power supply disconnected and disabled. Check also that all the usual precautions have been
taken in accordance with the regulations in force regarding the safety of personnel.
49 / 396
4.12.1. Disassembly chart
4.12.2. Step 1: Disassembling the Pump on the Operating Site
1. Drain the pump by removing a flange cover (172) held by the nuts (107) and the washers (103).
2. Remove the pump from the installation and isolate it from the electrical circuit whilst identifying the motor
connections (to obtain the correct direction of rotation after reassembly).
50 / 396
4.12.3. Removing the Stator (1)
2. Withdraw the removable component of the pipework on the stator port side (54).
3. Remove the nuts and washers from the tie rods (80).
4. Use a mallet to remove the port (54) from the stator (1).
5. Remove the motor cowl.
6. Use a strap wrench to turn the stator (1) whilst immobilising the drive shaft, or vice-versa.
Check the condition of the rotor and stator.
4.12.4. Step 2a: Disassembly of Mechanical Seal (16/17)
1. Follow instructions of step 1

2. Use appropriate means to support the motor unit.
4. Remove the nuts (261) and washers (328).
6. Bring the motor unit and the shaft line (20/22) of the stator (1) back approximately 70 mm by turning the
drive shaft in the appropriate direction.
51 / 396
Note: For easy extraction of the rotor (20), lubricate the stator (1) inlet via the opening of the body (50) using
glycerine (see "Reassembly" section, page 27).
7. Remove the three screws (105A/106A) from the drive system (E) to free the shaft line (20/22) from the
gearbox output shaft.
8. Lay the motor unit in a stable position on a work bench.
9. Slide the rotating part (16), of the mechanical seal onto the gearbox output shaft by handling the bellows
and the spring only.
10. Remove the spacer (88) from the motor unit.
11. Press on the rear face of the stationary seat (17) and extract it from the spacer (88).
It is recommended that you check the condition of the seal (13), and if necessary replace it during reassembly.
4.12.5. Step 3: Disassembling the Shaft line (20/22)
1. Remove the stator (1) as per the steps 1 and 2 described above.
2. Use appropriate means to support the motor unit.
4. Move the motor and the spacer (88) back by about 70 mm.
5. Remove the three screws (105A/106A), to release the shaft line (20/22), from the gearbox output shaft.
6. Remove the motor unit and its seal.
7. Isolate the shaft line (20/22), and place it in a safe location, protected from impacts.
It is recommended that you check the condition of the seal (13), and if necessary replace it during reassembly.
Check the condition of the sheaths(3).
WARNING: During reassembly, coat the bore of the drive system (E) that receives the gearbox output shaft
with grease, and apply Freinfilet® thread locking compound to the three tappings for the screws (105A/
106A) (see "Lubrication" section, page 20).
52 / 396
4.12.6. Step 4: Disassembly of Connecting Rod Assembly (22) and Rotor (20)
1. Remove the shaft line (20/22) as per steps 1, 2 and 3 described above.
2. Remove the three screws (105A/106A) to disconnect the connecting rod assembly (22) from the rotor (20).
WARNING: During reassembly, coat the bore of the drive system (E) that receives the rotor head with
grease, and apply Freinfilet® thread locking compound to the three tappings for the screws (105A/106A)
(see "Lubrication" section, page 20).
4.12.7. Step 4a: Disassembly of Mechanical Seal (16/17)
1. Remove the stator (1) and the shaft line (20/22) as per steps 1, 2 and 3 described above.
2. Slide the rotating part (16), of the mechanical seal onto the gearbox output shaft by handling the bellows
and the spring only.
3. Remove the spacer (88) from the motor unit.
4. Press on the rear face of the stationary seat (17) and extract it from the spacer (88).
4.12.8. Step 5: Removing the sheaths (3)
1. Remove the rod assembly (22) and the rotor (20) following steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 described above.
2. Place pliers perpendicular to the lug of the collars (127/127A), and cut the lug.
3. Slide the sheath (3) on the connecting rod (22).
4. Remove the screw (V) and detach the axles (A1, A2) from the drive system (E).
5. Remove the sheaths (3).
WARNING: During reassembly, coat the screw (V) with Freinfilet® and fill each sheath with 30 g of grease
(see "Lubrication" section, page 20).
4.13. Remounting the pump
WARNING: To preserve optimum operating characteristics for the pump, it is essential to use original PCM
parts only. Pump maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel only, in compliance with the
recommendations in force.
53 / 396
4.13.1. Reassembly chart
54 / 396
4.13.2. Step 1: Reassembly of Mechanical Seal (16/17)
NOTE: the parts that receive the mechanical seal must be clean and free of defects.
During storage, never place the face carrier seat and stationary seat on the contact surface without a
protective foil.
Ensure that installation is performed under conditions of strict cleanliness.
During assembly, never force a part into position.
Never use oil or grease during assembly.
1. Slowly and steadily push the stationary seat (17) into the housing in the spacer (88).
2. Centre the spacer (88) on the gearbox flange, and position the opening at the bottom.
3. Place the rotating unit (spring unit) (16) on the gearbox output shaft by turning it slightly clockwise. To reduce
friction during assembly, the elastomer bellows and the output shaft must be moistened using low surface
tension water (i.e. water with a flushing agent added), or with a flushing agent alone.
4. Eliminate scratches from the bearing surfaces using ethyl alcohol and cellulose cloths (no fabrics, no rags!).
After that, do not touch the bearing surfaces with your bare fingers.
4.13.3. Step 1b: Reinstalling the sheath (3)
1. Slide the sheaths (3) on the connecting rod (22).

2. Grease the axles (A1, A2) and the end of the connecting rod (22) (see "Lubrication" section, page 20).
3. Fill the sheath (3) with grease (30 g per sheath, see "Lubrication" section, page 20).
4. Insert the axle (A1) in the drive system (E), and then the connecting rod (22) in the axle (A1).
5. Slide the axle (A2) in the drive system (E), and then the axle (A1) and the connecting rod (22). Position the
axle (A2) so that it does not project beyond the openings in the drive system (E).
6. Lock the axle (A2) by inserting the screw (V) coated with Freinfilet® in the connecting rod (22) (see
"Lubrication" section, page 20).
Tighten the assembly (see section "Tightening torque", page 20).
55 / 396
7. Cover the drive system (E) with the sheath (3) and position it in the grooves on the connecting rod (22) and
the drive system (E).
8. Position the collars (127/127A) in the grooves in the sheath (3) and tighten by fully closing the lug of the
collars (127/127A) using pliers.
4.13.4. Step 2b: Reinstalling the Connecting Rod Assembly (22)
1. Replace the sheath (3) (as per the procedure described above).
2. Lightly grease (see "Lubrication" section, page 20) the bore of the drive system (E) that receives the rotor
head (20) and assemble them.
3. Use the flat point set screw (105A) and two long dog point screws (106A) to secure the connecting rod
assembly (22) to the rotor (20) whilst observing the position and assembly order of the screws as described
below:
1. Tighten the flat point set screw (105A) coated with Freinfilet® (see "Lubrication" section, page 20) to 10
Nm torque in the conical housing in the rotor (20).
2. Next, tighten both long dog point screws (106A) coated with Freinfilet® in the cylindrical housings in the
rotor (20).
4.13.5. Step 3: Reassembling the Shaft Line (20/22)
1. Replace the mechanical seal (16/17) (as per the procedure described above).
2. Lightly grease (see "Lubrication" section, page 20) the bore of the drive system (E) that receives the gearbox
output shaft.
56 / 396
3. Ensure that the seal (13) is located on the spacer (88).
4. Slide the drive system (E) onto the reduction gear output shaft.
5. Secure the shaft line (20/22), using the flat point set screw (105A), and two long dog point screws (106A), to
the reduction gear output shaft, whilst observing the position and assembly order of the screws as described
below:
1. Tighten the flat point set screw (105A) coated with Freinfilet® to 10 Nm torque in the conical housing in
the gearbox output shaft.
2. Next, tighten both long dog point screws (106A) coated with Freinfilet® in the cylindrical housings in the
gearbox output shaft (36).
4.13.6. Step 4: Reassembly of Motor Unit and Shaft Line (20/22)
1. Replace the shaft line (20/22) (as per the procedure described above).
2. Check the seal (13) is in place on the spacer.
3. Insert the shaft line (20/22) in the body (50) avoiding any impact.
4. Connect the motor unit to the body (50) using the nuts (261) and washers (328).
Take care not to rub or puncture the sheaths (3) on the body (50).
4.13.7. Step 5: replacing the stator (1)
1. Replace the motor and the shaft line (20/22) (as per the procedure described above).
3. Lock the drive shaft, and then tighten the stator (1) on the lubricated rotor (20) (see "Lubrication" section,
page 20).
4. Reinstall the motor cowl.
5. Tighten and lock the nuts on the tie rods (80).
WARNING: Place the nuts on the shortest threaded length of the tie rod (80) (installation length: bm =
24 mm).
6. Tighten the tie rods (80) in the body (50) until the nut comes into contact.
7. Position the port (54) on the end of the stator (1) whilst supporting the stator.
8. Lock the assembly using the nuts and washers.
57 / 396
4.13.8. Step 6: Reinstalling the Cover Plates (172)
1. Replace the stator (1) (as per the procedure described above).
2. Check that the twelve pre-coated screws (104) are present in the body (50).
3. Position the port (54A) and the flat seal (47) on the body (50) to the right, the left, or vertically.
4. Position the profile of the flat seal (47) according to the shape of the bores in the body (50).
5. Close off the remaining free openings in the body (50), using the cover plates (172) equipped with their flat
seal (47).
6. Tighten the flange covers (172) using the nuts (107) and washers (103).
4.13.9. Step 7: Reinstalling the Pump on the Operating Site
1. Place the pump in position, seal the connectors according to type, and connect the motor (voir section
"Installation", page 10).
2. Familiarise yourself with the characteristics of the product in order to take all necessary precautions
concerning the safety of personnel.
3. Following the start-up procedure for normal operation (see page 14).
4. Follow the start-up instructions to be respected before the first commissioning (see page 15).
4.14. Equipment Storage when not in Use
Proceed as follows:
1. Release pressure at the suction and discharge.
2. Drain the pipework and the pump.
3. Clean the pipework and the pump using a cleaning product that is compatible with the pumped product and
pump materials.
4. Run the pump for more effective cleaning.
5. Switch off the pump.
6. Isolate the pump from the rest of the circuit.
4.14.1. Preserving the Rubber Components
We recommend that you store all rubber parts in a cool location, away from light to avoid damage by UV rays.
58 / 396
5. Appendices
Risk prevention
Technical description
Accessories (optional)
Automatic control (optional)
59 / 396
Risk prevention
To return any equipment, please complete this form and include it with the equipment.
60 / 396
Betriebsanleitung

DATE : 23/09/2022 TAG N° A-110-PuE-01/02
Mechanical seal
5.2.
PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

www.pcm.eu
61 / 396
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Sealing by mechanical seal

and stuffing box
Accessories for EcoMoineau™ pumps, models: 6M6S -
6M12S - 6M24S - 13M6S - 13M12S - 20M6L - 25M6L
Document No.: NIPMETM404EN-EU (genuine manual)


62 / 396
Table of contents
1. General .................................................................................................................................................. 3
2. Characteristics and installation .......................................................................................................... 4
2.1.1. Sealing with a Stuffing Box ............................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.1.2. Sealing with a Mechanical Seal ...................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2. Build Specifications................................................................................................................................. 5
2.3. Equipment Installation ............................................................................................................................ 5
2.3.1. Sealing with a Stuffing Box type P1/ P3.......................................................................................................................................... 5
2.3.2. Sealing with a Single Mechanical Seal type G181.......................................................................................................................... 5
2.3.3. Sealing with a Single Mechanical Seal with Quench: type G381.................................................................................................... 6
3. Maintenance .......................................................................................................................................... 7
3.1. Preventive Maintenance ......................................................................................................................... 7
3.1.1. List of Spare Parts .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7
3.2. Corrective Maintenance.......................................................................................................................... 8
3.2.1. Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................................................. 8
3.3. Disassembly ........................................................................................................................................... 9
3.3.1. Sealing with a Stuffing Box ............................................................................................................................................................. 9
3.3.2. Sealing with a Mechanical Seal ...................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.3.3. Sealing by double cartridge mechanical seal................................................................................................................................ 10
3.4. Reassembly .......................................................................................................................................... 10
3.4.1. Sealing with a Stuffing Box ........................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.4.2. Sealing with a Mechanical Seal .................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.4.3. Automatic Greaser (optional) ........................................................................................................................................................ 12
3.5. Storing the Equipment when not in Use ............................................................................................... 12
2 Accessories for EcoMoineau™ pumps – Instruction Manual – NIPMETM404EN-EU
63 / 396
1. General
This manual aims to help you keep your pump in good working order. It is supplementary to the instruction
manual of the pump.
The information contained in this manual may not be copied or published in any form whatsoever, whether by
printing, photography, recording on microfilm or any other means (electronic or mechanical) without the prior
written consent of PCM SA.
The information given in this manual is subject to change without notice.
PCM SA or its representatives decline all responsibility in the event of damage resulting from the use of
this manual. This exemption from responsibility applies to damage of all types, including (without any limit)
compensatory damages, whether direct or indirect, loss of data, profits or return of capital, loss or damage
caused to the property of others, and third-party claims.
PCM SA or its representatives accept no responsibility and do not guarantee the accuracy, completeness, or
up-to-date nature of the information contained in this manual.
Accessories for EcoMoineau™ pumps – Instruction Manual – NIPMETM404EN-EU 3
64 / 396
2. Characteristics and installation
2.1. Operating Principle
2.1.1. Sealing with a Stuffing Box
A basic stuffing box (type P1) consists of a row of pre-formed braids (44), squeezed in a body (40), via a gland
follower (42).
Its purpose is to provide a seal between the pump body (50), and the atmosphere at the interface where the
drive shaft passes through. A slight leak is essential to lubricate the contact with the shaft and to evacuate heat.
During factory testing of the pump, the stuffing box is adjusted to obtain this leak (1 or 2 drops approximately
every 10 seconds). If the leak has increased after 15 minutes of operation, tighten the nuts (115) half a turn. The
temperature of the body (50) should not exceed 40°C.
For a lubricated stuffing box (type P3), a lubricating lantern (43) is placed between the braids (44) opposite
the sealing liquid injection orifice. This must be connected to the supply line of this product. Lubrication can be
performed by an automatic greasing nipple (77A) which provides a continuous injection of grease (contained in
the cartridge 77B).
2.1.2. Sealing with a Mechanical Seal
At the drive shaft, the seal between the pump body (50) and the atmosphere is provided by one of the following
systems:
• G181: Single mechanical seal.
• G381: Single mechanical seal with Quench.
The fixed bearing disc (17) is immobilised in the body (57). A rotating part (16) is installed on the drive shaft
and, via a spring, this rotating part comes into contact with the fixed bearing disc (17). The thrusting force of the
spring is given by an adjustment value (X) which must be observed during assembly.
There are both mechanical and hydraulic forces acting on the friction surfaces.
65 / 396
These are the following three forces:
• The elastic component exerts a force because it brings the faces closer together.
• The pressure of the fluid acting on the semi-dynamic friction surface exerts a hydraulic closing force.
• The gradient of the pressure field of the film in the interface acting on the friction surface exerts an opening
force.
The resultant of these forces must be positive to keep the two friction surfaces in contact.
Under normal operating conditions, there may be a slight leak.
The use of a type G381 mechanical seal is mainly recommended for applications with clogging products, for low
temperatures, and for fluids likely to form a deposit when in contact with the atmosphere.
Lubrication can be performed by an automatic greasing nipple (77A) which provides a continuous injection of
grease (contained in the cartridge 77B).
NOTE: a seal must not run dry.

The auxiliary lubrication system must be clean and filtered.
The parts that receive the mechanical seal must be clean and free of defects.
protective foil.
2.2. Build Specifications
Element Material(s) used
Stuffing box body (40) C35E
Gland follower (42) EN-GJL250
Mechanical seal body (55/57) C35E
Braid (44) PTFE fibre
Lantern (43) X2CrNiMo17-12-2
Friction surfaces of mechanical seal (16/17) Carbide / Carbide or Carbon / Carbide
O'ring FKM
2.3. Equipment Installation
2.3.1. Sealing with a Stuffing Box type P1/ P3
The main precautions to apply for this type of equipment are to carefully observe the stuffing box tightening
instructions and the leakage rate (approximately 1 or 2 drops every 10 seconds). For a seal with automatic
greasing, take care not to damage the grease cartridge when replacing it.
2.3.2. Sealing with a Single Mechanical Seal type G181
The rotating surfaces of the friction surfaces are flat due to bedding in. It is important to ensure that the
components of the equipment are kept as clean as possible and are protected from damage under all
circumstances.
The performance characteristics of the equipment depend on its environment and the operating conditions
to which it is subjected. You should therefore consider that the time spent checking the environment before
installation can help to prevent premature failure and can therefore reduce equipment maintenance costs.
66 / 396
All handling must be done with the greatest care to protect the critical parts of the seal (friction surfaces, O-rings),
which must not be hit. An effective seal essentially depends on how carefully the mechanical seal is installed.
Before installation begins, ensure that all the parts to be installed are clean and that the products to be used are
compatible with the seals.
You must also check that the O-rings have no trace of cuts, to avoid damaging the O-rings on assembly.
Ensure that there are no knocks or marks on the bearing surfaces of the O-rings, and eliminate any imperfections
or scratches.
Carefully clean and examine the bearing surface and the bore of the stuffing box.
NB: Type G181 is not suitable for a vertical pump installation.
2.3.3. Sealing with a Single Mechanical Seal with Quench: type G381
The friction surfaces are lubricated by the pumped product. Flushing must be performed with a high-quality
product that complies with applicable specifications. The Quench flow rate is 0.3 litre per minute (0.08 gal/min)
at a maximum pressure of 0.1 bar. The circulation of the flushing fluid in the Quench must be carried out in strict
compliance with these instructions.
Any leaks or spraying of the pumped product are handled by the flushing fluid of the Quench. It is also used to
avoid dry running of the friction surfaces in the event of vertical installation of the pump motor unit or when there
is a risk of empty running inside the pump. The flow rate must be adjusted so that the outlet temperature of the
fluid does not exceed 55°C.
It is advisable to install certain safety features to ensure that the above conditions are fulfilled. The following
diagram lists the devices we recommend on an open lubrication circuit to facilitate circulation.
1: Pressurised liquid source. 2: Filter. 3: Solenoid valve cut-out. 4: Needle valve (adjusts the flow rate to obtain
the conditions described above). 5: Flow rate alarm. 6: Mechanical seal. 7: To use.
67 / 396
3. Maintenance
3.1. Preventive Maintenance
3.1.1. List of Spare Parts
WARNING: All servicing must be carried out by trained, qualified personnel in accordance with the
instructions given in the present manual.
Any failure to observe this rule releases PCM from all responsibility.
3.1.1.1. Sealing with a Mechanical Seal
Pump Shaft Assembly* Mechanical seal Sealing ring

(16/17) (5)
6M6S - 6M12S - 6M24S - 13M6S - 13M12S - D35 G181A C09074F186 (x1) –

20M6L - 25M6L
G181B 41247-000 (x1) –
G381A C09074F186 (x1) C09015V160

(x1)
G381B 41247-000 (x1) C09015V160

(x1)
*A = carbon/carbide ; B = carbide/carbide.
Grease cartridge Part Number: C10010A000
3.1.1.2. Sealing with a Stuffing Box
Pump Shaft Assembly Braid (44) Lantern

(43)
6M6S - 6M12S - 6M24S - 13M6S - 13M12S - 20M6L - D35 P1 41079-141 –

25M6L (x6)
P3 41079-141 34807-014
(x4)
Grease cartridge Part Number: C10010A000
68 / 396
3.2. Corrective Maintenance
3.2.1. Troubleshooting
3.2.1.1. Incidents and Causes
Incident
Dynamic leak in sealing

system from start-up
an abnormal noise
in sealing system
The seal makes

heating in seal
Static leak
Abnormal
Solutions
(see section
Causes below)
The braids are worn or the stuffing box is loose ● ● 1
The seal is damaged ● ● 2
Incorrect assembly ● ● 3
Geometric fault in the adapter fittings ● ● 4
Poor flatness of the mechanical seal surfaces ● ● 5
Operating conditions are too harsh ● 6
Poor choice of seal ● 7
Poor lubrication and/or cooling ● 8
Stuffing box is too tight and the required leak is not present ● 9
Poor lubrication, dry running ● 10
3.2.1.2. Solutions
Remedy no. Description
1 Replace all braids or tighten the stuffing box.
2 Check condition of seals, faces, etc.
3 (at the assembly procedure, taking care to follow the instructions.
4 Check the geometry.
5 Bed in the faces of the mechanical seal (contact PCM Services).
6 Check the operating conditions.
69 / 396
Remedy no. Description
7 Review the choice of equipment to determine the most suitable seal.
8 Check the injections, sealing circuit, thermo-siphon, etc.
9 Loosen the stuffing box until the desired leak is obtained.
10 Restore the lubrication and pressurisation circuits. Eliminate gas pockets, etc.
3.3. Disassembly
WARNING: Before any procedures are performed, the equipment must be at atmospheric pressure,
ambient temperature, purged, and degassed. All control valves must be locked.
Before performing any servicing on the pump, please check that all necessary precautions have been taken:
pump switched off, upstream and downstream valves closed, pipes cleaned and purged, electrical power
supply disconnected and made inaccessible. All the usual precautions must be taken, in accordance with
the texts in force regarding the safety of personnel.
WARNING: Follow the instructions in the Instruction Manual for the pump.
3.3.1.1. Type: P1 / P3
1. Remove the nuts (115), and slide the gland follower (42), the braids (44) and the lantern (43) on the shaft.
The braids are split and can be removed from the pump shaft.
2. Check the condition of the pump shaft's surface. If it is marked, worn, or rough, it must be replaced.
Never disassemble a mechanical seal that is not leaking.

Follow the instructions in the Instruction Manual for the pump by de-coupling the drive shaft (36) from the
gearbox or the drive system.
3.3.2.1. Type: G181 (single)
1. Loosen the two mounting screws from the rotating part (16) of the mechanical seal.
2. Extract the rotating part (16) from the pump drive shaft (36).
3. Remove the body (57) equipped with the stationary seat (17).
4. Press on the rear face of the stationary seat (17) and extract it from the body (57).
Check the condition of the seals.
3.3.2.2. Type: G381 (single with Quench)
1. Loosen the two mounting screws from the rotating part (16) of the mechanical seal.
2. Extract the rotating part (16) from the pump drive shaft (36).
3. Remove the body (57) equipped with the stationary seat (17) and the Quench assembly.
70 / 396
5. Detach the body (55) from the body (57).
6. Press on the rear face of the stationary seat (17) and extract it from the body (57).
Check the condition of the seals.
Check the condition of the surface of the pump shaft where the sealing ring (5) rubs against it. If it is marked or
worn, it must be replaced (for a lubricated system).
3.3.3. Sealing by double cartridge mechanical seal
Remove the flexible lubrication, set up the positioning blocks.

Loosen the fastening screws of the sleeve on the shaft.
3.4. Reassembly
To preserve optimum operating characteristics for the pump, it is essential to use original PCM parts
only. Pump maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel only, in compliance with the
recommendations in force.
3.4.1.1. Type: P1 / P3
1. Check that the pump drive shaft (36) is in good condition.

2. Place the first braid (44) in the bottom of the bore of the body (40).
3. Place the other braids (44) in the body (40).
Orient the braids (44) to place the splits between them at 90° to each other, and stack the braids on top of
each other.
Do not use sharp tools.
For a type P3 installation, place the lubrication lantern (43) in the body (40) (specifically: with tappings Rp 1/
8) to replace the two central braids.
4. Insert the gland follower (42) in the body (40).

5. Tighten the assembly with the bolts (315/115/121).
6. For a type P3 installation, install the lubrication system.
7. Adjust the tightness of the nuts (115) in operation, as explained in section 2.1.1.
The parts that receive the mechanical seal must be clean and free of defects.
protective foil.
Never use oil or grease during assembly.
To install type G181, G381 mechanical seal, check Dimension X according to the following diagram.
71 / 396
3.4.2.1. Type: G181 (single)
1. Slowly and steadily push the stationary seat (17) into the housing of the support (57) while observing the
position of the notch that accommodates the pin (83).
2. Fit the body (57) and stationary seat (17) assembly on the pump drive shaft (36).
3. Centre the body (57) in the pump spacer (88).
Eliminate scratches from the bearing surfaces using ethyl alcohol and cellulose cloths (no fabrics, no rags!).
4. Place the rotating unit (spring unit) (16) on the pump drive shaft (36) by turning it slightly clockwise. To
reduce friction during assembly, the elastomer bellows and the pump shaft must be moistened using low
surface tension water (i.e. water with a flushing agent added), or with a flushing agent alone.
5. Push the rotating unit (16) uniformly on the stationary seat (17) until Dimension X is obtained.
6. Tighten the screws of the rotating unit (16) in two stages: Place them in contact with the shaft (36) and then
check that Dimension X is observed, and tighten.
Tighten to the appropriate torque (see pump manual).
7. Turn the pump shaft by hand and ensure that the assembly rotates properly.
8. Continue to remount the pump (see pump manual).
9. Perform a static test to ensure that the seal is tight.
3.4.2.2. Type: G381 (single with Quench)
1. Slowly and steadily push the stationary seat (17) into the housing of the support (57) while observing the
position of the notch that accommodates the pin (83).
2. Place the sealing ring (5) in the support (55).
Check the condition of the surface of the pump shaft where the sealing ring (5) rubs against it. If it is marked
or worn, it must be replaced.
3. Slide the body (55) onto the pump drive shaft (36).
4. Position the O-ring (193).
5. Fit the body (57) and stationary seat (17) assembly on the pump drive shaft (36).
6. Centre the body (55) on the body (57) and connect them using the nuts (155) and washers (121).
7. Centre the body (57) in the pump spacer (88).
72 / 396
Eliminate scratches from the bearing surfaces using ethyl alcohol and cellulose cloths (no fabrics, no rags!).
8. Place the rotating unit (spring unit) (16) on the pump drive shaft (36) by turning it slightly clockwise. To
reduce friction during assembly, the elastomer bellows and the pump shaft must be moistened using low
surface tension water (i.e. water with a flushing agent added), or with a flushing agent alone.
9. Push the rotating unit (16) uniformly on the stationary seat (17) until Dimension X is obtained.
10. Tighten the screws of the rotating unit (16) in two stages: Place them in contact with the shaft (36) and then
check that Dimension X is observed, and tighten.
11. Turn the pump shaft by hand and ensure that the assembly rotates properly.
12. Continue reassembling the pump (refer to Instruction Manual NIPMM4M)
13. Perform a static test to ensure that the seal is tight.
14. Place the lubrication system in the location for the plugs (160) (tapping Rp 1/8).
3.4.3. Automatic Greaser (optional)
This system provides a continuous injection of grease to lubricate the sealing system.
To install it:
1. Remove the plugs (160) from the body (55/57).
2. Tighten the nipple (152) on the body (55/57).
3. Tighten the opposite plug (459).
4. Remove the plug from the grease cartridge (77B).
5. Insert the grease cartridge (77B) in the cover.
6. Secure this assembly to the greasing nipple (77A) by applying light pressure to compress the spring, and
then turn it a quarter turn.
Take care not to damage the grease cartridge when replacing it.
The connectors of the assembly must be fitted in a leaktight manner.
3.5. Storing the Equipment when not in Use
When the seal is stored installed on the machine, it is recommended that you rotate the shaft one quarter turn
every month to prevent the sealing faces from sticking.
73 / 396
Betriebsanleitung

DATE : 23/09/2022 TAG N° A-110-PuE-01/02
Gearmotor
5.3.
PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

www.pcm.eu
74 / 396
B 1000 – en
Gear units
Manual with installation instructions
75 / 396
Pos : 4 /Anl eitung en/El ektr onik /FU und Starter/0. Pr olog/_Pr olog: Anleitung les en (2022- 07- 20 12:21:40) @ 88\m od_1651830289006_388.docx @ 2909470 @ @ 1
Read document and

keep for future reference
Read this document carefully prior to performing any work on or putting the device into operation. It is
essential to read and observe the instructions in this document. They serve as the prerequisite for
smooth and safe operation and the fulfilment of any warranty claims.
Contact Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG if your questions regarding the handling of the device are
not answered in this document or if you require further information.
The German version of this document is the original. The German document is always decisive. If this
document is available in other languages, this will be a translation of the original document.
Keep this document in the vicinity of the device so that it is available if required.
Pos : 5 /Anl eitung en/El ektr onik /FU und Starter/0. Pr olog/_Pr olog: Anleitung les en_Ergänzung für all e Ger äte auß er Safety [M ot, Getr., FU] @ 87\m od_1649858437113_388.doc x @ 2904576 @ @ 1
Use the version of this documentation that is valid for your device at the time of delivery. You can find
the currently valid version of the documentation under www.nord.com.
Pos : 6 /Anl eitung en/Getriebe/0. Prol og/_Prol og: Anl eitung lesen_Zus atz [B1000, B1050] @ 87\m od_1649859843798_388.doc x @ 2904652 @ @ 1
Please also note the following documents:

• Gear unit catalogues,
• Documentation for the electric motor,
• Documentation for equipment which is attached or provided.
Pos : 8 /Allgemei n/D as deutsches Dok um ent ist das Original - für alle deutss prachigen D ok umente (Originale) @ 81\mod_1632925491644_388.docx @ 2831390 @ @ 1
Pos : 9 /Allgemei n/Allgemei ngültige Modul e/---------- Seitenumbr uch ---------- @ 1\mod_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1
76 / 396
Pos : 10 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/0. Pr olog/D ok umentati on - Versionsliste [B 1000] @ 89\m od_1656676863157_388.docx @ 2920320 @ @ 1
Documentation
Designation: B 1000
Part No.: 6052802
Series: Gear units and geared motors
Type series:
Gear unit types: Helical gear unit
NORDBLOC.1® helical in-line gear units
Standard helical gear units
Parallel shaft gear unit
Bevel gear unit
Helical worm gear units
MINIBLOC worm gear units
UNIVERSAL worm gear units
Version list
Title, Order number / Remarks
Date Version
Internal code
B 1000, 6052802 / 0713 -
February
2013
B 1000, 6052802 / 3814 • General corrections
September
2014
B 1000, 6052802 / 1915 • New gear unit types SK 10382.1 + SK 11382.1
April 2015
March 2016 • New bevel gear units SK 920072.1 + SK 930072.1
September • New helical gear units SK 071.1, SK 171.1, SK 371.1, SK 571.1,
2016 SK 771.1;
June 2018 • New parallel shaft gear units SK 0182.1, SK 0282.1, SK 1282.1,
SK 1382.1
• New worm gear unit SK 02040.1
December • Revision of safety and warning information
2018 • New parallel shaft gear units NORDBLOC SK 871.1, SK 971.1,
SK 1071.1
77 / 396
Date Version
Internal code
October • Addition of GRIPMAXX™ (Option M)
2019
B 1000, 6052802 / 3921 • Editorial revision
September • General corrections and amendments
2021
32551
B 1000, 6052802 / 2822 • Revision of the maximum motor weights

July 2022
34343
Table 1: Version list B 1000

Pos : 14 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------- Seitenum bruc h ---------- @ 1\m od_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1
78 / 396
Pos : 15 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/Urheberrechtsv ermerk @ 5\mod_1410955083459_388.docx @ 150427 @ @ 1
Copyright notice
As an integral component of the device described here, this document must be provided to all
users in a suitable form.
Any editing or amendment or other utilisation of the document is prohibited.
Pos : 16 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/H erausgeber @ 67\mod_1613484928402_388.docx @ 2738552 @ @ 1
Publisher
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 • 22941 Bargteheide, Germany • http://www.nord.com
Fon +49 (0) 45 32 / 289-0 • Fax +49 (0) 45 32 / 289-2253
Member of the NORD DRIVESYSTEMS Group

=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Copyright ===
79 / 396
80 / 396
Pos : 18 /Allgem ein/Steuermodul e/Inhaltsverz eic hnis @ 0\m od_1317978518480_388.docx @ 4078 @ @ 1
Table of Contents
=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Inhaltsv erz eichnis ===
1 Safety information ..................................................................................................................................... 11

1.1 Intended use .................................................................................................................................... 11
1.2 Do not make any modifications. ....................................................................................................... 11
1.3 Performing inspection and maintenance work ................................................................................. 11
1.4 Personnel qualification ..................................................................................................................... 11
1.5 Safety for particular activities ........................................................................................................... 12
1.5.1 Check for transport damage ............................................................................................... 12
1.5.2 Safety information for installation and maintenance ........................................................... 12
1.6 Hazards............................................................................................................................................ 12
1.6.1 Hazards when lifting ........................................................................................................... 12
1.6.2 Hazards due to rotating parts ............................................................................................. 12
1.6.3 Hazards due to high or low temperatures ........................................................................... 12
1.6.4 Hazards due to lubricants and other substances ................................................................ 13
1.6.5 Hazards due to noise.......................................................................................................... 13
1.6.6 Hazards due to pressurised coolants ................................................................................. 13
2 Description of gear units .......................................................................................................................... 14
2.1 Gear unit types and type designations ............................................................................................. 14
2.2 Name plate....................................................................................................................................... 16
3 Transport, storage, assembly .................................................................................................................. 17
3.1 Transporting the gear unit ................................................................................................................ 17
3.2 Storage and downtimes ................................................................................................................... 17
3.2.1 General measures .............................................................................................................. 17
3.2.2 Storage and downtimes in excess of 3 months .................................................................. 18
3.2.3 Storage and downtimes in excess of 9 months .................................................................. 18
3.3 Preparing for installation .................................................................................................................. 19
3.3.1 Check for damages ............................................................................................................ 19
3.3.2 Remove corrosion protection agents .................................................................................. 19
3.3.3 Check rotational direction ................................................................................................... 19
3.3.4 Check ambient conditions .................................................................................................. 19
3.3.5 Drives with nsd tupH surface treatment .............................................................................. 19
3.3.6 Installing the oil expansion chamber (Option: OA).............................................................. 20
3.3.7 Installing the oil reservoir tank (Option: OT) ....................................................................... 20
3.4 Installing the gear unit ...................................................................................................................... 21
3.5 Installation of a hub on solid shaft (option: V, L) .............................................................................. 22
3.6 Fitting push-on gear units with fastening element (option: B)........................................................... 24
3.7 Fitting a hollow shaft with shrink disc (Option: S) ............................................................................. 26
3.8 Fitting a hollow shaft with GRIPMAXX™ (Option: M) ....................................................................... 29
3.9 Fitting the covers (option: H, H66).................................................................................................... 31
3.10 Fitting the covers .............................................................................................................................. 32
3.11 Fitting a standard motor (Option: IEC, NEMA, AI, AN) ..................................................................... 32
3.12 Mounting of the cooling coil onto the cooling system ....................................................................... 37
3.13 Installation of the external oil/air cooler ............................................................................................ 38
3.13.1 Connecting hoses ............................................................................................................... 38
3.13.2 Electrical connection........................................................................................................... 38
3.14 Installation of an oil expansion chamber (Option: OA) ..................................................................... 39
3.14.1 Installation of the sizes I, II and III ...................................................................................... 39
3.14.2 Installation of sizes 0A and 0B............................................................................................ 39
3.15 Subsequent painting ........................................................................................................................ 40
3.16 Electrical connection of the mounted motor ..................................................................................... 40
4 Commissioning ......................................................................................................................................... 41
4.1 Checking the oil level ....................................................................................................................... 41
4.2 Activating the vent ............................................................................................................................ 41
4.3 Activating the automatic lubricant dispenser .................................................................................... 42
4.4 Cooling coil (Option: CC) ................................................................................................................. 43
4.5 Running-in time for the worm gear unit ............................................................................................ 44
81 / 396
4.6 Checklist .......................................................................................................................................... 44
5 Service and maintenance ......................................................................................................................... 45
5.1 Inspection and maintenance intervals .............................................................................................. 45
5.2 Service and maintenance work ........................................................................................................ 45
5.2.1 Visual inspection for leaks .................................................................................................. 46
5.2.2 Check for running noises .................................................................................................... 46
5.2.3 Checking the oil level.......................................................................................................... 46
5.2.4 Visual inspection of the rubber buffers (Option: G, VG)...................................................... 47
5.2.5 Visual inspection of the hoses (Option: OT, CS2-X) ........................................................... 47
5.2.6 Re-greasing (Option: VL2, VL3, W, AI, AN) ........................................................................ 47
5.2.7 Replacing the automatic lubricant dispenser ...................................................................... 48
5.2.8 Change the oil .................................................................................................................... 49
5.2.9 Clean and check vent screw ............................................................................................... 49
5.2.10 Replacing the shaft sealing ring.......................................................................................... 49
5.2.11 Re-lubrication of bearings in the gear unit .......................................................................... 50
5.2.12 General overhaul ................................................................................................................ 50
6 Disposal ..................................................................................................................................................... 51
7 Appendix .................................................................................................................................................... 52
7.1 Versions and mounting position ....................................................................................................... 52
7.1.1 Explanation of symbols ....................................................................................................... 52
7.1.2 UNIVERSAL/MINIBLOC worm gear units .......................................................................... 53
7.1.3 Parallel shaft gear units with oil level tank .......................................................................... 54
7.1.4 Overview of mounting positions .......................................................................................... 55
7.2 Lubricants ........................................................................................................................................ 68
7.2.1 Roller bearing greases ....................................................................................................... 68
7.2.2 Gear oils ............................................................................................................................. 69
7.3 Screw tightening torques.................................................................................................................. 71
7.4 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................... 72
7.5 Leakage and leak-tightness ............................................................................................................. 73
7.6 Repair information ............................................................................................................................ 74
7.6.1 Repairs ............................................................................................................................... 74
7.6.2 Internet information............................................................................................................. 74
7.7 Warranty .......................................................................................................................................... 74
7.8 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................... 75
82 / 396
Pos : 20 /Allgem ein/Steuermodul e/Abbildungsv erz eichnis @ 0\m od_1317978515699_388.doc x @ 3917 @ @ 1
List of illustrations
=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Abbildungsv erzeic hnis ===
Figure 1: Name plate ............................................................................................................................................. 16

Figure 2: Example of a simple pulling device ........................................................................................................ 22
Figure 3: Permissible application of force to drive and driven shafts ..................................................................... 23
Figure 4: Applying lubricant to the shaft and the hub............................................................................................. 24
Figure 5: Removing the factory-fitted closing cap .................................................................................................. 25
Figure 6: Gear unit mounted on shaft with a shoulder using the fastening element .............................................. 25
Figure 7: Gear unit mounted on shaft without a shoulder using the fastening element ......................................... 25
Figure 8: Removal using dismantling device ......................................................................................................... 25
Figure 9: Mounting the rubber buffer (Option G and/or VG) on parallel shaft gear units ....................................... 26
Figure 10: Attaching the torque support on bevel gear and worm gear units ........................................................ 26
Figure 11: Hollow shaft with shrink disc ................................................................................................................. 27
Figure 12: GRIPMAXX™, exploded diagram ........................................................................................................ 29
Figure 13: Fitting the covers, Option SH, Option H, and Option H66..................................................................... 31
Figure 14: Disassembly and assembly of the cover cap........................................................................................ 32
Figure 15: Fitting the coupling onto the motor shaft - various types of coupling .................................................... 34
Figure 16: Cooling cover ....................................................................................................................................... 37
Figure 17: Connection of the oil/air cooler ............................................................................................................. 38
Figure 18: Position of the oil expansion chamber .................................................................................................. 39
Figure 19: Position of the oil expansion chamber .................................................................................................. 40
Figure 20: Activating the vent screw ...................................................................................................................... 41
Figure 21: Activating the pressure vent screw ....................................................................................................... 41
Figure 22: Removing the vent plug and fitting the special pressure vent............................................................... 42
Figure 23: Fitting the grease collection container .................................................................................................. 42
Figure 24: Activating the automatic lubricant sensor with standard motor mounting ............................................. 43
Figure 25: Adhesive label ...................................................................................................................................... 43
Figure 26: Checking the oil level with a dipstick .................................................................................................... 47
Figure 27: Re-grease IEC/NEMA adapters AI and AN with option BRG1 ............................................................. 48
Figure 28: Switching the automatic lubricant sensor with standard motor mounting ............................................. 48
Figure 29: Parallel shaft gear units with oil level tank ............................................................................................ 54
83 / 396
Pos : 22 /Allgem ein/Steuermodul e/T abellenv erzeic hnis @ 0\mod_1317978519199_388.docx @ 4124 @ @ 1
List of tables
=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Tabellenverz eic hnis ===
Table 1: Version list B 1000 ..................................................................................................................................... 4

Table 2: Gear unit types and type designations..................................................................................................... 14
Table 3: Versions and options ............................................................................................................................... 15
Table 4: Permissible machine shaft tolerances ..................................................................................................... 30
Table 5: Motor weights IEC motors ....................................................................................................................... 33
Table 6: Motor weights NEMA motors ................................................................................................................... 33
Table7: Motor parallel keys.................................................................................................................................... 35
Table 8: Position of the half-coupling on the NEMA motor shaft............................................................................ 36
Table 9: Checklist for commissioning .................................................................................................................... 44
Table 10: Inspection and maintenance intervals.................................................................................................... 45
Table 11: Materials ................................................................................................................................................ 51
Table 12: Roller bearing greases........................................................................................................................... 68
Table 13: Gear oils ................................................................................................................................................ 70
Table 14: Screw tightening torques ....................................................................................................................... 71
Table 15: Overview of malfunctions....................................................................................................................... 72
Table 16: Definition of leaks according to DIN 3761 .............................................................................................. 73
Pos : 25.1 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/1. Hinw eis e/Sic herheits hinw eis e/01. Sic herheits hinw eise [_Titel] @ 22\m od_1530531998385_388.docx @ 2429407 @ 1 @ 1
84 / 396
1 Safety information
Pos : 25.2.1 /Anlei tungen/Getriebe/1. Hinw eise/Sic herheits hinw eise/Bestimm ungsg emäß e Verw endung 01 [Getriebe MR L/EAC ] @ 79\m od_1630574000235_388.docx @ 2819264 @ 2 @ 1
1.1 Intended use

These gear units are used to transmit rotary movements. They convert velocity and torque. They are
intended for use as part of a drive system in commercially used plant and machinery. The gear units
must not be operated until it has been established that the plant or machinery can be safely operated
with the gear unit. Suitable protective measures must be provided if failure of a gear unit or a geared
motor could result in a risk to persons. The machine or system must comply with local legislation and
directives. All applicable health and safety requirements must be met. In particular, the Machinery
Directive 2006/42/EC, TR CU 010/2011 and the TR CU 020/2011 must be especially observed in the
relevant areas of application.
Pos : 25.2.2 /Anlei tungen/Getriebe/1. Hinw eise/Sic herheits hinw eise/Bestimm ungsg emäß e Verw endung 01a_Kom ponenten [B1000 - Getri ebe k ein ex] @ 81\mod_1633339495928_388.docx @ 2833440 @ @ 1
The gear units and geared motors to which this manual with installation instructions refers to are usually
components for installation in machines according to the current EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EG.
In certain individual cases in which the gear unit or the geared motor is considered as a ready-to-install
drive system for specific applications, this drive system is classified as a incomplete machine according
to the current EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EG. A corresponding declaration of incorporation is
enclosed with the product.
Pos : 25.2.4 /Anlei tungen/Getriebe/1. Hinw eise/Sic herheits hinw eise/Bestimm ungsg emäß e Verw endung 02 [Getriebe kei n ex] @ 33\mod_1559642580030_388.docx @ 2538049 @ @ 1
The gear units may not be used in environments in which an explosive atmosphere can occur.
Pos : 25.2.5 /Anlei tungen/Getriebe/1. Hinw eise/Sic herheits hinw eise/Bestimm ungsg emäß e Verw endung 03 [Getriebe] @ 33\m od_1559642705569_388.docx @ 2538086 @ @ 1
The gear units may only be used according to the information in the technical documentation from
Getriebebau NORD GmbH & Co. KG. Damage to the gear unit may result if the gear unit is not used as
intended and according to the information in the operating and assembly manual. This may also result
in personal injury.
The base or the gear unit mount must be appropriately designed for the weight and torque. All of the
fastenings provided must be used.
Some gear units are equipped with a cooling coil. These gear units may only be operated if the cooling
circuit is connected and in operation.
Pos : 25.5 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/1. Hinw eis e/Sic herheits hinw eis e/Kei ne Veränderungen v ornehmen @ 79\mod_1630576679987_388.docx @ 2819864 @ 2 @ 1
1.2 Do not make any modifications.

Do not make any structural modifications to the gear unit. Do not remove any protective guards.
Pos : 25.6 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/1. Hinw eis e/Sic herheits hinw eis e/Ins pek tionen und Wartung durchführen @ 22\mod_1530529678502_388.docx @ 2429333 @ 2 @ 1
1.3 Performing inspection and maintenance work

Due to lack of maintenance and damage, malfunctions may occur which can result in personal injury.
• Carry out all servicing and maintenance work at the specified intervals.
• Also note that servicing is necessary after long storage periods prior to commissioning.
• Do not operate damaged gear units. The gear unit must not have any leaks.
Pos : 25.7 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/1. Hinw eis e/Sic herheits hinw eis e/Pers onalqualifikation @ 64\m od_1611907700018_388.docx @ 2725830 @ 2 @ 1
1.4 Personnel qualification

All transport, storage, installation, commissioning and maintenance work must be carried out by qualified
specialist personnel.
Qualified specialist personnel are persons who have the training and experience to recognise and avoid
any possible risks.
Pos : 25.9 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------- Seitenum bruc h ---------- @ 1\m od_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1
85 / 396
Pos : 25.10.1 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Sic her heit bei bestimmten Tätigkeiten [_Titel] @ 22\m od_1531811512686_388.docx @ 2433220 @ 2 @ 1
1.5 Safety for particular activities

Pos : 25.10.2 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Auf Tr ansportsc häden k ontr ollieren @ 22\mod_1530528472640_388.docx @ 2429296 @ 3 @ 1
1.5.1 Check for transport damage

Transport damage may cause malfunctions of the gear unit, which may cause personal injury. Oil which
escapes due to leaks may cause a slipping hazard.
• Check the packaging and the gear unit for transport damage.
• Do not operate damaged gear units.
Pos : 25.10.3 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e für Install ati on und Instandhal tung @ 22\m od_1530537922788_388.docx @ 2429600 @ 3 @ 1
1.5.2 Safety information for installation and maintenance

Before starting work on the gear unit disconnect the drive from the power supply and secure it against
accidental switch-on. Allow the gear unit to cool down. Depressurise the cooling circuit lines.
Damaged or defective components, attachment adapters, flanges and covers may have sharp edges.
Wear work gloves and work clothing.
Pos : 25.11.1 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefähr dungen [_Titel] @ 22\mod_1531812422755_388.docx @ 2433257 @ 2 @ 1
1.6 Hazards
Pos : 25.11.2 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefähr dungen beim Anheben 01 @ 34\m od_1559807063051_388.doc x @ 2539250 @ 3 @ 1
1.6.1 Hazards when lifting

Persons may be injured by falling or swinging gear units. Therefore also observe the following
information:
• Cordon off a wide area around the hazard area. Take care that there is adequate space to avoid
swinging loads.
• Never stand under suspended loads.
• Use adequately dimensioned means of transport which are suitable for the purpose. The weight of
the gear unit can be obtained from the type plate.
Pos : 25.11.3 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefähr dungen beim Anheben 02 [Getri ebe] @ 34\m od_1559808648235_388.docx @ 2539334 @ @ 1
• Only lift the gear units by the eye bolts which are provided. The eye bolts must be fully screwed in.
Only pull on the eye bolts vertically, never cross-wise or at an angle. Only use the eye bolts to lift the
gear unit without other components. The eye bolts are not designed for lifting the gear unit with
attachments. Use the eye bolts on both the gear unit and the motor to lift a geared motor.
Pos : 25.11.5 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefähr dung durc h rotier ende Teil ez @ 51\mod_1601301700867_388.docx @ 2674505 @ 3 @ 1
1.6.2 Hazards due to rotating parts

Rotating parts cause a risk of entanglement. This may lead to severe injuries such as crushing or
strangling.
• Provide contact protection. In addition to shafts, this also applies to fans as well as drives and driven
elements such as belt drives, chain drives, shrink discs and couplings. Take possible run-on of the
machine into consideration for the design of protective devices.
• Do not operate the drive without covers or hoods.
• Secure the drive to prevent activation during installation and maintenance work.
• For test operation do not switch on the drive without an installed driven element or secure the motor
shaft key.
• Also observe the safety information in the operating and installation instructions provided by
manufacturers of components supplied.
Pos : 25.11.6 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefähr dungen durc h hohe oder ti efe T emperatur en @ 22\m od_1530531214142_388.docx @ 2429370 @ 3 @ 1
1.6.3 Hazards due to high or low temperatures

The gear unit may heat up to 90 °C during operation. Touching hot surfaces or contact with hot oil may
result in burns. At very low ambient temperatures freezing may occur on contact.
• Only touch the gear unit when wearing gloves after operation or at very low ambient temperatures.
86 / 396
• Before starting maintenance work, allow the gear unit to cool down sufficiently after operation.
• Provide a contact guard if there is a risk that persons may touch the gear unit when it is in operation.
• Bursts of hot oil mist may be emitted from the pressure vent screw during operation. Provide a
suitable guard so that persons cannot be injured by this.
• Do not place any flammable materials on the gear unit.
Pos : 25.11.7 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefähr dungen durc h Sc hmierstoffe und ander e Substanzen @ 22\mod_1530535266235_388.docx @ 2429558 @ 3 @ 1
1.6.4 Hazards due to lubricants and other substances

Chemical substances which are used with the gear unit may be toxic. Eye injuries may result if these
substances enter the eyes. Lubricants and adhesives may cause skin irritation.
Oil mist may escape when vent screws are opened.
Due to lubricants and conservation materials, gear units may be slippery and slip out of the hands. There
is a slipping hazard from spilled lubricants.
• When working with chemical substances wear chemical-resistant gloves and work clothing. Wash
your hands after working.
• Wear protective goggles if there is a possibility of splashed chemicals, for example when filling oil or
during cleaning work.
• If chemicals enter the eyes, rinse with large amounts of cold water immediately. Consult a physician
in case of symptoms.
• Observe the safety data sheets for the chemicals. Keep the safety data sheets in the vicinity of the
gear unit.
• Collect spilled lubricants immediately with a binding agent.
Pos : 25.11.8 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefähr dung durc h Lärm @ 22\mod_1530611473949_388.docx @ 2429977 @ 3 @ 1
1.6.5 Hazards due to noise

Some gear units or attached components may cause hazardous noise levels during operation. Wear
hearing protection if work has to be carried out close to such gear units.
Pos : 25.11.9 /Anleitungen/Getriebe/1. Hi nweis e/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefähr dung durc h unter Dr uck s tehendes Kühlmittel @ 22\m od_1531484732839_388.docx @ 2433177 @ 3 @ 1
1.6.6 Hazards due to pressurised coolants

The cooling system is under high pressure. Damage or opening a cooling line which is under pressure
may result in injury. Depressurise the cooling circuit before working on the gear unit.
Pos : 27 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/2. Getriebebesc hrei bung/2. Getriebebesc hreibung [Titel] @ 3\m od_1368691027023_388.doc x @ 65591 @ 1 @ 1
87 / 396
2 Description of gear units
Pos : 28 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/2. Getriebebesc hrei bung/Ty penbezeic hnungen und Getriebearten [B1000, B2000]z @ 42\mod_1591254842786_388.docx @ 2629830 @ 2 @ 1
2.1 Gear unit types and type designations
Gear unit types/ Type designations

UNICASE helical gear units
2-stage: SK 02, SK 12, SK 22 SK 32, SK 42, SK 52, SK 62N, SK 62, SK 72, SK 82, SK 92, SK 102
3-stage: SK 03, SK 13, SK 23, SK 33N, SK 43, SK 53, SK 63, SK 73, SK 83, SK 93, SK 103
NORDBLOC.1® helical gear unit
1-stage: SK 071.1, SK 171.1, SK 371.1, SK 571.1, SK 771.1, SK 871.1, SK 971.1, SK 1071.1
2-stage: SK 072.1, SK 172.1, SK 372.1, SK 572.1, SK 672.1, SK 772.1, SK 872.1, SK 972.1
3-stage: SK 373.1, SK 573.1, SK 673.1, SK 773.1, SK 873.1, SK 973.1
STANDARD helical gear units
2-stage: SK 0, SK 01, SK 20, SK 25, SK 30, SK 33
3-stage: SK 010, SK 200, SK 250, SK 300, SK 330
UNICASE parallel gear units
2-stage: SK 0182NB, SK 0182.1, SK 0282NB, SK 0282.1, SK 1282, SK 1282.1, SK 2282, SK 3282, SK 4282,
SK 5282, SK 6282, SK 7282, SK 8282, SK 9282
3-stage: SK 2382, SK 3382, SK 4382, SK 5382, SK 6382, SK 7382, SK 8382, SK 9382, SK 10382,
SK 10382.1, SK 11382
UNICASE bevel gear units
3-stage: SK 9012.1, SK 9016.1, SK 9022.1, SK 9032.1, SK 9042.1, SK 9052.1, SK 9062.1, SK 9072.1,
SK 9082.1, SK 9086.1, SK 9092.1, SK 9096.1
4-stage: SK 9013.1, SK 9017.1, SK 9023.1, SK 9033.1, SK 9043.1, SK 9053.1
NORDBLOC.1® bevel gear unit
2-stage: SK 920072.1, SK 92072.1, SK 92172.1, SK 92372.1, SK 92672.1, SK 92772.1, SK 930072.1,
SK 93072.1, SK 93172.1, SK 93372.1, SK 93672.1, SK 93772.1
UNICASE worm gear units
2-stage: SK 02040, SK 02040.1, SK 02050, SK 12063, SK 12080, SK 32100, SK 42125
3-stage: SK 13050, SK 13063, SK 13080, SK 33100, SK 43125
UNIVERSAL SI worm gear units
1-stage: SK 1SI31, SK 1SID31, SK 1SI40, SK 1SID40, SK 1SI50, SK 1SID50, SK 1SI63, SK 1SID63, SK 1SI75
2-stage (Helical worm gear unit): SK 2SID40, SK 2SID50, SK 2SID63
UNIVERSAL SMI worm gear units
1-stage: SK 1SMI31, SK 1SMID31, SK 1SMI40, SK 1SMID40, SK 1SMI50, SK 1SMID50, SK 1SMI63,
SK 1SMID63, SK 1SMI75
2-stage (Helical worm gear unit): SK 2SMID40, SK 2SMID50, SK 2SMID63
Table 2: Gear unit types and type designations
Double gear units consist of two single gear units. The type designation of the SK 73/22 double gear
unit, for example, means that the double gear unit consists of the single gear units SK 73 and SK 22.
Pos : 33 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/2. Getriebebesc hrei bung/Optionen und Ausführ ung en [B1000] @ 43\m od_1591796627333_388.doc x @ 2633580 @ @ 1
88 / 396
Abbreviation
Description
(without) Foot mounting with solid shaft

/31 Worm gear first stage
/40 Worm gear first stage
5 Reinforced output shaft
A Hollow shaft
AI Standard IEC motor attachment
AI…BRG1 Standard IEC motor attachment with manual re-lubrication
AI…RLS Standard IEC motor attachment with integrated back stop
AL Reinforced axial bearing
AN Standard NEMA motor attachment
AN…BRG1 Standard NEMA motor attachment with manual re-lubrication
AN…RLS Standard NEMA motor attachment with integrated back stop
B Fastening element
CC Cooling coil
D Torque arm
DR Pressure vent
EA Splined hollow shaft
F B5 flange
G Rubber buffer for torque arm
H Cover cap
/H10 Modular helical pre-stage for universal worm gear units
H66 IP66 cover
IEC Standard IEC motor attachment
K Torque bracket
L Solid shaft both sides
M GRIPMAXX™
MK Motor bracket
NEMA Standard NEMA motor attachment
OA Oil expansion chamber
OT Oil level tank
R Back stop
S Shrink disc
SCP Screw conveyor flange
SO1 Synthetic oil ISO VG 220
V Solid shaft (for standard helical gear units: reinforced drive)
VG Reinforced rubber buffer
VI Viton radial shaft seals
VL Reinforced output bearings
Agitator version
VL2
- Reinforced bearings
Agitator version
VL3 - Reinforced bearings
- Drywell
VS Reinforced shrink disc
W Free drive shaft
X Housing foot mounting
Z B14 flange
Table 3: Versions and options
89 / 396
Pos : 37 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/2. Getriebebesc hrei bung/Ty pens chil d nicht- Exz @ 50\mod_1601291511854_388.docx @ 2673525 @ 2 @ 1
2.2 Name plate

The name plate must be firmly attached to the gear unit and must not be subjected to permanent soiling.
Please contact the NORD service department if the name plate is illegible or damaged.
Figure 1: Name plate

Explanation
1 DataMatrix code 8 Weight
2 NORD gear unit type 9 Overall gear unit ratio
3 Modes of operation 10 Installation position
4 Year of manufacture 11 Rated speed of gear unit output shaft
5 Serial number 12 Lubricant type, viscosity and quantity
6 Rated torque of gear unit output shaft 13 Customer part number
7 Drive power 14 Operating factor
Pos : 43 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Kopi e v on 3. Tr ansport, Lagerung, M ontage @ 50\m od_1601291650567_388.docx @ 2673563 @ 1 @ 1
90 / 396
3 Transport, storage, assembly
Pos : 44 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Trans port/Trans port des Getriebes 01 headline @ 34\mod_1559812428776_388.docx @ 2539371 @ 2 @ 1
3.1 Transporting the gear unit

Pos : 45 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Trans port/Trans port des Getriebes 02 [Standardg etriebe - Ri ngschr aube] @ 34\m od_1559813589771_388.docx @ 2539562 @ @ 1
WARNING
Hazard due to falling loads
• The thread of the eyebolt must be fully screwed in.
• As shown in the illustration to the right, only lift on the
eyebolts vertically to the female thread and not more
oblique than 45° to the vertical.
• Note the centre of gravity of the gear unit.
Only use the eyebolts attached to the gear unit for transport. If geared motors have an additional eyebolt
attached to the motor, this must also be used.
Pos : 47 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Trans port/Trans port des Getriebes 03z @ 50\mod_1601291699716_388.docx @ 2673601 @ @ 1
Transport the gear unit with care. Impacts to the free ends of shafts may cause internal damage to the
gear unit.
No additional loads must be attached to the gear unit.
Use suitable aids such as cross-beams or similar to facilitate transportation of the gear unit. Gear units
may only be transported with shackles and lifting strapschains at an angle of 90° to 70° to the horizontal.
Pos : 62 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Lager ung/Lag erung und Stillstandsz eiten @ 75\mod_1623247972391_388.docx @ 2789027 @ 2 @ 1
3.2 Storage and downtimes

Pos : 63 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Lager ung/Lag erung allg. @ 75\mod_1623253002532_388.docx @ 2789186 @ 3 @ 1
3.2.1 General measures

• Store the gear unit in a dry space, relative humidity less than 60%.
• Store the gear unit at a temperature in the range of – 5 °C to + 50 °C without severe temperature
fluctuations.
• Do not expose the gear unit to direct sunlight or UV light.
• There must be no aggressive or corrosive substances (contaminated air, ozone, gases, solvents,
acids, alkalis, salts, radioactivity etc.) in the immediate vicinity.
• The gear unit must not be exposed to vibration or oscillation.
• Store the gear unit in the mounting position (see chapter 7.1 "Versions and mounting position").
Secure it against falling.
Pos : 64 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/---------Seitenum bruc h k om pak t --------- @ 13\mod_1476369695906_0.docx @ 2265495 @ @ 1
91 / 396
Pos : 65 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Lager ung/Lag erung 3- 9 M on. @ 75\m od_1623253008235_388.docx @ 2789226 @ 3 @ 1
3.2.2 Storage and downtimes in excess of 3 months

Note the following measures in addition to Section 3.2.1 "General measures".
• Repair damages to the coating. Check if a corrosion protection agent has been applied to the flange
bearing surfaces, the shaft ends and the unpainted surfaces. If required, apply a suitable corrosion
protection agent to the surfaces.
• Seal all openings on the gear unit.
• The output shaft must be rotated by at least one revolution every 3 months so that the contact position
of the gear teeth and the roller bearings are changed.
Pos : 67 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Lager ung/Langzei tlager ung _01 [B1000 - B2050] @ 75\m od_1623392639917_388.docx @ 2789860 @ 35 @ 1
3.2.3 Storage and downtimes in excess of 9 months

Under certain conditions, storage of 2 to 3 years is possible. The specified storage duration is for
guidance only. The actual storage duration depends on the local conditions. Note the following
measures in addition to Sections 3.2.1 "General measures"and 3.2.2 "Storage and downtimes in excess
of 3 months".
Gear units can be supplied prepared for long-term storage. The gear units are completely filled with
lubricant, have VCI corrosion protection agent mixed with the gear oil or are filled with small quantities
of VCI concentrate. The adhesive label on the housing shows the respective information.
Conditions of the gear unit and storage area for long-term storage prior to commissioning:
• Store the gear unit at a temperature in the range of -5 °C to +40 °C without severe temperature
fluctuations.
• Check if the sealing cord in the vent screw is in place. It must not be removed during storage.
• Store the gear unit in a dry space. With a relative humidity less than 60%, the gear unit can be stored
for up to two years; with a relative humidity less than 50%, storage of up to three years is possible.
• For gear units, which are filled with VCI concentrate for long-term storage, the VCI concentrate must
be renewed after 2 years and distributed in the oil by rotating the shaft.
• In tropical regions, protect the gear unit against damage by insects.
• Gear unit components such as brakes, couplings, belt drive, and cooling units must be protected for
a long-term storage in accordance to their operation instructions.
Pos : 68 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Lager ung/Langzei tlager ungz _03 @ 75\mod_1623419508584_388.docx @ 2790551 @ @ 1
In addition to the preparations listed in 4 "Commissioning", the following measures are necessary before
commissioning:
• Check the gear unit for external damage.
• After storage of more than 2 years, or with storage temperatures outside of the permissible range
from -5 °C to +40 °C, replace the lubricant in the gear unit before commissioning.
• If the gear unit is completely filled, the oil level must be reduced according to the mounting position.
For the lubricant quantity and lubricant type, refer to the information on the name plate.
• For gear units without oil filling, the oil level must be refilled and checked according to chapter 5.2.3
"Checking the oil level" before commissioning. The VCI concentrate may remain in the gear unit. The
VCI concentrate is not mixable with polyglycol-based lubricants (PG oils). If PG oils are used, the
VCI concentrate must be removed from the gear unit. When using VCI additive, only use the oil types
which are specified on the name plate and are approved by Getriebebau NORD (see chapter 7.2.2
"Gear oils").
Pos : 71 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Lager ung/Langzei tlager ung _04 [B1000, B2000] @ 79\m od_1630594429942_388.docx @ 2820515 @ @ 1
• For the option with manual re-lubrication, switch the bearing grease after a storage of more than 2
years. The service life of the grease is reduced after a storage time or gearbox shutdown of more
than 9 months (see chapter 5.2.6 "Re-greasing (Option: VL2, VL3, W, AI, AN)").
• Gear units filled with VCI concentrate for long-term storage are fully closed. Take care that the vent
is fitted and released as necessary prior to commissioning.
92 / 396
Pos : 77 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Vorbereitungen z um Aufstell en_01 @ 28\m od_1551437422532_388.doc x @ 2493987 @ 2 @ 1
3.3 Preparing for installation

Pos : 78 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Auf Sc häden über prüfen @ 50\mod_1601292567207_388.docx @ 2673757 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.1 Check for damages

Please examine the delivery for transport and packaging damage immediately on receipt. Pay particular
attention to radial shaft seals and sealing caps. Report any damage to the carrier immediately.
Do not put the drive into operation if damage such as leaks are visible.
Pos : 79 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Korrosi ons schutzmi ttel entfer nen @ 50\mod_1601292618930_388.docx @ 2673803 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.2 Remove corrosion protection agents

All bare metal surfaces and shafts of the drive are protected with corrosion protection agents before
shipping.
Thoroughly remove corrosion protection agents and any dirt (e.g. colour residues) from all shafts, flange
surfaces and gear unit attachment surfaces before assembly.
Pos : 80 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Drehrichtung pr üfen @ 51\mod_1601292660617_388.docx @ 2673849 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.3 Check rotational direction

If an incorrect rotational direction may result in damage or potential risk, check for the correct rotational
direction of the output shaft during a test run before attaching it to the machine. Ensure the correct
rotational direction during operation.
For gear units with an integrated back stop, switching the drive motor to the blocked direction of rotation,
may result in damage to the gear unit. Gears with integrated back stops are marked with arrows on the
drive/driven sides. The arrows point in the rotation direction of the gear unit. When connecting the motor
and during motor control, ensure, e.g. by testing the field of rotation, that the gear unit can only operate
in the direction of rotation.
Pos : 81 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Drehrichtung pr üfen Verweis G1000 WN @ 49\m od_1599579478202_388.docx @ 2666924 @ @ 1
For further explanations refer to Catalogue G1000 and document WN 0-000 40.
Pos : 82 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Umgebungsbedi ngungen prüfen @ 51\m od_1601292705144_388.docx @ 2673895 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.4 Check ambient conditions

Make sure that no aggressive or corrosive substances which attack metal, lubricants or elastomers are
present at the installation site or are subsequently expected during operation. If such substances are to
be expected, contact Getriebebau NORD.
The gear unit, especially its radial shaft seals should be protected from exposure to direct sunlight.
Pos : 83 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Umgebungsbedi ngungen prüfen _02 [B1000] @ 81\mod_1633344552750_388.docx @ 2833557 @ @ 1
The standard permissible ambient temperature range for synthetic gear unit oils (CLP PG … and
CLP HC…) is –20 °C to +40 °C. This temperature range can be extended according to the lubricant
table (see chapter 7.2.2 "Gear oils"), if all mounted materials of the gear unit and the application-related
speed, torques and modes of operation allow this. Note the project planning documents of the order for
this. In case of doubt, ask Getriebebau NORD.
For mineral oil (CLP), the permissible ambient temperature range in accordance to the above stated
lubricant table is restricted. The lubricant type is indicated on the name plate (see chapter 2.2 "Name
plate ").
For installation altitudes above 1000 m above sea level, the permissible speed and torques may be
reduced. Note the project planning documents of the order for this. In case of doubt, ask Getriebebau
NORD.
Pos : 84 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/ns d tupH @ 49\mod_1599579502101_388.docx @ 2667016 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.5 Drives with nsd tupH surface treatment

Drives with nsd tupH surface treatment must be electrically decoupled from other components by the
use of non-conductive intermediate layers in order to prevent galvanic corrosion.
Pos : 85 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Ölausgleic hs behälter monti eren [B1000] @ 49\m od_1599579513109_388.docx @ 2667062 @ 3 @ 1
93 / 396
3.3.6 Installing the oil expansion chamber (Option: OA)
Mount the oil expansion chamber (Option OA) according to document WN 0-530 04. For gear units with
a M10x1 vent screw or pressure relief vent, document WN 0-521 35 must also be observed during
installation.
Pos : 88 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Ölstands behälter monti eren Getriebem otor [B1000] @ 79\m od_1630595346601_388.docx @ 2820591 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.7 Installing the oil reservoir tank (Option: OT)

Mount the oil reservoir tank (Option OT) according to document WN 0-521 30.
A pressure vent is optionally available. If available, screw the M12x1.5 pressure relief vent into the oil
reservoir tank.
94 / 396
Pos : 92 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Aufstellen des Getriebes 01 headline @ 30\m od_1552984754668_388.docx @ 2511994 @ 2 @ 1
3.4 Installing the gear unit

Pos : 93 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Aufstellen des Getriebes 02 [B1000] @ 34\mod_1559653394421_388.docx @ 2538251 @ 2 @ 1
NOTICE!
Gear unit damage through overheating
• For geared motors, check that the cooling air from the motor fan can circulate around the gear unit
without obstruction.
Pos : 96 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Aufs tell en/Aufstellen des Getriebes 03 [B1000, B2000]z @ 49\mod_1599730768336_388.docx @ 2667681 @ @ 1
NOTICE
Damage of bearing and gear wheel
• Do not carry out any welding work on the gear unit.
• Do not use the gear unit as earth connection for welding work.
The following conditions must be met at the installation site in order to prevent overheating during
operation:
• There must be adequate space around the gear unit.
• Air must be able to flow freely past all sides of the gear unit.
• For geared motors, the cooling air from the motor fan must be able to circulate around the gear unit
without obstruction.
• The gear unit must not be enclosed or encased.
• The gear unit must not be exposed to high energy radiation.
• Do not direct warm exhaust air from other units onto the gear unit.
• The base or flange to which the gear unit is attached must not input any heat into the gear unit during
operation.
• Do not allow dust to accumulate in the area of the gear unit
Install the gear unit in the correct mounting position (see chapter 7.1 "Versions and mounting
position"). Oil checking and oil drain screws must be accessible.
The base or flange to which the gear unit is fitted should be vibration-free, torsionally rigid and flat. The
flatness of the bolting surface on the base or flange must comply with DIN ISO 2768-2 tolerance class
K.
Precisely align the gear unit with the drive shaft of the machine in order to prevent additional forces from
being imposed on the gear unit due to distortion.
Fasten the gear unit to all gear unit feet of one side or to all flange holes. Use bolts with a minimum
quality of 8.8. Tighten the bolts with correct torques (see chapter 7.3 "Screw tightening torques").
For foot and flange-mounted gear units (Option XZ or XF), ensure tension-free bolting. The foot
mounting is used to fasten the gear unit. It is designed to absorb the reaction forces from the torque,
radial and axial forces as well as the weight. B5 or B14 flanges are basically not designed to absorb the
reaction forces. In case of doubt, contact Getriebebau NORD for investigation of the particular case.
Earth the gear unit housing. For geared motors, ensure the earthing via the motor connection.
95 / 396
Pos : 99 /Anl eitungen/Getriebe/3. Montage, Lager ung, Vorberei tung, Aufstellung/Montage/M ontage v on Naben auf Vollwell en 01 - headlinez @ 58\m od_1606220641888_388.docx @ 2695640 @ 2 @ 1
3.5 Installation of a hub on solid shaft (option: V, L)

Pos : 102 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on N aben auf Getriebew ellen 02z_01 [B1000- B2050, B5010] @ 51\mod_1601292968188_388.docx @ 2674016 @ @ 1
NOTICE
The gear unit may be damaged by axial forces.
Bearings, gearwheels, shafts and housings may be damaged by incorrect fitting.
• Use a suitable pulling device.
• Do not hit the hub with a hammer.
Figure 2: Example of a simple pulling device
During fitting, ensure that the shaft axes are precisely aligned with each other. Comply with the
permissible tolerance details provided by the manufacturer.
Information
Use the end thread of the shafts for pulling. Fitting can be facilitated by coating the hub with lubricant
or heating it up to approx. 100 °C beforehand.
Pos : 104 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on N aben auf Getriebew ellen 02z_03 [B1000- B2050, B5010] @ 79\mod_1630661149694_388.docx @ 2820937 @ @ 1
The maximum radial forces FR1 and FR2 and axial forces FA2 which are imposed on the driving
and driven elements of the gear unit must not be exceeded (refer to the name plate). Pay particular
attention to the correct tension of belts and chains.
Additional loads due to unbalanced hubs are not permitted.
96 / 396
The transverse force must be applied as closely as possible to the gear unit. For drive shafts with free
shaft ends (Option W), the maximum permissible transverse force FR1 applies for the application of the
transverse force to the centre of the free shaft journal. For output shafts, the application of the transverse
force FR2 must not exceed the dimension xR2. If the radial force FR2 is stated on the name plate, but no
dimension xR2 is stated, application of force is assumed to be to the centre of the shaft journal.
Pos : 105 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on N aben auf Getriebew ellen 03 @ 79\m od_1630664786514_388.doc x @ 2821318 @ @ 1
Figure 3: Permissible application of force to drive and driven shafts

Pos : 106 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 1\mod_1329145698658_0.docx @ 15891 @ @ 1
97 / 396
Pos : 107 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Aufsteckg etrieben 00 headlinez @ 49\m od_1599809016571_388.docx @ 2668530 @ 2 @ 1
3.6 Fitting push-on gear units with fastening element (option: B)

Pos : 108 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Aufsteckg etrieben 01 [B1000, B2000, B5010]z @ 61\m od_1608019903929_388.docx @ 2709290 @ @ 1
WARNING
Risk of severe injuries
If the screw fastenings of the torque arm are removed during operation, the gear unit will rotate around
the output shaft.
• Secure the screw fastening against loosening, e.g. with Loctite 242 or a second nut.
NOTICE
The gear unit may be damaged by axial forces.
Bearings, gearwheels, shafts and housings may be damaged by incorrect fitting.
• Use a suitable pulling device.
• Do not strike the gear unit with a hammer.
Assembly and subsequent dismantling is facilitated by applying an anti-corrosive lubricant to the shaft
before fitting (e.g. NORD Anti-Corrosion Part No. 089 00099). Excess lubricant may escape after fitting
and may drip off. This escape of grease is not due to a leak in the gear unit. Thoroughly clean these
points on the output shaft after a running-in time of approx. 24 hours.
Figure 4: Applying lubricant to the shaft and the hub

Pos : 109 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Aufsteckg etrieben 02 [B1000, B2000]z @ 61\m od_1608019925501_388.docx @ 2709328 @ @ 1
For push-on gear units with cover cap IP66 (Option H66) and fastening element (Option B) the pressed-
in closing cap must be pushed out before installing the gear unit. The pressed-in closing cap may be
destroyed during dismantling. A 2nd closing cap is supplied as a spare part. Fit the closing cap after
installation of the gear unit as described in Section 3.9 "Fitting the covers (option: H, H66)".
98 / 396
Figure 5: Removing the factory-fitted closing cap
Pos : 110 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Aufsteckg etrieben 03 [B1000, B2000, B5010]z @ 79\m od_1630916355996_388.docx @ 2821670 @ @ 1
The gear unit can be fitted to solid shafts with and without a shoulder using the fixing element (Option B).
Tighten the fastening element bolt with correct torque (see chapter 7.3 "Screw tightening torques").
When fastening without a contact shoulder, a circlip is used in the hollow shaft for axial fastening.
Figure 6: Gear unit mounted on shaft with a shoulder using the fastening element
Figure 7: Gear unit mounted on shaft without a shoulder using the fastening element
A gear unit can be removed from a shaft with a shoulder e.g. using the following device.
Figure 8: Removal using dismantling device

Pos : 111 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Aufsteckg etrieben 04 [B1000, B2000]z @ 61\m od_1608020615950_388.docx @ 2709404 @ @ 1
99 / 396
Do not distort the support when installing push-on gear units with a torque support. Tension-free
mounting is aided by the rubber buffer (Option G or VG).
Figure 9: Mounting the rubber buffer (Option G and/or VG) on parallel shaft gear units
To fit the rubber buffer, tighten the screw fastening until there is no play between the contact surfaces
when there is no load. For screw fastenings with standard thread, then rotate the fastening nut half a
turn in order to pre-tension the rubber buffer. Greater pre-tension is not permissible.
Explanation
1 Always support torque support
on both sides
Figure 10: Attaching the torque support on bevel gear and worm gear units
Tighten the fastenings of the torque support with the correct torque (see chapter 7.3 "Screw tightening
torques")and secure them against loosening, e.g. with Loctite 242 or Loxeal 54-03.
Pos : 114 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 00a_Ü bers chrift [B1000, B2000] @ 51\mod_1601293159649_388.docx @ 2674093 @ 2 @ 1
3.7 Fitting a hollow shaft with shrink disc (Option: S)

Pos : 116 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 00a @ 81\m od_1633418251803_388.docx @ 2834247 @ @ 1
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the gear unit if the shrink disk is installed incorrectly
• Do not tighten the tensioning bolts if the solid shaft is not installed. This would permanently deform
the hollow shaft.
Hollow shafts with shrink discs must be protected from dust, dirt and moisture. NORD recommends
option H/H66 (see chapter 3.9 "Fitting the covers (option: H, H66)").
Pos : 118 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 01 [B1000, B2000]z @ 49\mod_1600326280680_388.docx @ 2670400 @ @ 1
Explanation
100 / 396
1 Shrink disc, type, part no. and torque
details for tensioning bolts
2 Tensioning flanges
3 Solid shaft of machine
4 Shaft and hollow shaft bore
FREE OF GREASE
5 Hollow shaft of gear unit
6 Double half-slotted inner ring
7 Tensioning bolts DIN 931 (933) -10.9
Figure 11: Hollow shaft with shrink disc
The shrink disc is supplied ready for fitting. It must not be dismantled prior to fitting.
The solid shaft material must have a minimum yield strength of 360 N/mm2. This ensures that no
permanent deformation occurs due to the clamping force.
If necessary, also observe the documentation from the manufacturer of the shrink disc.
Prerequisites
• The hollow shaft must be completely free of grease.
• The solid shaft of the machine must be completely free of grease.
• The external diameter of the solid shaft must be within the tolerance h6 or k6 for highly irregular
operation, unless otherwise specified in the order-related dimension sheet. The fit must be according
to DIN EN ISO 286-2.
Pos : 121 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 03 [B1000], B2000]z @ 50\mod_1600326313180_388.docx @ 2670514 @ @ 1
Fitting procedure
Pos : 123 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 04z @ 51\mod_1601293393181_388.docx @ 2674205 @ @ 1
1. Remove the cover, if any.
2. Loosen the tensioning bolts of the shrink disc, but do not unscrew them completely. Tighten the
tensioning bolts gently by hand until there is no play between the flanges and the inner ring.
3. Lightly grease the bore of the inner ring. Push the shrink disc onto the hollow shaft until the outer
clamping flange is flush with the hollow shaft.
4. Grease the solid shaft of the machine in the area which will later come into contact with the bushing
in the hollow shaft. Do not grease the bronze bushing. It is essential that the tensioning seat of the
hollow shaft is free of grease.
5. Insert the solid shaft of the machine into the hollow shaft so that the area around the shrink
connection is completely filled.
101 / 396
6. Tighten the tensioning bolts of the shrink disc in sequence with approx. ¼ rotation of the bolt per
turn in clockwise direction by several turns. Use a torque wrench to tighten tensioning bolts to the
tightening torque specified on the shrink disc.
7. Check if there is an even gap between the clamping flanges. If this is not the case, the shrink disc
connection must be dismantled and checked for correct fit.
8. Mark the hollow shaft of the gear unit and the solid shaft of the machine with a label in order to detect
any slippage under load.
Standard disassembly procedure:

WARNING
Danger of injury due to sudden mechanical release
The elements of the shrink disc are under great mechanical tension. Sudden release of the outer rings
produces high separating forces and can result in uncontrolled detachment of shrink disc components.
• Do not remove any tensioning bolts if you have not ensured that the external outer rings of the shrink
disc have been released from the inner ring.
1. Loosen the tensioning bolts of the shrink disc with approx. ¼ rotation of the bolt per turn in sequence
in a clockwise direction by several turns. Do not remove the tensioning bolts from their thread.
2. Loosen the clamping flanges from the cone of the inner ring.
3. Remove the gear unit from the solid shaft of the machine.
Pos : 132 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 10 Ins tandhaltungz @ 51\mod_1601293722756_388.docx @ 2674429 @ @ 1
If a shrink disc has been in use for a long period or is dirty, dismantle it and clean it before refitting.
Check the shrink disc for damage or corrosion. Replace the damaged elements if they are not in perfect
condition.
Pos : 133 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Optionen - sonstige/Montage der Schr umpfsc hei be 11 [B1000, B2000] @ 75\m od_1624288142676_388.docx @ 2795770 @ @ 1
Coat the conical surfaces with MOLYKOTE® G-Rapid Plus or a similar lubricant. Place some multi-
purpose grease on the screw thread and the contact surfaces of the screw heads.
102 / 396
Pos : 136 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on H ohlwell e mit GRIPMAXXz @ 50\m od_1600432726756_388.docx @ 2671629 @ 25 @ 1
3.8 Fitting a hollow shaft with GRIPMAXX™ (Option: M)
NOTICE
Damage to the gear unit due to incorrect installation
• Do not tighten the tensioning bolts of the shrink disc until the solid shaft and the torque bush are in
the correct position.
1 Shrink disc 5 Hollow shaft (gear unit)

2 Tensioning bolts 6 Solid shaft (machine)
3 Torque bush 7 Support bush
4 Clamping ring
Figure 12: GRIPMAXX™, exploded diagram
Take all expected peak loads into account when dimensioning the solid shaft or the machine shaft.
The solid shaft material must have a minimum yield strength of 360 N/mm2. This ensures that no
permanent deformation occurs due to the clamping force.
Do not use corrosion protection, assembly paste or other coatings on the fitting surfaces of the
shaft, the bushes, the clamping rings or the shrink disc.
Prerequisites
• The solid shaft [6] must be free from burrs, corrosion, lubricants or other foreign bodies.
• The hollow shaft [5], the bushes [3], [7], the clamping ring [4] and the shrink disc [1] must be free
from dirt, grease and oil.
• The solid shaft diameter must be within the following tolerances:
103 / 396
Metric machine shafts Imperial machine shafts
ISO 286-2 ISO 286-2
From to From to
Tolerance h11(-) Tolerance h11(-)
Ø [mm] Ø [mm] [mm] Ø [in] Ø [in] [in]
10 18 -0.11 0.4375 0.6875 -0.004
18 30 -0.13 0.7500 1.0625 -0.005
30 50 -0.16 1.1250 1.9375 -0.006
50 80 -0.19 2.0000 3.1250 -0.007
80 120 -0.22 3.1875 4.6875 -0.008
120 180 -0.25 4.7500 7.0625 -0.009
Table 4: Permissible machine shaft tolerances
Fitting procedure
1. Determine the correct installation position of the shrink disc [1] on the gear unit. Ensure that the
position of the hollow shaft [5] corresponds to the details in the order.
2. Push the support bush [7] and the clamping ring [4] on the solid shaft [6]. Ensure that the support
bush is correctly positioned. Secure the support bush [7] with the clamping ring [4] by tightening the
clamping ring bolt.
3. Push the gear unit up to the stop on the secured support bush [7].
4. Slightly loosen the tensioning bolts [2] and push the shrink disc [1] on the solid shaft.
5. Push the torque bush [3] on the solid shaft.
6. Tighten the 3 or 4 clamping bolts [2] finger tight and ensure that the outer rings of the shrink disc are
pulled together parallel. Then tighten the remaining bolts.
7. Tighten the tensioning bolts successively in a clockwise direction by several turns – not crosswise
– with approx. ¼ rotation of the bolt per turn. Use a torque wrench to achieve the specified tightening
torque on the shrink disc.
When the tensioning bolts have been tightened, there must be an even gap between the clamping
flanges. If this is not the case, dismantle the shrink disc connection and check the fit.
Dismantling procedure
WARNING
Danger of injury due to sudden mechanical release
The elements of the shrink disc are under great mechanical tension. Sudden release of the outer rings
produces high separating forces and can result in uncontrolled detachment of shrink disc components.
• Do not remove any tensioning bolts if you have not ensured that the external outer rings of the shrink
disc have been released from the inner ring.
1. Unscrew the tensioning bolts [2] of the shrink disc in sequence, with approximately half a turn (180°),
until the inner ring of the shrink disc can be moved.
2. Pull the shrink disc [1] with the torque bush [3] off from the shaft.
3. Remove the outer rings of the shrink disc from the conical inner ring. For this it may be necessary to
lightly tap the bolts with a soft-face hammer or to lightly lever the outer rings apart.
4. Pull the gear unit off the machine shaft.
Clean all individual components before refitting. Check the bushes and the shrink disc for damage or
corrosion. Replace the bushes and the shrink disc if they are not in perfect condition. Coat the conical
104 / 396
seat of the outer rings and the outside of the clamping ring with MOLYKOTE® G-Rapid Plus or a similar
product. Place some multi-purpose grease on the screw thread and the contact surfaces of the screw
heads.
Pos : 154 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Abdeck hauben 00 headline [B1000, B2000] @ 59\m od_1606992303088_388.doc x @ 2703330 @ 2 @ 1
3.9 Fitting the covers (option: H, H66)

Pos : 160 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Abdeck hauben 02z @ 51\mod_1601372777513_388.docx @ 2674836 @ @ 1
Use all fastening screws. Secure the fastening screws by coating them with securing lubricant, e.g.
Loctite 242, Loxeal 54-03. Tighten the fastening screws with the correct torque (see chapter 7.3 "Screw
tightening torques").
Pos : 161 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Abdeck hauben 03 [B 1000, B 2000] @ 35\mod_1560335100666_388.docx @ 2540919 @ @ 1
For covers with Option H66, press in the new condition closing cap by tapping it lightly with a hammer.
Figure 13: Fitting the covers, Option SH, Option H, and Option H66
Pos : 162 /Allgem ein/---------- Seitenumbr uc h ---------- @ 3\mod_1375347474401_0.docx @ 84886 @ @ 1
105 / 396
Pos : 163 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage v on Abdeckk appen [B1000, B2000]z @ 51\m od_1601385023932_388.docx @ 2674875 @ 2 @ 1
3.10 Fitting the covers

Some versions of universal worm gear units are delivered as standard with a plastic cover cap. The
cover cap protects the radial shaft seals against the entry of dust and other contamination. The cover
cap can attached on the A side or the B side. It can be removed by hand without tools.
NOTICE
Damage to the expansion elements of the cover cap
• Do not jam the cover cap when pulling it off or attaching it.
Pull the cover cap off vertically prior to the installation of the universal worm gear unit. After completing
the fitting, attach the cover cap onto the right side by attaching the expanding elements into the threaded
holes on the output flange.
Figure 14: Disassembly and assembly of the cover cap

Pos : 165 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 00 headline + Einl eitung [B1000, B2000] @ 89\m od_1656678308695_388.docx @ 2920510 @ 2 @ 1
3.11 Fitting a standard motor (Option: IEC, NEMA, AI, AN)

The maximum permitted motor weights indicated in the tables below must not be exceeded:
Pos : 168 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 01_Tabellenkopf_IEC-Motor en [B1000, B2000]z @ 89\mod_1656677983199_388.docx @ 2920396 @ @ 1
Maximum permitted motor weights

Motor size 63 71 80 90 100 112 132 160 180 200 225 250 280 315
Max. motor weight [kg] 25 30 50 50 80 80 100 250 250 350 500 1000 1000 1500
Pos : 169 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 01_Tabellenrum pf_IEC-M otoren [B1000, B2000] @ 89\m od_1656680433209_0.doc x @ 2920587 @ @ 1
106 / 396
SK 32, SK 3282, 100 100
SK 9032.1, SK 32100,
SK 772.1, SK 773.1
SK 42, SK 4282, 100 100 130 200
SK 9042.1, SK 42125
SK 52, SK 63, 100 100 130
SK 5282, SK 6382,
SK 9052.1,
SK 872.1, SK 873.1,
SK 972.1, SK 973.1
SK 62, SK 73, SK 83, 100 100 130
SK 6282,
SK 7382, SK 8382,
SK 9072.1
SK 72, SK 82, SK 93, 130
SK 103,
SK 7282, SK 8282,
SK 9382, SK 10382.1,
SK 9082.1, SK 9086.1,
SK 9092.1, SK 9096.1
SK 920072.1, 40
SK 92072.1, SK 0,
SK 071.1, SK 0182.1
SK 1382NB, 60
SK 1382.1,
SK 92372,
SK 92372.1,
SK 12063, SK 372.1,
SK 371.1
Pos : 170 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 01_Tabellenuntersc hrift_IEC-M otoren [B1000, B2000] @ 89\m od_1656680713523_388.docx @ 2920625 @ @ 1
Table 5: Motor weights IEC motors

Pos : 171 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 01_Tabellenkopf_N EMA-Motor en [B1000, B2000] @ 89\mod_1656681174654_388.docx @ 2920701 @ @ 1
Maximum permitted motor weights

Motor size
140TC
180TC
201TC
250TC
280TC
320TC
360TC
400TC
56C
Max. motor weight [kg] 30 50 80 100 200 250 350 700 700
Pos : 172 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 01_Tabellenrum pf_NEM A-Motoren [B1000, B2000] @ 89\m od_1656681528259_0.docx @ 2920739 @ @ 1
SK 62, SK 72, SK 73, 500 500

SK 83, SK 93,
SK 9072.1, SK 6282,
SK 7282, SK 7382,
SK 8382, SK 9382
Pos : 173 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 01_Tabellenuntersc hrift_N EM A-Motoren [B1000, B2000] @ 89\m od_1656681691355_388.docx @ 2920777 @ @ 1
Table 6: Motor weights NEMA motors

Pos : 176 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 03z @ 59\mod_1606742688607_388.docx @ 2701400 @ 5 @ 1
Fitting a standard motor to the IEC adapter (Option IEC) or NEMA adapter (Option NEMA)
1. Clean the motor shaft and the flange surfaces of the motor and motor adapter, and check them for
damage. Check the motor dimensions. The dimensions must be within the tolerances according to
DIN EN 50347 or NEMA MG1 Part 4.
2. For motor sizes 90, 160, 180 and 225, position the spacer bushes that may be provided onto the
motor shaft.
107 / 396
3. Position the half-coupling onto the motor shaft so that the motor parallel key engages into the groove
of the half-coupling. Tighten the half-coupling in accordance with the motor manufacturer's
instructions. With standard helical gear units, observe dimension B between the half-coupling and
the collar (see "Figure 15"). Adjust the coupling in accordance with the specifications indicated on
the adhesive plate for certain NEMA adapters .
4. If the half-coupling contains a setscrew, secure the coupling axially on the shaft. Coat the setscrew
with securing adhesive before screwing it in, e.g. Loctite 242 or Loxeal 54-03, and tighten it with the
correct torque (see chapter 7.3 "Screw tightening torques").
Pos : 178 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 04 [nic ht- ex]z @ 59\m od_1606742804556_388.doc x @ 2701475 @ @ 1
5. Sealing of the flange surfaces is recommended if the motor is installed outside or in a humid
environment. Completely coat the flange surfaces with surface sealant, e.g. Loctite 574 or Loxeal
58-14.
Pos : 179 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 05z @ 59\mod_1606742838397_388.docx @ 2701512 @ @ 1
6. Attach the motor to the adapter. Also attach the enclosed ring gear or the enclosed gear sleeve (see
figure below).
7. Tighten the adapter bolts with the correct torque (see chapter 7.3 "Screw tightening torques").
Figure 15: Fitting the coupling onto the motor shaft - various types of coupling
I Curved tooth coupling (BoWex), one-piece

II Curved tooth coupling (BoWex), two-piece
III Curved tooth coupling (BoWex), two-part with spacer bush
IV Claw coupling (ROTEX), two-piece
V Claw coupling (ROTEX), two-piece, observe dimension B:
Standard helical gear units:

SK 0, SK 01, SK 20, SK 25, SK 30, SK 33 (2-stage)
SK 010, SK 200, SK 250, SK 300, SK 330 (3-stage)
IEC size 63 IEC size 71
Dimension B (Fig. V) B = 4.5 mm B = 11.5 mm
VI Claw coupling (ROTEX ), two-piece with spacer bush 
Pos : 180 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 06 @ 75\mod_1624347935230_388.docx @ 2795890 @ 5 @ 1
108 / 396
Fitting a standard motor to the IEC adapters AI160–AI315 (Option AI) or NEMA adapter AN250TC–
AN400TC (Option AN)
1. Clean the motor shaft and the flange surfaces of the motor and motor adapter, and check them for
damage. Check the motor dimensions. The dimensions must be within the tolerances according to
DIN EN 50347 or NEMA MG1 Part 4.
2. Remove the motor shaft’s key.
3. With the adapters AI160, AI180 and AI225, attach the spacer bush supplied with the product.
4. Attach the key supplied with the product (see "Table7: Motor parallel keys").
5. For the attachment of the half-coupling, heat up the half-coupling to approx. 100 °C. Position the half-
coupling as follows:
− Push AI160, AI180 and AI225 on to the spacer bush.
− Push AI200, AI250, AI280 and AI315 on to the motor shaft collar.
− AN250TC–AN400TC until dimension A has been reached (see "Table 8: Position of the half-
coupling on the NEMA motor shaft").
6. If the half-coupling contains a setscrew, secure the coupling axially on the shaft. Coat the setscrew
with securing adhesive before screwing it in, e.g. Loctite 242 or Loxeal 54-03, and tighten it with the
correct torque (see chapter 7.3 "Screw tightening torques").
Pos : 181 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 04 [nic ht- ex]z @ 59\m od_1606742804556_388.doc x @ 2701475 @ @ 1
7. Sealing of the flange surfaces is recommended if the motor is installed outside or in a humid
environment. Completely coat the flange surfaces with surface sealant, e.g. Loctite 574 or Loxeal
58-14.
Pos : 183 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M otor/Montage eines Normm otors 07 @ 76\mod_1624353434411_388.docx @ 2795928 @ @ 1
8. Attach the motor to the adapter. Also attach the enclosed ring gear or the enclosed gear sleeve (see
Figure 15: Fitting the coupling onto the motor shaft - various types of coupling). For the AN360TC
and AN400TC adapters, attach the adapter flange to the motor first, and screw the motor onto the
adapter.
9. Tighten the adapter bolts with the correct torque (see chapter 7.3 "Screw tightening torques").
IEC/NEMA type Coupling Shaft ø Motor shaft’s key

AI 160 R42 42 AB12x8x45
AI 180 R48 48 AB14x9x45
AN 250 R42 41.275 B3/8x3/8x1 1/2
AN 280 R48 47.625 B1/2x1/2x1 1/2
AI 200 R55 55 B16x10x50x
AN 320 R55 53.976 B1/2x1/2x1 1/2
AI 225 R65 60 B18x11x70
AN 360 R350 R65 60.325 B5/8x5/8x2 1/4
AI 250 R75 65 B18x11x70
AI 280 R75 75 B20x12x70
AN 360 R450 R75 60.325 B5/8x5/8x3 1/8
AN 400 R75 73.025 B3/4x3/4x3 1/4
Table7: Motor parallel keys
109 / 396
NEMA type Coupling size A [mm]
N250TC R350 R42 83
N250TC 300S R42 86
N280TC R350 R48 87.5
N280TC 300S R48 102.5
N320TC R55 91
N360TC/350 R65 126.5
N360TC/450 R75 150.5
N400TC R75 164.5
Table 8: Position of the half-coupling on the NEMA motor shaft

Pos : 190 /Allgem ein/Allgem eingültig e Module/---------Seitenumbr uc h k ompakt --------- @ 13\m od_1476369695906_0.doc x @ 2265495 @ @ 1
110 / 396
Pos : 191 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage der Kühlsc hlange an das Kühlsystem 01 [B1000_2000]z @ 52\m od_1601476869971_388.docx @ 2676011 @ 2 @ 1
3.12 Mounting of the cooling coil onto the cooling system

Pos : 194 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Kühl anl agen/Interne Kühlanl age_02_(M ontag e)z @ 52\m od_1601480924595_388.docx @ 2676086 @ @ 1
WARNING
Risk of injury due to pressure discharge
• Ensure that the pressure is released from the cooling circuit before carrying out any work on the
gear unit.
NOTICE
Damage to the cooling coil
• Do not twist the connection pieces during installation.
• Even after the installation, no external forces must be able to act on the cooling coil via the
connection pieces.
• Prevent vibrations from reaching the cooling coil during operation.
Pos : 196 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage der Kühlsc hlange an das Kühlsystem 03 [B1000_2000]z @ 52\m od_1601481884488_388.docx @ 2676123 @ @ 1
Explanation
1 Connection pieces with cutting ring

screw connections
2 Cooling coil
3 Housing cover
Figure 16: Cooling cover

The cooling coil is installed in the housing cover. For the inlet and outlet of cooling fluid, connection
pieces with cutting ring screw connections according to DIN 2553 are provided on the housing cover for
a connection of a pipe with an external diameter of 10 mm.
Pos : 200 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage der Kühlsc hlange an das Kühlsystem 04z @ 52\m od_1601486450433_388.docx @ 2676273 @ @ 1
Remove the sealing plug from the screw necks prior to assembly and flush the cooling coil to prevent
any contamination of the cooling system. Then, connect the connection pieces with the coolant circuit.
The flow direction of the coolant is irrelevant.
Pos : 201 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Kühl anl agen/Externer Öl-Luft-Kühl er [B1000]z @ 52\m od_1601487540358_388.docx @ 2676310 @ 233 @ 1
111 / 396
3.13 Installation of the external oil/air cooler
3.13.1 Connecting hoses
NOTICE
The gear unit is supplied without the oil filling.
• Fill the gear unit with oil before commissioning.
The scope of delivery includes the oil/air cooler and the necessary hoses.
Connect the oil/air cooler according to the illustration.
1 Oil/air cooler
2 Gear units
3 Optional temperature monitoring
S Intake connection/oil drain of the gear unit
Gear unit pressure connection/connection
P
above or below the oil level
Figure 17: Connection of the oil/air cooler
Fasten the union nuts according to 7.3 "Screw tightening torques".

After assembling the oil lines, fill the gear unit housing with the gear oil type that is printed on the name
plate. The oil quantity on the name plate is a guide value and may vary, depending on the gear ratio.
Approximately 4.5 l of oil are additionally required for the hose lines. When filling, use the oil level screw
as an indicator for the correct oil level.
3.13.2 Electrical connection

Ensure the electrical connection according to the operating and installation instructions of the oil/air
cooler.
112 / 396
Pos : 207 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage ei nes Öl ausgleic hsbehälter Option OA 00_Ü berschrift_z @ 52\m od_1601488859794_388.doc x @ 2676387 @ 2 @ 1
3.14 Installation of an oil expansion chamber (Option: OA)

Pos : 208 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage ei nes Öl ausgleic hsbehälter Option OA 01_Größ e I - III_z @ 81\m od_1633419860079_388.docx @ 2834331 @ 3 @ 1
3.14.1 Installation of the sizes I, II and III

The oil expansion chamber is available in 3 sizes with different capacities:
• 0.7 l (Size I)
• 2.7 l (Size II)
• 5.4 l (Size III)
The oil expansion chamber must be mounted vertically with the hose connection facing downwards and
the vent screw facing upwards. Taking the hose length into account, the container should be fitted as
high as possible. Suggestions for the position of the oil expansion chamber see the following illustration.
Figure 18: Position of the oil expansion chamber
1. After installing the gear unit, remove the vent screw.

2. Screw in the reduction or extension with the existing sealing ring.
3. If the fastening screw is screwed into a through hole, seal the thread with a medium strength screw
securing material such as LOXEAL 54-03 or Loctite 242.
4. Screw on the expansion tank. If the necessary screw insertion depth of 1.5 × d can no longer be
achieved, use a 5 mm longer screw. If a longer screw cannot be fitted, use a stud and a nut with
appropriate dimensions.
5. Attach the vent hose with the enclosed hollow screws and seals.
Pos : 209 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage ei nes Öl ausgleic hsbehälter Option OA 02 [B1000]z @ 52\m od_1601489765444_388.docx @ 2676425 @ @ 1
6. Screw the enclosed M12 x 1.5 vent plug and sealing ring into the tank.
Pos : 211 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/M ontag e/M ontage ei nes Öl ausgleic hsbehälters Option OA 03_Größ e 0A und 0B_01 @ 81\mod_1632989654868_388.docx @ 2832110 @ 3 @ 1
3.14.2 Installation of sizes 0A and 0B

The oil expansion chamber must be mounted vertically with the hose connection facing downwards and
the vent screw facing upwards. Taking the hose length into account, the container should be fitted as
high as possible. Suggestions for the position of the oil expansion chamber see Figure 18. Note that
with the M4 configuration with terminal box position in position 2, it is not possible to install the oil
expansion chamber.
113 / 396
Figure 19: Position of the oil expansion chamber
1. After installing the gear unit, remove the oil level or vent screw.
2. Install the oil expansion chamber according to Figure 18. Align it parallel to the motor shaft.
3. Maintain the maximum tightening torque of 12 Nm for screwing the oil expansion chamber onto the
gear unit housing.
Pos : 232 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/N ac hträglic he Lacki erung/Nac htr ägliche Lacki erung 00 headline @ 34\mod_1559724373206_388.docx @ 2538900 @ 2 @ 1
3.15 Subsequent painting

Pos : 234 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/N ac hträglic he Lacki erung/Nac htr ägliche Lacki erung 02 @ 34\mod_1559724405678_388.docx @ 2538974 @ @ 1
For retrospective painting of the gear unit, the shaft sealing rings, rubber elements, pressure vent
screws, hoses, type plates, adhesive labels and motor coupling components must not come into contact
with paints, lacquers or solvents, as otherwise the components may be damaged or made illegible.
Pos : 235 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Elek trischer Ans chl uss M otor [B1000] @ 81\m od_1633345694538_388.docx @ 2833596 @ 2 @ 1
3.16 Electrical connection of the mounted motor

For geared motors (gear units with attached electric motor), the electric motor has its own operating
instructions. If these operating instructions are not available, please request them from the motor
manufacturer Ensure the electrical connection of the motor in accordance with the operating instructions
of the motor. Usually, there is a connection diagram in the terminal box of the motor.
Pos : 237 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/4. Inbetri ebnahm e [_Titel] @ 3\m od_1368691822868_388.docx @ 65671 @ 1 @ 1
114 / 396
4 Commissioning
Pos : 238 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Ölstand pr üfen_01z @ 53\m od_1603264683711_388.doc x @ 2679850 @ 2 @ 1
4.1 Checking the oil level

Pos : 239 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Ölstand_02 [B1000, B1050] @ 54\mod_1603271152794_388.docx @ 2680194 @ @ 1
Check the oil level before commissioning (see chapter 5.2 "Service and maintenance work").
Pos : 243 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Entl üftung ak tivier en_01z @ 53\mod_1603265459270_388.docx @ 2679888 @ 2 @ 1
4.2 Activating the vent

Pos : 244 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Aufstellen/Entlüftung aktivi eren Einl eitung nicht- ex @ 49\mod_1599579572645_388.docx @ 2667246 @ @ 1
If venting of the gear unit is provided, the vent or the pressure vent must be activated before
commissioning. Double gear units consist of two single units, are equipped with 2 oil chambers and
possibly 2 vents.
To activate, remove the sealing cord in the vent screw. For the vent screw position, see Section 7.1
"Versions and mounting position".
Pos : 246 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Aufstellen/Entlüftung aktivi eren Entl üftungssc hraube @ 49\mod_1599583285555_388.docx @ 2667383 @ @ 1
Explanation
1 Vent screw
2 Sealing cord
Figure 20: Activating the vent screw

Pos : 247 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Aufstellen/Entlüftung aktivi eren Druckentl üftungsschr aube @ 49\m od_1599583297738_388.docx @ 2667429 @ @ 1
Explanation
1 Vent screw
2 Sealing cord
Figure 21: Activating the pressure vent screw

115 / 396
Pos : 249 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/3. M ontage, Lagerung, Vorbereitung, Aufs tell ung/Aufstellen/Entlüftung aktivi eren Sonderentl üftung @ 49\m od_1599583310626_388.docx @ 2667475 @ @ 1
Special pressure vents are supplied as loose parts. Unscrew the vent screw and replace it with the
special pressure vent and seal.
Explanation
1 Vent screw 2 Sealing cord 3 Special vent screw
Figure 22: Removing the vent plug and fitting the special pressure vent
Pos : 253 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Ak tivier ung des autom atisc hen Sc hmiers toffgebers _01 [B1000, B2000] @ 54\mod_1603295724455_388.docx @ 2681620 @ 2 @ 1
4.3 Activating the automatic lubricant dispenser

Some gear unit types with standard motor (Option IEC/NEMA, not AI/AN) have an automatic lubricant
dispenser for the roller bearings. The lubricant sensor must be activated prior to commissioning the gear
unit The cartridge case cover of the adapter for attaching an IEC/NEMA standard motor has a red
information sign for activation of the lubricant dispenser. Opposite to the lubricant dispenser there is a
grease escape hole which is closed with a G1/4 cap screw. After activation of the lubricant dispenser,
the cap screw can be removed and replaced with the grease collection container (Part No. 28301210)
which is supplied separately with the delivery.
Figure 23: Fitting the grease collection container
116 / 396
Procedure:
1. Loosen and remove the cap screws.
2. Remove the cartridge cover.
3. Screw the activation screw into the lubricant dispenser until the lug breaks off at the defined fracture
point.
Pos : 255 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Ak tivier ung des autom atisc hen Sc hmiers toffgebers _03 [B1000, B2000] @ 76\mod_1624463716842_388.docx @ 2796900 @ 5 @ 1
4. Re-fit the cartridge cover. Attach the cartridge cover with the cap screws (see chapter 7.3 "Screw
5. Mark month and year of activation on the adhesive label.
Explanation
1 Cap screws M8 x 16
2 Cartridge cover
3 Activation screw
4 Lug
5 Lubricant sensor
6 Position of adhesive label
Figure 24: Activating the automatic lubricant sensor with standard motor mounting
Adhesive label
Figure 25: Adhesive label

Pos : 271 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Kühls chl ang e/Interne Kühl anl age_01_(Inbetriebnahme) [B1000 ... B2050] @ 76\mod_1624459274579_388.docx @ 2796786 @ 2 @ 1
4.4 Cooling coil (Option: CC)

Pos : 273 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Interne Kühlanlag e_02_(Inbetri ebnahm e) [B1000, B1050] @ 36\m od_1560494617939_388.doc x @ 2542016 @ @ 1
NOTICE
Gear unit damage due to overheating
• The drive may only be commissioned after the cooling spiral has been connected to the cooling
circuit, and the cooling circuit has been put into operation.
Pos : 274 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Interne Kühlanlag e_02a_(Inbetriebnahme) [B1000, B1050]z @ 54\mod_1603467886065_388.docx @ 2683114 @ @ 1
If there is a danger of frost, a suitable anti-freeze solution must be added to the cooling water in due
time.
Pos : 275 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Interne Kühlanlag e_03_(Inbetri ebnahm e) [B1000- B2050] @ 56\m od_1604924743805_388.docx @ 2688580 @ @ 1
The coolant must have a thermal capacity similar to water.

• Specific thermal capacity of water at 20 °C: c = 4.18 kJ/kgK
117 / 396
Clean, industrial water without any air bubbles or sediments is recommended as a coolant. The
hardness of the water must be between 1 dH and 15 dH; the pH value must be between pH 7.4 and pH
9.5. No aggressive liquids may be added to the coolant!
Pos : 276 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Interne Kühlanlag e_03a ( Inbetriebnahme) [B1000, B2000)z @ 55\m od_1603787319406_388.doc x @ 2683808 @ @ 1
The coolant pressure must not exceed 8 bar. We also recommend fitting a pressure reducer at the
coolant inlet to avoid damage due to excessive pressure.
The coolant inlet temperature must not exceed 40 °C. 10 °C are recommended.
The required coolant flow rate is 10 l/min.
Pos : 279 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Interne Kühlanlag e_03b_(Inbetriebnahme) [B1000, B1050]z @ 54\mod_1603468701680_388.docx @ 2683151 @ @ 1
The temperature and the flow rate of the cooling fluid must be monitored and ensured. The drive must
be shut down if the permissible temperature is exceeded.
Pos : 282 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/ex ter ner Öl/Luft-Kühler [B1000l]z @ 55\mod_1603787323813_388.docx @ 2683845 @ 5 @ 1
External oil/air cooler(Option: CS2-X)

Refer to the catalogue G1000 for the version and all important data regarding the oil/air cooler. Pay
attention to the operating instructions of the cooling unit.
Pos : 315 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Ei nlaufz eit der Sc hneckengetriebe [B1000] @ 23\mod_1531908450259_388.docx @ 2434170 @ 2 @ 1
4.5 Running-in time for the worm gear unit

In order to achieve maximum efficiency of the worm gear unit, the gear unit must be subjected to a
running-in period of approx. 25 h – 48 h under maximum load.
There may be a reduction in efficiency before the running-in period is complete.
Pos : 317 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Checkliste [B1000]z @ 55\m od_1603902218068_388.doc x @ 2684119 @ 2 @ 1
4.6 Checklist
Checklist
Subject of check Date Information

of check: see Section
Is the vent screw activated or the pressure vent screwed in? 4.2
Does the required mounting position comply with the actual 7.1
position?
Are the external gear shaft forces within permitted limits (chain 3.5
tension)?
Is the torque arm installed correctly? 3.6
Are rotating parts covered with a contact guard? 3.9
Is the automatic lubricant sensor activated? 4.3
Is the cooling system connected? 3.12
3.13
Table 9: Checklist for commissioning

Pos : 322 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/5. Ins pektion und Wartung @ 23\mod_1531828817835_388.docx @ 2434012 @ 1 @ 1
118 / 396
5 Service and maintenance
Pos : 323 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungsinterv alle/Inspekti ons- und W artungsinterv alle [B1000]z @ 55\m od_1603994774010_388.docx @ 2684676 @ 2 @ 1
5.1 Inspection and maintenance intervals
Inspection and
maintenance intervals Inspection and maintenance work Information
see Section
At least every six months • Visual inspection 5.2.1
• Check for running noises 5.2.2
• Check the oil level 5.2.3
• Visual inspection of hose 5.2.5
• Re-grease/remove excess grease 5.2.6
(only applicable for free drive shaft/option W, for agitator
bearings/option VL2/VL3 and for AI…/AN… adapter with
option BRG1)
• replacing the automatic lubricant dispenser/remove excess 5.2.7
grease
(for IEC/NEMA standard motor installation, a replacement
interval of a year is permissible for running times of < 8 h / day);
drain or replace the lubricant collection container with every
second replacement of the lubricant dispenser
For operating temperatures • Change the oil (if filled with synthetic products, the interval is 5.2.8
up to 80 °C doubled, with the use of SmartOilChange the interval is
every 10000 operating specified by SmartOilChange)
hours, • Clean or replace the vent screw as necessary 5.2.9
at least every 2 years • Replace the radial shaft seals at every oil change, at the latest 5.2.10
after 10,000 operating hours
Every 20000 operating • Re-lubricate the bearings in the gear unit 5.2.11
hours,
at least every 4 years
At least every 10 years • General overhaul 5.2.12
Table 10: Inspection and maintenance intervals
Information
The oil change intervals apply for normal operating conditions and operating temperatures up to 80 °C.
The oil change intervals are reduced in the case of extreme conditions (operating temperatures higher
than 80 °C, high humidity, aggressive environment and frequent fluctuations in the operating
temperature).
Information
SmartOilChange determines the optimum time for an oil change based on a continuous determination
of the oil temperature. With SmartOilChange from Getriebebau NORD, this is done entirely on the
basis of key data for the specific product, the specified ambient temperature and internal measurement
values of the power electronics such as the current consumption. Additional hardware is therefore not
required for the Getriebebau NORD solution.
The measurement results are processed and interpreted by the integrated software and result in the
display of the residual time until the next oil change.
Pos : 328 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_00 Übersc hrift @ 23\mod_1531828915132_388.docx @ 2434049 @ 2 @ 1
5.2 Service and maintenance work

Pos : 330 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_01_Sichtkontr olle U ndichtigkeitenz @ 55\m od_1603988815899_388.docx @ 2684504 @ 3 @ 1
119 / 396
5.2.1 Visual inspection for leaks
The gear unit must be checked for leaks. Attention should be paid to escaping gear oil and traces of oil
on the exterior or underneath the gear unit. In particular, the radial shaft seals, cover caps, screw fittings,
hoses and housing joints should be checked.
Information
Radial shaft seals are components with a limited life and are subject to wear and ageing. The service
life of radial shaft seals depends on various ambient conditions. Temperature, light (especially UV light),
ozone and other gases and liquids affect the ageing process of radial shaft seals. Some of these
influences may change the physical or chemical properties of the radial shaft seals and result in a
significant reduction of their service life. Foreign matter (e.g. dust, sludge, sand, metallic particles) and
excess temperature (excessive speed or external heating) accelerate the wear of the sealing lip. These
sealing lips are made of an elastomer material and are lubricated with a special grease at the factory.
This reduces the wear due to their function and ensures a long service life. An oil film in the region of
the rubbing sealing lip is therefore normal and is not due to leakage (see chapter 7.5 "Leakage and
leak-tightness").
NOTICE
Damage to the radial shaft seals through unsuitable cleaning agents
Unsuitable cleaning agents may damage the radial shaft seals, which may then cause an increased
risk of leaks.
• Do not clean the gear unit with cleaning agents which contain acetone or benzol.
• Avoid contact with hydraulic oils.
If leaks are suspected, the gear unit should be cleaned, the oil level checked and checked again for
leaks after approx. 24 hours. If a leak is confirmed (dripped oil), the gear unit must be repaired
immediately. Please contact the NORD service department.
Pos : 331 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_01_Sichtkontr olle U ndichtigkeiten Kühlschl ange @ 36\m od_1560758680370_388.docx @ 2542910 @ @ 1
If the gear unit is equipped with a cooling coil in the housing cover, the connections and the cooling coil
must be checked for leaks. If there are any leaks, these must be repaired immediately. Please contact
the NORD service department.
Pos : 332 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_02_Laufg eräusc he pr üfenz @ 55\m od_1603990546349_388.doc x @ 2684542 @ 3 @ 1
5.2.2 Check for running noises

If the gear unit produces unusual running noises or vibrations, this could indicate damage to the gear
unit. In this case the gear unit must be repaired immediately. Please contact the NORD Service
department.
Pos : 336 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/4. Inbetriebnahme/Ölstand pr üfen [B1000]z @ 76\m od_1624864651296_388.docx @ 2799468 @ 3 @ 1
5.2.3 Checking the oil level

Section 7.1 "Versions and mounting position"describes the mounting positions and the corresponding
oil level screws. With double gear units, the oil level must be checked on both units. The pressure vent
must be at the position marked in Section 7.1 "Versions and mounting position".
The oil level does not need to be checked on gear units without oil level screw (see chapter 7.1 "Versions
and mounting position").
Gear unit types that are not supplied with an oil filling must be filled before the oil level is checked.
The oil level must only be carried out when the gear unit is at a standstill and has cooled down. Provide
protection against accidental activation. Check the oil level with an oil temperature of between 10 °C to
40 °C.
120 / 396
Gear units with oil level screw
1. Unscrew the oil level screw corresponding to the mounting position (see chapter 7.1 "Versions and
mounting position").
Information
At the first oil level check a small amount of oil may escape, as the oil level may be above the lower
edge of the oil level hole.
2. The correct oil level is at the lower edge of the oil level hole. If the oil level is too low, adjust the oil
level with the corresponding oil type.
3. Screw the oil level screw and all previously loosened screw connectors back in correctly.
Gear units with an oil level tank
Figure 26: Checking the oil level with a dipstick

1. Screw the screw plug with dipstick (thread G1¼) out of the oil level container.
2. The oil level must be between the upper and lower marking when the dipstick is fully screwed in (see
Figure 26). If the oil level is too low, adjust the oil level with the corresponding oil type.
3. Screw the screw plug with dipstick and all previously loosened screw connectors back in correctly.
Gear units with oil inspection glass
1. The oil level can be seen directly in the window.
2. The correct oil level is:
– Maximum: the middle of the oil inspection glass,
– Minimum: Lower edge of the oil inspection glass.
3. If the oil level is not correct, adjust the oil level by draining off oil or topping up with the type of oil
stated on the name plate.
Pos : 353 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_04a_Sic htk ontroll e Gummi puffer _headli ne [B1000, B2000] @ 55\mod_1604308367231_388.docx @ 2685240 @ 3 @ 1
5.2.4 Visual inspection of the rubber buffers (Option: G, VG)

Pos : 356 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Gummiel emente [B1000, B2000, B1050_B2050]z @ 55\m od_1604335240091_388.doc x @ 2685886 @ @ 1
If these show damage such as tears to the surface, the rubber elements must be replaced. In this case,
please contact NORD Service.
Pos : 360 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_04b_Sic htk ontroll e Schl auchl eitung en [B1000]z @ 55\m od_1604426182409_388.doc x @ 2686398 @ 3 @ 1
5.2.5 Visual inspection of the hoses (Option: OT, CS2-X)

Gear units with an oil tank and external cooling units have rubber hoses.
Pos : 364 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Leitung en/Leitung en_05- Schl auchl eitungen_03 [B1050, B2050]z @ 56\mod_1604427094604_388.docx @ 2686474 @ @ 1
Check the hoses and screw connectors for leaks, cuts, tears, porous areas and chafing. In case of
damage, the hoses must be replaced. Please contact the NORD service department.
Pos : 374 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_05_F ett nac hsc hmier enz @ 56\m od_1604508039835_388.docx @ 2686910 @ 3 @ 1
5.2.6 Re-greasing (Option: VL2, VL3, W, AI, AN)

Some gear unit designs are equipped with a re-greasing device.
For the agitator versions VL2 and VL3, unscrew the vent screw opposite the grease nipple prior to re-
greasing. Inject grease until a quantity of 20 - 25g escapes from the vent hole. Screw the vent screw
back in.
121 / 396
For option W and the IEC/NEMA adapters AI and AN with option BRG1, grease the outer roller bearing
with approx. 20–25 g of grease at the grease nipple. The grease nipple is located under a bolt-on
inspection cover. Before re-greasing, unscrew the grease drain screw so that the excess grease can
drain off. Remove the excess grease on the motor adapter.
1 Conical grease nipple

2 Grease drain screw
3 Inspection cover
Figure 27: Re-grease IEC/NEMA adapters AI and AN with option BRG1
Recommended grease: Petamo GHY 133N (Klüber Lubrication) As an option, food-compatible grease
may be used (see chapter 7.2.1 "Roller bearing greases")..
Pos : 376 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_06_autom atisc hen Sc hmiers toffgeber ausw echsel nz @ 56\mod_1604576222529_388.docx @ 2687200 @ 3 @ 1
5.2.7 Replacing the automatic lubricant dispenser
Explanation
1 Cap screws M8 x 16
2 Cartridge cover
3 Activation screw
4 Lug
5 Lubricant dispenser
6 Position of adhesive label
Figure 28: Switching the automatic lubricant sensor with standard motor mounting
(Lubricant sensor: Part No.: 28301000 or for food-compatible grease Part No.: 28301010)
1. Unscrew the cartridge cover.
2. Unscrew the lubricant sensor.
3. Screw in the new lubricant sensor.
4. Remove excess grease from the adapter.
5. Activate the full lubricant sensor (see chapter 4.3 "Activating the automatic lubricant dispenser").
The grease collection container (Part No. 28301210) must be replaced or drained with every second
replacement of the lubricant sensor. Due to the form of the container, a residual amount of grease
remains in the container.
1. Unscrew the grease collection container from the screw connector.
122 / 396
2. Press grease out of the grease collection container. To do this, push the internal piston back with a
rod. The rod may have a maximum diameter of 10 mm. Collect the extracted grease and dispose it
properly.
3. Check the collecting vessel. If the collecting vessel is damaged, replace it with a new one.
4. Screw the collecting vessel back into the drain hole on the motor adapter.
Pos : 377 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_07a_Öl w ec hs eln [B1000, B2000]z @ 55\mod_1603992874976_388.docx @ 2684627 @ 3 @ 1
5.2.8 Change the oil

On the figures in Section 7.1 "Versions and mounting position"the positions of the oil drain screw, the
oil level screw and the vent screw, if present, are shown depending on the mounting position.
WARNING
Danger of burns
The oil may be very hot. Use protective equipment.
Procedure:
1. Place a collection vessel under the oil drain screw or the oil drain tap.
2. Screw out the oil level screw (if present) and the oil drain screw. When using an oil reservoir tank,
screw out the screw plug with dipstick.
3. Completely drain the oil from the gear unit.
4. Check the sealing rings of the oil drain screw and the oil level screw. If a sealing ring is damaged,
replace the corresponding screw. You can also clean the threads and coat them with securing
adhesive e.g. Loctite 242 54-03 before screwing them in.
5. Screw the oil drain screw into the hole and tighten to the correct torque (see chapter 7.3 "Screw
6. Using a suitable filling device, refill with oil of the same type through the oil level hole until oil emerges
from the oil level hole. The oil can also be filled through the hole of the pressure vent screw or of a
screw plug located higher than the oil level. If an oil reservoir tank is used, fill the oil through the
upper inlet (thread G1¼) until the oil level is set as described in Section 5.2.3 "Checking the oil level".
7. Check the oil level after at least 15 min, if using an oil level container after at least 30 min.
Pos : 379 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_07b_Öl w ec hs eln [B1000]z @ 56\m od_1604680072546_388.doc x @ 2688532 @ @ 1
Information
The oil does not need to be replaced for gear units without oil drain screws (see chapter 7.1 "Versions
and mounting position"). The gear unit are lifelong lubricated.
Standard helical gear units do not have an oil level screw. Here, new oil is injected through the threaded
hole of the vent.
Pos : 386 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_08_Entlüftungssc hraube r einigen ggf. wec hs elnz @ 56\m od_1605105766817_388.docx @ 2689068 @ 3 @ 1
5.2.9 Clean and check vent screw

1. Unscrew the vent screw.
2. Thoroughly clean the vent screw, e.g. with compressed air.
3. Check the vent screw and the sealing ring. If the sealing ring is damaged, use a new vent screw.
4. Screw the vent screw back in.
Pos : 399 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_09_W ellendic htring tausc hen - nur Ü bersc hrift [B1050, B2050] @ 39\mod_1571908320214_388.docx @ 2568030 @ 3 @ 1
5.2.10 Replacing the shaft sealing ring

Pos : 400 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_09_W ellendic htring tausc henz @ 76\m od_1624568803180_388.doc x @ 2798471 @ @ 1
Once the shaft sealing ring has reached the end of its service life, the oil film in the region of the sealing
lip increases and a measurable leakage with dripping oil occurs. The radial shaft seal must then be
replaced. The space between the sealing lip and the protective lip must be filled approximately 50 %
with grease on fitting (recommended grease: PETAMO GHY 133N). Take care that after fitting, the new
radial shaft seal does not run in the old wear track.
123 / 396
Pos : 403 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Ins pek tions- und W artungs arbeiten/Ins pekti ons- und Wartungsarbeiten_10_N ac hfettung von Lag ernz @ 56\mod_1605111249160_388.docx @ 2689183 @ 3 @ 1
5.2.11 Re-lubrication of bearings in the gear unit

Pos : 404 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Lager im Getriebe 01z @ 56\mod_1605116310513_388.docx @ 2689334 @ @ 1
NOTICE
Damage to the gear unit due to insufficient lubricant
There is a risk of bearing failure in the event of inadequate lubrication.
• It is essential to comply with the recommended intervals.
• Only use greases which are approved by Getriebebau NORD.
• Never mix different greases. If different greases are mixed, the gear unit may be damaged due to
inadequate lubrication caused by incompatibility between the different greases.
• Avoid contamination of the grease with foreign substances and washing out of the grease by
lubricating oil.
Pos : 406 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Lager im Getriebe 03z @ 56\mod_1605116328395_388.docx @ 2689410 @ @ 1
Please contact the NORD Service department for replacement of the grease in the roller bearings.
Recommended grease: Petamo GHY 133N - Klüber Lubrication. (see chapter 7.2.1 "Roller bearing
greases")
Pos : 421 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Gener alüber hol ung/General überhol ung_01 [B1050, B2050] @ 31\m od_1553073833641_388.docx @ 2515184 @ 3 @ 1
5.2.12 General overhaul

Pos : 422 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Gener alüber hol ung/General überhol ung_02 [B1000, B1050] @ 36\m od_1560861879248_388.docx @ 2543669 @ @ 1
The general overhaul must be carried out by a specialist workshop with suitable equipment and be
qualified personnel with appropriate equipment in observance of national regulations and laws. We
recommend that the general overhaul is carried out by the NORD Service Department.
Pos : 425 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/5. Inspekti on und War tung/Gener alüber hol ung/General überhol ung_03z @ 57\mod_1605201612306_388.docx @ 2689807 @ @ 1
During general overhaul, the gear unit is completely dismantled. The following work steps are carried
out:
• All gear unit components are cleaned.

• All gear unit components are checked for damage.
• Damaged parts are replaced.
• All roller bearings are replaced.
• Replace all seals, radial shaft seals and Nilos rings.
• Optional: The back stop will be renewed.
• Optional: Replace the elastomers in the coupling.
Pos : 427 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/6. Ents orgung/Ents orgung @ 76\mod_1624624232863_388.docx @ 2799130 @ 1 @ 1
124 / 396
6 Disposal
Observe the current local regulations. In particular, lubricants must be collected and disposed of
correctly.
Gear unit components Material
Gearwheels, shafts, roller bearings, keys, circlips, … Steel
Gear unit housing, housing components, … Grey cast iron
Light alloy gear unit housing, light alloy housing components, … Aluminium
Worm gears, sockets, ... Bronze
Radial shaft seals, sealing caps, rubber components, … Elastomers with steel
Coupling components Plastic and steel
Flat seals Asbestos-free sealing material
Gear oil Additive mineral oil
Synthetic gear oil (adhesive label: CLP PG) Polyglycol-based lubricants
Synthetic gear oil (adhesive label CLP PG) Poly-alpha-olefin based lubricants
Cooling coil, embedding material of the cooling coil, screw fittings Copper, epoxy, yellow brass
Table 11: Materials

Pos : 429 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/7. Anhang @ 3\mod_1368691985561_388.docx @ 65721 @ 1 @ 1
125 / 396
7 Appendix
Pos : 430 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Bauform en und Ei nbaulage [_Titel] @ 57\m od_1605278904792_388.docx @ 2690060 @ 2 @ 1
7.1 Versions and mounting position

Pos : 431 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Bauform en und Wartung_lebens dauergesc hmier t [B1000]z @ 57\m od_1605283015149_388.docx @ 2690138 @ @ 1
Information
The gear unit types SK 320, SK 172, SK 272, SK 372 as well as SK 273 and SK 373, the gear unit
types SK 01282 NB, SK 0282 NB and SK 1382 NB and the UNIVERSAL/MINIBLOC gear unit types
are lifelong lubricated. These gear units do not have oil level screws.
Pos : 433 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Bauform en und Wartung_01-Z eichenerkl ärung [B1000, B2000]z @ 57\m od_1605283318175_388.doc x @ 2690214 @ 3 @ 1
7.1.1 Explanation of symbols
Vent
Oil level
Oil drain
126 / 396
Pos : 439 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Bauform en und Wartung_UNIVER SAL/M INIBLOC Schneck eng etriebe [B1000]z @ 57\m od_1605284611718_388.docx @ 2690252 @ 3 @ 1
7.1.2 UNIVERSAL/MINIBLOC worm gear units

NORD UNIVERSAL/MINIBLOC worm gear units are suitable for all installation positions. They have an
oil filling which is independent of the mounting position.
As an option, types SI and SMI can be equipped with a vent screw. Gear units with vents must be
installed in the stated mounting position.
Types SI, SMI, S, SM and SU as 2-stage gear unit types and types SI, SMI as worm gear units for direct
motor mounting have an oil filling which depends on the mounting position and must be installed in the
stated position.
127 / 396
Pos : 441 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Bauform en und Wartung_Flachg etriebe OT M4 [B1000]z @ 57\m od_1605297999086_388.doc x @ 2690329 @ 3 @ 1
7.1.3 Parallel shaft gear units with oil level tank

The following illustration applies to the M4 configuration of gear unit types SK 9282, SK 9382, SK 10282,
SK 10382, SK 10382.1, SK 11282, SK 11382, SK 11382.1 and SK 12382 with oil reservoir tank.
Figure 29: Parallel shaft gear units with oil level tank
128 / 396
Pos : 447 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Bauform en und Wartung_01-Ü bersic ht [B1000, B2000]z @ 57\mod_1605297657948_388.docx @ 2690291 @ 3 @ 1
7.1.4 Overview of mounting positions

Pos : 448 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Bauform und W artung _Teil 2 [Abb_B1000]_1 @ 6\mod_1430735162931_0.docx @ 214926 @ @ 1
129 / 396
130 / 396
131 / 396
132 / 396
133 / 396
134 / 396
135 / 396
136 / 396
137 / 396
138 / 396
139 / 396
140 / 396
141 / 396
Pos : 461 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Sc hmiers toffe - Titelz @ 58\m od_1605681315342_388.docx @ 2692530 @ 2 @ 1
7.2 Lubricants
Pos : 462 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Sc hmiers toffe Ei nleitung [B1000]z @ 58\m od_1605695457979_388.docx @ 2692734 @ @ 1
With the exception of types SK 11382.1, SK 12382 and SK 9096.1, the gear units are filled with lubricant
for the required mounting position and are ready for operation as delivered. The initial filling corresponds
to a lubricant from the column for the ambient temperatures (standard version) in the lubricant table.
Pos : 463 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Wälzlag erfette Titelz @ 58\mod_1605695236115_388.docx @ 2692614 @ 3 @ 1
7.2.1 Roller bearing greases

Pos : 464 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Wälzlag erefette Tabelle [B1000, B2000]z @ 58\mod_1605695286156_388.docx @ 2692654 @ @ 1
This table contains comparable roller bearing greases from various manufacturers. The manufacturer
can be changed within a grease type. When changing the grease type or the ambient temperature range,
please consult Getriebebau NORD. Otherwise no guarantee can be accepted for the function of the
gear units.
Lubricant type Ambient

temperature
Grease Renolit
Tribol GR 100-2
mineral oil-based GP 2 Gadus S2
-30 … 60 °C PD - Mobilux EP 2
Renolit V100 2
LZR 2 H
-50 … 40 °C Optitemp LG 2 Renolit WTF 2 - - -
Synthetic grease Renolit PETAMO
Tribol GR HLT 2 GHY 133 N Mobiltemp
-25 … 80 °C 4747/220-2 HAT
Renolit Klüberplex SHC 32
LST 2 BEM 41-132
Bio-degradable Mobil SHC
Plantogel Klüberbio Naturelle Grease
grease -25 … 40 °C - Grease
2S M 72-82 EP2
102 EAL
Table 12: Roller bearing greases

142 / 396
Pos : 467 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Getriebeöl e Titelz @ 58\m od_1605696108555_388.docx @ 2692777 @ 3 @ 1
7.2.2 Gear oils

Pos : 469 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Getriebeöl e Ei nlei tung @ 81\m od_1633002871223_388.docx @ 2832412 @ @ 1
This table shows comparable lubricants from various manufacturers. The oil manufacturer can be
changed within a viscosity and lubricant type. Only change the lubricant type or the viscosity after
consultation with Getriebebau NORD.
Mixing different oil types is not permissible. When changing gear oil, different oils of one oil type with
the same viscosity may be mixed in a maximum ratio of 1/20 (5 %).
Prior to the change of oils of different oil types, the gear unit must be thoroughly flushed with the new
oil type. It is recommended to use the new product with a lower viscosity for flushing. This is especially
valid when switching from a mineral oil (CLP) or synthetic oil CLP HC to to a synthetic oil CLP PG and
vice versa.
Pos : 470 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Getriebeöl e T abelle [B1000]z @ 58\m od_1605698018854_388.doc x @ 2692937 @ @ 1
Lubri- Details on DIN (ISO) /

cant name plate Ambient
type temperature
Alpha EP 680 Carter EP 680

Renolin CLP 680
ISO VG 680 Alpha SP 680 Klüberoil Mobilgear Omala Carter XEP 680
CLP 680 Renolin CLP 680
0...40 °C Optigear BM 680 GEM 1-680 N 600 XP 680 S2 G 680
Plus
Optigear 1100/680
Alpha EP 220 Renolin CLP 220 Carter EP 220
Mineral oil
ISO VG 220 Alpha SP 220 Renolin CLP 220 Carter XEP 220
Klüberoil Mobilgear Omala
CLP 220 -10…40 °C Optigear BM 220 Plus
GEM 1-220 N 600 XP 220 S2 G 220
Optigear 1100/220 Renolin Gear 220
VCI
Alpha EP 100 Carter EP 100
Renolin CLP 100
ISO VG 100 Alpha SP 100 Klüberoil Mobilgear Omala
CLP 100 Renolin CLP 100
-15…25 °C Optigear BM 100 GEM 1-100 N 600 XP 100 S2 G 100
Plus
Optigear 1100/100
ISO VG 680 Alphasyn GS 680 Carter SY 680
Renolin Klübersynth Mobil Omala
CLP PG 680 -20...40 °C Optigear Synthetic Carter SG 680
PG 680 GH 6-680 Glygoyle 680 S4 WE 680
Synthetic oil
(Polyglycol)
800/680
Alphasyn GS 220 -
ISO VG 220
Alphasyn PG 220 Renolin Klübersynth Mobil Omala
CLP PG 220 -25…80 °C
Optigear Synthetic PG 220 GH 6-220 Glygoyle 220 S4 WE 220
800/220
Alphasyn EP 460 Carter SH 460
ISO VG 460 Renolin Unisyn Klübersynth Mobil Omala
CLP HC 460
-30…80 °C Optigear Synthetic CLP 460 GEM 4-460 N SHC 634 S4 GX 460
(hydrocarbon)
Synthetic oil
PD 460
Alphasyn EP 220 Carter SH 220
Renolin Unisyn
Optigear Synthetic
ISO VG 220 CLP 220 Klübersynth Mobil Omala
CLP HC 220 PD 220
-40…80 °C Renolin Unisyn GEM 4-220 N SHC 630 S4 GX 220
Optigear Synthetic
Gear 220 VCI
X 220
ISO VG 680 -
CLP E 680 - Plantogear 680 S - - -
degradable oil
-5…40 °C
Naturelle -
Bio-
ISO VG 220 Performance Bio Klübersynth Gear

CLP E 220 Plantogear 220 S -
-5…40 °C GE 220 ESS GEM 2-220 Fluid
EP 220
143 / 396
Lubri- Details on DIN (ISO) /
cant name plate Ambient
type temperature
Optileb GT -
CLP PG H1 ISO VG 680 Klübersynth Mobil
1800/680 Cassida Fluid WG
680 -5…40 °C UH1 6-680 Glygoyle 680
680
Nevastane SY
Food grade oil
CLP PG H1 ISO VG 220 Optileb GT Klübersynth Mobil 220

Cassida Fluid WG
220 -25…40 °C 1800/200 UH1 6-220 Glygoyle 220
220
CLP HC H1 ISO VG 680 Cassida Fluid GL Klüberoil -

Optileb GT 680 -
680 -5…40 °C 680 4 UH1-680 N
Mobil Nevastane
CLP HC H1 ISO VG 220 Cassida Fluid GL Klüberoil
Optileb GT 220 SHC Cibus XSH 220
220 -25…40 °C 220 4 UH1-220 N
220
Tribol GR 100-00
Mineral oil-
PD Mobil
based
Renolit Duraplex MICROLUBE Alvania

Gear unit fluid grease
GP 00 K-30 Tribol GR Chassis Multis EP 00

EP 00 GB 00 EP(LF)2
3020/1000-00 PD Grease LBZ
Spheerol EPL 00
-25 … 60 °C
Mobil
based
PG oil
GP PG 00 K- Renolit Klübersynth
Glygoyle - Marson SY 00
30 LST 00 GE 46-1200
Grease 00
Table 13: Gear oils

Pos : 472 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Getriebeöl e Erl äuter ung [B1000] @ 76\mod_1624569928900_388.docx @ 2798510 @ @ 1
The required lubricant quantity and the lubricant type are stated on the name plate. The filling quantities
stated in the catalogue G1000 are for guidance only. The precise quantities vary depending on the exact
gear ratio. When filling, always observe the oil level screw hole as an indicator of the precise quantity of
oil.
After changing the lubricant, and in particular after the initial filling, the oil level may change during the
first few hours of operation, as the oil galleries and the hollow spaces only fill gradually during operation.
The oil level is still within the permissible tolerance.
If the gear unit contains an oil inspection glass, we recommend that the customer adjusts the oil level
after an operating time of 2 hours so that the oil level is visible in the oil inspection glass when the gear
unit is at a standstill and has cooled down. An oil level check with the oil inspection glass is only possible
after this time.
Gear unit types SK 11282, SK 11382, SK 11382.1, SK 12382 and SK 9096.1 are normally supplied
without oil.
144 / 396
Pos : 481 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Sc hrauben-Anziehdrehmom entez @ 59\m od_1606484633288_388.docx @ 2700090 @ 2 @ 1
7.3 Screw tightening torques
Screw tightening torques [Nm]
Screw fastenings in strength classes Screw

Threaded pin fastenings on
Dimensions 8.8 10.9 12.9 V2A-70 Cap screws
on coupling covers
V4A-70
M4 3.2 5 6 2.8 - - -
M5 6.4 9 11 5.8 - 2 -
M6 11 16 19 10 - - 6.4
M8 27 39 46 24 11 10 11
M10 53 78 91 48 11 17 27
M12 92 135 155 83 27 40 53
M16 230 335 390 207 35 - 92
M20 460 660 770 414 - - 230
M24 790 1150 1300 711 80 - 460
M30 1600 2250 2650 1400 170 - -
M36 2780 3910 4710 2500 - - 1600
M42 4470 6290 7540 4025 - - -
M48 6140 8640 16610 5525 - - -
M56 9840 13850 24130 8860 - - -
G½ - - - - 75 - -
G¾ - - - - 110 - -
G1 - - - - 190 - -
G1¼ - - - - 240 - -
G1½ - - - - 300 - -
Table 14: Screw tightening torques

Pos : 482 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Sc hrauben-Anziehdrehmom ente_M ontag e v on Sc hlauc hv erschr aubung en @ 37\m od_1560935911886_388.doc x @ 2544450 @ 5 @ 1
Installing hose unions

Oil the thread of the union nut, the cutting ring and the thread of the connecting piece. Tighten the union
nut with a spanner until the union nut becomes more difficult to turn. Turn the union nut further by approx.
30° to 60° but only to a maximum of 90° while holding the connecting piece with a spanner. Remove
excess oil from the union.
145 / 396
Pos : 485 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Betriebss tör ungen_01 @ 31\mod_1553081366771_388.docx @ 2515892 @ 2 @ 1
7.4 Troubleshooting
Pos : 488 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Betriebss tör ungen_02 [B1000, B1050] @ 37\m od_1560937554866_388.docx @ 2544598 @ @ 1
NOTICE!
Gear unit damage
• Shut down the gear unit immediately in case of malfunction.
Pos : 489 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Betriebss tör ungen_04 [B1000, B2000] @ 58\m od_1606121941913_388.docx @ 2694810 @ @ 1
Gear unit malfunctions
Error Possible cause Remedy

Oil too low or
Unusual running noises,
bearing damage or Consult NORD Service department
vibrations
gear wheel damage
Oil escaping from
Defective seal Consult NORD Service department
gear unit or motor
Use oil expansion chamber
Incorrect oil level
Oil escaping from (Option OA)
pressure vent Incorrect, dirty oil Oil change
Unfavourable operating conditions Consult NORD Service department
Unfavourable installation conditions
Gear unit becomes too hot Consult NORD Service department
or gear unit damage
Motor coupling defective Replace elastomer ring
Shock when switching on, Tighten motor and gear unit
Gear unit fastening loose
vibrations fastening screws
Defective rubber element Replace rubber element
Breakage in gear unit
Output shaft does not rotate
Motor coupling defective Consult NORD Service department
although motor is running
Shrink disc slip
Table 15: Overview of malfunctions

146 / 396
Pos : 492 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/7. Anhang/Leck age und Dichtheit @ 4\m od_1393493307129_388.doc x @ 120701 @ 2 @ 1
7.5 Leakage and leak-tightness

Gear units are filled with oil or grease to lubricate the moving parts. Seals prevent the escape of
lubricants. A complete seal is technically not possible, as a certain film of moisture, for example on the
radial shaft sealing rings is normal and advantageous for a long-term seal. In the region of vents,
moisture due to oil may be visible due to the escape of oil mist because of the function. In the case of
grease-lubricated labyrinth seals, e.g. Taconite sealing systems, used grease emerges from the sealing
gap due to the principle of operation. This apparent leak is not a fault.
According to the test conditions as per DIN 3761, the leak is determined by the medium which is to be
sealed, which in test bench tests exceeds the function-related moisture in a defined test period and
which results in dripping of the medium which is to be sealed. The measured quantity which is then
collected is designated as leakage.
Definition of leakage according to DIN 3761 and its appropriate use

Location of leak
Radial shaft
Term Explanation In IEC adapter Housing joint Venting
seal
No moisture No reason for No reason for No reason for No reason for
Sealed
apparent complaint complaint complaint complaint
Moisture film locally
No reason for No reason for No reason for No reason for
Damp restricted (not an
complaint complaint complaint complaint
area)
Moisture film beyond
No reason for No reason for Repair if No reason for
Wet the extent of the
complaint complaint necessary complaint
component
Measurable Recognisable Repair Repair Repair Repair
leakage stream, dripping recommended recommended recommended recommended
Temporary
malfunction of the
Temporary No reason for No reason for Repair if No reason for
sealing system or oil
leakage complaint complaint necessary complaint
leak due to
transport *)
Apparent leakage,
e.g. due to soiling,
Apparent No reason for No reason for No reason for No reason for
sealing systems
leakage complaint complaint complaint complaint
which can be re-
lubricated
Table 16: Definition of leaks according to DIN 3761
*) Previous experience has shown that moist or wet radial shaft sealing rings stop leaking later.
Therefore, under no circumstances can replacement be recommended at this stage. The reason for
momentary moisture may be e.g. small particles under the sealing lip.
147 / 396
Pos : 501 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/0. Prol og/Reparatur hinw eise [B 1000 - B 2050] @ 68\m od_1614176946393_388.docx @ 2743640 @ 233 @ 1
7.6 Repair information

For enquiries to our technical and mechanical service department, please have the exact gear unit type
and, if applicable, the order number to hand. You can find this information on the name plate.
7.6.1 Repairs
In case of repair, remove all non-original parts from the gear unit or geared motor. No guarantee can be
given for any attached parts, such as rotary encoders or external fans.
Send the device to the following address:

Serviceabteilung
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1
22941 Bargteheide
Information
If possible, state the reason for returning the component/device. Specify a contact person for queries.
This is important in order to keep repair times as short as possible.
7.6.2 Internet information

In addition, you will find the manuals in the available languages on our website: www.nord.com.
Pos : 502 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/1. Hi nw eise/Gewährleis tung @ 22\m od_1531824598381_388.docx @ 2433337 @ 2 @ 1
7.7 Warranty
NORD GmbH & Co. KG accepts no liability for damage to persons, materials or assets as a result of
failure to observe this operating manual, operating errors or incorrect use. General wearing parts, e.g.
radial seals are excluded from the warranty.
148 / 396
Pos : 504 /Anleitungen/Getri ebe/0. Prol og/Abk ürzungen [B 1000-2050] @ 56\m od_1604564182940_388.docx @ 2686999 @ 2 @ 1
7.8 Abbreviations
2D Dust explosion protected gear units, Zone 21 EN European standard
2G Gas explosion protected gear units, Zone 1 FR Radial force
3D Dust explosion protected gear units, Zone 22 FA Axial force
ATEX: ATmosphrères EXplosible H1 Lubricant for the food industry
B5 Flange fastening with through holes IE1 Standard efficiency motors
B14 Flange fastening with threaded holes IE2 High efficiency motors
CLP Mineral oil IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
CLP HC Synthetic polyalphaolefin oil NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
CLP PG Synthetic polyglycol oil IP55 International Protection
cSt Centistokes ISO International standardisation organisation
CW Clockwise, right rotation pH pH value
CCW Counter-clockwise, left rotation PPE Personal Protective Equipment
°dH Water hardness in German hardness degrees DIR Directive
1 dH = 0.1783 mmol/l
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung [German VCI Volatile Corrosion Inhibitor
Standards Institute]
E Ester oil VG Viscosity group
EC European Community WN Document from Getriebebau NORD
=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Inhalt ===
149 / 396
Pos : 506 /Allgem ein/Steuerm odule/Stichw ortv erzeic hnis @ 0\mod_1317978518730_388.docx @ 4101 @ @ 1
Key word index

=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Stichw ortv erzeic hnis ===
A Lubricants ..................................................... 68
Activating the vent .........................................41 M

Address..........................................................74 Maintenance ................................................. 74
C Maintenance intervals ................................... 45
Change the oil ...............................................49 Maintenance work
Check the hose ..............................................47 Check for running noises .......................... 46
Checking the oil level.....................................46 Checking the oil level ................................ 46
Cooling coil ....................................................43 Leaks ......................................................... 46
Cooling system, internal ................................37 Lubricant dispenser ................................... 48
Covers ...........................................................31 Oil change ................................................. 49

Radial shaft seal ........................................ 49
D
Re-greasing VL2, VL3, W and AI/AN ........ 47
Disposal of materials .....................................51
Vent screw ................................................. 49
E
Visual inspection ....................................... 46
Electric motor .................................................40
Motor ............................................................. 40
Electrical connection ......................................40
N
F
Name plate .................................................... 16
Fault ............................................................... 72
nsd tupH ........................................................ 19
G
O
Gear unit types ..............................................14
Oil level ......................................................... 41
General overhaul ...........................................50
Option M ....................................................... 29
GRIPMAXX™ ................................................29
Options .......................................................... 14
H
P
H66 option .....................................................24
Pulling device ................................................ 22
Hollow shaft with GRIPMAXX™ (Option M) ..29
Push-on gear unit.......................................... 24
Hose union ....................................................71
R
I
Radial shaft seal ........................................... 49
Installation......................................................19
Re-grease the bearings ................................ 50
Intended use ..................................................11
Re-greasing .................................................. 47
Internet...........................................................74
Repairs .......................................................... 74
Introduction of forces .....................................22
Roller bearing greases .................................. 68
L Running noises ............................................. 46
Leakage .........................................................73 Running-in time ............................................. 44
Long-term storage .........................................18 S
Lubricant dispenser .................................42, 48
Safety information ......................................... 11
Lubricant quantities .......................................68
Service .......................................................... 74
150 / 396
Service intervals ............................................45 Transport ....................................................... 17
Shrink disc ...............................................26, 29 V
Standard motor ..............................................33 Vent ............................................................... 41
Surface treatment Vent screw .................................................... 49
nsd tupH .....................................................19 Visual inspection ........................................... 46
T Visual inspection of hose .............................. 47
Tightening torques .........................................71
151 / 396
152 / 396
153 / 396
154 / 396
B 1091 – en
Motors
Operating and Assembly Instructions
155 / 396
Pos : 2 /Anl eitung en/Motor en/B1091 Drehstr ommotor en/1. Allgemei nes /0. Pr olog/Sic her heits- und Anw endungs hinw eise für El ektr omotor en @ 66\m od_1613048090652_388.doc x @ 2735079 @ @ 1
Safety and operating instructions for electric motors

(according to: Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU)
1 General The devices must be protected against impermissible loads.

During operation, devices may, depending on their protection class, have Especially during transport and handling, components must not
live, bare, moving or rotating parts or hot surfaces. be deformed and/or insulation distances must not be changed.
Unauthorised removal of covers, improper use, incorrect installation or Electrical components must not be mechanically damaged or
operation causes a risk of serious personal injury or material damage. destroyed (this may cause a health hazard!).
Further information can be found in this documentation. 5. Electrical Connection
All transportation, installation commissioning and maintenance work must When working on live devices, the applicable national accident
be carried out by qualified personnel (compliant with IEC 364 or. prevention regulations must be complied with.
CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IEC 664 or DIN VDE 0110 and The electrical installation must be implemented according to the
national accident prevention regulations). applicable regulations (e.g. cable cross-section, fuses, earth lead
For the purposes of these basic safety instructions, qualified personnel connections). Further instructions can be found in the
are persons who are familiar with the assembly, installation, documentation.
commissioning and operation of this product and who have the relevant Information regarding EMC-compliant installation – such as
qualifications for their work. shielding, earthing, location of filters and installation of cables –
2. Proper use in Europe can be found in the documentation for the devices. These
instructions must be complied with even with CE marked devices.
The devices are components intended for installation in electrical systems
or machines. Compliance with the limiting values specified in the EMC legal
regulations is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the system
When installed in machines, the devices must not be commissioned (i.e.
or machine.
commencement of the proper use) until it has been ensured that the
machine meets the provisions of the EC Directive 2006/42/EEC 6. Operation
(Machinery Directive); EN 60204 must also be complied with. Where necessary, systems in which the devices are installed
Commissioning (i.e. implementation of proper use) is only permitted if the must be equipped with additional monitoring and protective
EMC directive (2014/30/EU) is complied with. equipment according to the applicable safety requirements, e.g.
legislation concerning technical equipment, accident prevention
Devices with a CE label meet the requirements of the Low Voltage
regulations, etc.
Directive 2014/35/EU. The stated harmonized standards for the devices
are used in the declaration of conformity. The parameterisation and configuration of the devices must be
selected so that no hazards can occur.
Technical data and information for connection conditions can be found on
the rating plate and in the documentation, and must be complied with. All covers must be kept closed during operation.
The devices may only be used for safety functions which are described 7. Maintenance and repairs
and explicitly approved. The following applies in particular for operation with frequency
3. Transport, storage inverters:
Information regarding transport, storage and correct handling must be After the devices are disconnected from the power supply, live
complied with. equipment components and power connections should not be
touched immediately, because of possible charged capacitors.
4. Installation
Observe the applicable information signs located on the device.
The installation and cooling of the equipment must be implemented
Further information can be found in this documentation.
according to the regulations in the corresponding documentation.
These safety instructions must be kept in a safe place!
156 / 396
Pos : 3 /Anl eitung en/Motor en/B1091 Drehstr ommotor en/1. Allgemei nes /0. Pr olog/D ok umentati on - Versionsliste [B 1091] @ 76\m od_1625229689983_388.doc x @ 2802601 @ @ 1
Documentation
Title: B 1091
Order no.: 6051302
Series: Asynchronous motors / synchronous motors
• Single and three-phase asynchronous motors
SK 63*1)/*2) *3) to SK 315*1)/*2) *3)
1) Power labelling: S, SA, SX, M, MA, MB, MX, L, LA, LB, LX, R, X, Y, A, W
- optionally supplemented with: H, P
2)
Pole number labelling: 2, 4, 6, 8, …
3)
Further options
• Three-phase asynchronous motors

SK 63*1)/*2) 2D *3) to SK 250*1)/*2) 2D *3)
1)
Power labelling: S, SA, SX, M, MA, MB, MX, L, LA, LB, LX, R, X, Y, A, W
2)
Pole number labelling: 4, 6
3)
Options
with ATEX labelling II 2D Ex tb IIIC T . . . °C Db
SK 63*1)/*2) 3D *3) to SK 250*1)/*2) 3D *3)

1)
2)
3) Options
with ATEX labelling II 3D Ex tc IIIB T . . . °C Dc
SK 63*1)/*2) 2G *3) to SK 200*1)/*2) 2G *3)

1)
2)
3) Further options
with ATEX labelling II 2G Ex eb IIC T3 Gb
SK 63*1)/*2) 3G *3) to SK 200*1)/*2) 3G *3)

1)
2)
3) Further options
with ATEX labelling II 3G Ex ec IIC T3 Gc
157 / 396
Version list
Date Version
Internal code
B 1091, 6051302 / 0215 -
January
2015
March 2016 • Structural modifications to the document
December
2016
B 1091, 6051302 / 2417 • Technical supplements
June 2017
B 1091, 6051302 / 3517 • Technical supplements
August 2017
June 2018 • Update of EU Declaration of Conformity 2D / 3D
August 2018 • Section for operation with frequency inverter removed
• Section for special operating conditions, permissible surrounding area
supplemented
• Ignition protection type labelling and name plates updated
• Update of EU Declaration of Conformity 2G / 3G
June 2019 • Update of EU Declaration of Conformity 3D
October • Supplement to new section for use of explosion-protected electric
2020 motors in the People's Republic of China
March 2021
B 1091, July 6051302 / 2721 • Supplement to section
2021 – Explosion-protected electric motors according to Class I Div.2
– Explosion-protected electric motors according to Class II Div.2
B 1091, July 6051302 / 2722 • General corrections
2022 • Update of standard specifications
• Removal of the chapter for synchronous motors (see new manual
34158 B5000)
• Incremental encoder added
158 / 396
Pos : 4 /Allgemei n/Allgemei ngültige Modul e/Ur heberrec htsv ermerk @ 5\m od_1410955083459_388.docx @ 150427 @ @ 1
Copyright notice
As an integral component of the device described here, this document must be provided to all
users in a suitable form.
Any editing or amendment or other utilisation of the document is prohibited.
Pos : 5 /Allgemei n/Allgemei ngültige Modul e/H erausgeber @ 67\m od_1613484928402_388.docx @ 2738552 @ @ 1
Publisher
Fon +49 (0) 45 32 / 289-0 • Fax +49 (0) 45 32 / 289-2253

=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Copyright ===
159 / 396
160 / 396
Pos : 7 /Allgemei n/Steuermodule/Inhaltsv erzeic hnis @ 0\mod_1317978518480_388.docx @ 4078 @ @ 1
Table of Contents
=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Inhaltsv erz eichnis ===
1 General .........................................................................................................................................................9
1.1 Safety and installation notes ............................................................................................................ 10
1.1.1 Explanation of labels used .................................................................................................. 10
1.1.2 List of safety and installation notes ..................................................................................... 11
1.2 Field of use ...................................................................................................................................... 12
1.3 Correct handling of electric motors................................................................................................... 13
1.3.1 Transport, storage .............................................................................................................. 13
1.3.2 Installation .......................................................................................................................... 13
1.3.3 Balancing, drive elements .................................................................................................. 14
1.3.4 Alignment ........................................................................................................................... 15
1.3.5 Output shafts ...................................................................................................................... 15
1.3.6 Maximum thermal expansion at rated values ..................................................................... 15
1.3.7 Electrical connection........................................................................................................... 16
1.3.8 Operation with frequency inverters ..................................................................................... 17
1.3.9 Checking the insulation resistance ..................................................................................... 20
1.3.10 Commissioning ................................................................................................................... 20
1.3.11 Disposal .............................................................................................................................. 21
2 Maintenance and servicing ...................................................................................................................... 22
2.1 Safety measures .............................................................................................................................. 22
2.2 Bearing replacement periods ........................................................................................................... 23
2.3 Maintenance intervals ...................................................................................................................... 24
2.4 General overhaul.............................................................................................................................. 24
3 ATEX Explosion hazard areas .................................................................................................................. 25
3.1 Motors with increased ignition protection, type Ex eb ...................................................................... 25
3.1.1 Cable glands....................................................................................................................... 26
3.1.2 Cable connections .............................................................................................................. 26
3.1.3 Terminal box cover seals .................................................................................................... 27
3.1.4 Motor position – special features IM V3, IM V6 .................................................................. 27
3.1.5 Further operating conditions ............................................................................................... 28
3.1.6 Protective devices .............................................................................................................. 28
3.1.7 Operation with frequency inverter ....................................................................................... 29
3.1.8 Repairs ............................................................................................................................... 30
3.1.9 Painting .............................................................................................................................. 30
3.1.10 Name plate of NORD Ex eb motors according to EN IEC 60079-0:2018 ........................... 31
3.1.11 Applied standard versions .................................................................................................. 31
3.2 Motors with ignition protection class Non Sparking Ex ec ................................................................ 32
3.2.1 Cable glands....................................................................................................................... 33
3.2.6 Protective devices .............................................................................................................. 35
3.2.7 Repairs ............................................................................................................................... 35
3.2.8 Painting .............................................................................................................................. 36
3.2.9 Type plate for NORD Ex ec motors according to EN IEC 60079-0:2018 ............................ 37
3.2.10 Applied standard versions .................................................................................................. 37
3.3 Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22 according to EN 60079 and IEC 60079 ............................. 38
3.3.1 Commissioning information / Application area .................................................................... 39
3.3.3 Electrical Connection .......................................................................................................... 40
3.3.4 Cable glands....................................................................................................................... 41
3.3.5 Permissible ambient temperature range ............................................................................. 42
3.3.6 Painting .............................................................................................................................. 42
3.3.7 IEC-B14 motors .................................................................................................................. 42
3.3.10 Design and operating principle ........................................................................................... 43
3.3.11 Minimum cross section of bonding conductors ................................................................... 43
3.3.12 Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 44
161 / 396
3.4 Options for motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22 ......................................................................... 45
3.4.2 External fan ........................................................................................................................ 46
3.4.3 Second temperature sensor 2TF ........................................................................................ 47
3.4.4 Back stop ............................................................................................................................ 47
3.4.5 Brake .................................................................................................................................. 47
3.4.6 Incremental encoder ........................................................................................................... 48
3.4.7 Overview of brake attachment for NORD ATEX motors ..................................................... 48
3.4.8 Name plate of motors (Ex tb, Ex tc) according to EN 60079 for FI operation ..................... 49
3.5 Motors according to TP TC012/2011 for the Eurasian Economic Union .......................................... 50
3.5.1 Type plates / Labelling........................................................................................................ 50
3.5.2 Standards ........................................................................................................................... 51
3.5.3 Service life .......................................................................................................................... 51
3.5.4 Special operating conditions (X-labelling)........................................................................... 51
3.6 Motors according to GB 12476.1-2013 / GB 12476.5-2013 for the People's Republic of China ...... 52
3.6.1 Type plates / Labelling........................................................................................................ 52
3.6.2 Standards to be observed during operation and maintenance ........................................... 53
3.7 Explosion-protected electric motors according to Class I Div.2 ........................................................ 54
3.8 Explosion-protected electric motors according to Class II Div.2 ....................................................... 58
3.8.4 Cables and cable glands .................................................................................................... 61
3.8.5 Painting .............................................................................................................................. 61
3.8.6 IEC-B14 motors .................................................................................................................. 61
3.8.8 Minimum cross section of bonding conductors ................................................................... 62
3.8.10 Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 64
4 Replacement parts .................................................................................................................................... 65
5 Declarations of Conformity ...................................................................................................................... 66
Pos : 10 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/!1! Allgem eines @ 7\m od_1431347018514_388.docx @ 217366 @ 1 @ 1
162 / 396
1 General
Pos : 11 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/!1! Allgem eines _Inhalt @ 7\m od_1431330112564_388.docx @ 217304 @ @ 1
These operating instructions must be read before NORD motors are transported, installed,
commissioned, serviced or repaired. All persons who are involved in these tasks must observe these
operating instructions. In order to prevent injury or damage, all of the safety information in these
operating instructions must be strictly observed.
The information and instructions in the instructions, safety and commissioning information which is
supplied, as well as all other instructions must be observed.
This is essential to prevent injury and damage.
The applicable national, local and plant-specific regulations and requirements and regulations must be
observed.
Technical details may vary for special designs and constructions. In case of doubt, we urgently
recommend that the manufacturer is contacted, giving details of the type designation and the
motor number.
Qualified personnel are persons who due to their training, experience and instruction, and their
knowledge of the relevant standards, accident prevention regulations and operating conditions are
authorised to carry out the necessary activities.
This also includes knowledge of first aid measures and the local emergency services.
It is assumed that the work for transport, assembly, installation, commissioning, maintenance and repair
will be performed by qualified staff.
In particular, the following must be observed:
• Technical data and information regarding permissible use, installation, connection, ambient and
operating conditions, which are contained in the catalogue, the order documents and other
documentation for the product.
• Local and plant-specific regulations and requirements
• Correct use of tools, lifting and transportation equipment
• Use of personal protective equipment
For reasons of clarity, the operating instructions do not contain detailed information about possible
versions and therefore do not consider all possible cases of installation, operation or servicing.
Because of this, these operating instruction essentially only contain the information which is necessary
for proper use by qualified personnel.
In order to prevent faults it is necessary that the prescribed service and inspection work is carried out
by appropriately qualified personnel.
• For the operation on an inverter, the planning guideline B1091-1 forms a part of these operating
instructions.
• The supplementary operating instructions must be observed if an external fan is present.
• For braking motors, the supplementary brake operating instructions must be observed..
If the operating instructions or the planning guide are lost for any reason, these documents must be
obtained from NORD.
163 / 396
Pos : 13 /Anl eitungen/Elek tronik/FU und Starter/1. Allgemei nes/Sicherheits- und Installati onshi nweis e und War n- Gefahr enhinw eis e/Sicherheits- und Installati onshi nweis e (i nkl. Einl eitung) @ 0\mod_1325780428207_388.docx @ 5385 @ 2 @ 1
1.1 Safety and installation notes

The devices are operating materials intended for use in industrial high voltage systems, and are
operated at voltages that could lead to severe injuries or death if they are touched.
The device and its accessories must only be used for the purpose which is intended by the manufacturer.
Unauthorised modifications and the use of spare parts and additional equipment which has not been
purchased from or recommended by the manufacturer of the device may cause fire, electric shock and
injury.
All of the associated covers and protective devices must be used.
Installation and other work may only be carried out by qualified electricians with strict adherence to the
operating instructions. Therefore keep these Operating Instructions at hand, together with all
supplementary instructions for any options which are used, and give them to each user.
Local regulations for the installation of electrical equipment and accident prevention must be complied
with.
Pos : 14 /Anl eitungen/Elek tronik/FU und Starter/1. Allgemei nes/Sicherheits- und Installati onshi nweis e und War n- Gefahr enhinw eis e/Erläuter ung der v erwendeten Kennzeic hnungen [B1091] ### auslaufend ### @ 33\mod_1558076342533_388.docx @ 2535760 @ 3 @ 1
1.1.1 Explanation of labels used
Indicates an immediate danger, which may result in death or serious

DANGER injury.
Indicates a possibly dangerous situation, which may result in death or

WARNING serious injury.
Indicates a possibly dangerous situation, which may result in slight or

CAUTION minor injuries.
Indicates a possibly harmful situation, which may cause damage to the

NOTICE product or the environment.
Note Indicates hints for use and useful information.
164 / 396
Pos : 16 /Anl eitungen/Elek tronik/FU und Starter/1. Allgemei nes/Sicherheits- und Installati onshi nweis e und War n- Gefahr enhinw eis e/Auflistung der Sic her heits- und Installations hinw eise @ 1\m od_1341560303401_388.docx @ 30325 @ 3 @ 1
1.1.2 List of safety and installation notes

Pos : 17 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefahr - Elek trischer Schl ag - Motor en [B1091] @ 11\m od_1459952302755_388.docx @ 316085 @ @ 1
DANGER! Electric shock

The motor is operated with a dangerous voltage. Touching certain conducting components (connection terminals
and supply cables) will cause electric shock with possibly fatal consequences.
Even when the motor is at a standstill (e.g. due to the electronic block of a connected frequency inverter or a
jammed drive unit) the connection terminals and supply cables may carry a dangerous voltage. A motor standstill
is not identical to electrical isolation from the mains.
Even if the drive unit has been disconnected from the mains, a connected motor may rotate and possibly generate
a dangerous voltage.
Installation and work must only be carried out when the motor is at a standstill and is disconnected (all phases
disconnected from the mains).
Follow the 5 Safety Rules (1. Switch off the power, 2. Secure against switching on, 3. Check for no voltage, 4.
Earthing and short circuiting, 5. Cover or fence off neighbouring live components).
Pos : 18 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/W arnung - schw er e Las ten - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\mod_1460533620869_388.docx @ 317935 @ @ 1
WARNING Hazard due to heavy loads

The large weight of the motor must be taken into account during any transportation or installation work.
Incorrect handling may cause the motor to fall or swing without control and therefore cause severe, and possibly
fatal injuries due to impact, crushing and other physical injuries. In addition, severe damage to the motor and its
surroundings are possible.
Therefore:
– Do not stand under suspended loads
– Only use the attachment points provided
– Check that lifting equipment and lashings have and adequate load capacity and are undamaged
– Avoid hectic movements
– Use personal protective equipment
Pos : 19 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/W arnung - Beweg ung - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\mod_1459953068537_388.docx @ 316120 @ @ 1
WARNING Injury due to movement

Under certain conditions (e.g. switching on the power supply, releasing a holding brake) the motor may start to
move. The machinery which it drives (press / chain hoist / roller / fan etc.) may then make an unexpected
movement. This may cause various injuries, including to third parties.
Before switching on, secure the danger area by warning and removing all persons from the danger area.
Pos : 20 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/W arnung - los e T eile - Motor en [B1091] @ 11\mod_1459954601199_388.docx @ 316155 @ @ 1
WARNING Hazard due to loose parts

Care must be taken that there are no loose parts on the motor. Otherwise, these may cause injury during
transportation and installation work, or when the motor in in operation.
Loose carrying or lifting eyes may cause the motor to fall during transportation.
Parallel keys on the motor shaft may be thrown out when the motor shaft rotates.
Fasten or remove loose parts and carrying or lifting eyes; secure or remove free parallel shaft keys on the motor
shaft(s).
Pos : 21 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Vorsic ht - Verbr ennungsgefahr @ 11\m od_1460532707435_388.docx @ 317900 @ @ 1
CAUTION Danger of burns

The surface of the motor may heat up to temperatures in excess of 70°C.
Touching the motor may cause local burns to the affected parts of the body (hands, fingers, etc.).
To prevent such injuries, allow sufficient time for cooling down before starting work - the surface temperature
should be checked with suitable measuring equipment. In addition, keep sufficient distance from adjacent
components during installation, or install protection against contact.
165 / 396
Pos : 22 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Anwendungsbereic h @ 7\mod_1431330765571_388.docx @ 217335 @ 2 @ 1
1.2 Field of use

Use of the motors:
The motors may only be used for their intended purpose (to drive machinery).
The motors are constructed with at least protection class IP55 (for the protection class: see rating plate).
They may be installed in dusty or damp environments.
In principle the conditions of use and the ambient conditions determine the necessary protection class
and any other additional measures. For outdoor installation and vertical versions, e.g. V1 or V5 with the
shaft pointing downwards, Getriebebau NORD recommends the use of the double fan cover option
[RDD].
Motors must be protected against intensive sunlight, e.g. by the use of a protective cover. The insulation
is tropicalised.
Installation altitude: ≤ 1000 m
Ambient temperature: -20°C...+40°C
For standard motors an extended ambient temperature range from -20°C...+60°C is permissible.. In this
case, the rated power must be reduced to 82% of the value stated in the catalogue. If the maximum
ambient temperature is between +40°C and +60°C, the power output should be inversely linearly
interpolated between 100% and 82%.
The motor connection cables and the cable glands must be suitable for temperatures ≥ 90°C.
166 / 396
Pos : 23 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Bestimmungsgem äßer Umg ang mit El ektr omotor en @ 7\m od_1431347154915_388.docx @ 217398 @ 2 @ 1
1.3 Correct handling of electric motors

All work must only be carried out with the power to the system switched off.
Pos : 24 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Tr ansport, Ei nlager ung @ 67\mod_1613401505511_388.docx @ 2737482 @ 35 @ 1
1.3.1 Transport, storage
WARNING Fall hazard

Incorrect handling during transport may result in the motor falling down or swivelling uncontrolledly, and thus
possibly causing serious or fatal injuries such as bruises, contusions and other physical injuries. It may also
result in serious damage to the motor and its environment.
That is why:
– Use the existing threads for ring bolts during transport (see following illustration).
– Do not attach additional loads! The lifting eyes are designed for the motor weight only.
– For transporting the machine units (e.g. gear unit attachments), only use the lifting eyes and pins
provided for this purpose!
– Machine units must not be lifted by attaching them to the individual machines!
To avoid any damage to the motor, the motor must always be lifted via suitable lifting equipment. If the
period between delivery and motor commissioning is more than four years under favourable conditions
(storage in dry and dust-free spaces protected from vibrations), the roller bearings should be replaced.
Unfavourable conditions significantly reduce the period. If necessary, unprotected and finished surfaces
(flange surface, shaft end, ...) may be treated with corrosion protection agents. If necessary, the
winding’s insulation resistance must be checked ( 1.3.9 "Checking the insulation resistance").
Changes compared to normal operation (increased power consumption, higher temperatures or
vibrations, unusual noises or odours, response of monitoring systems, etc.) may indicate that the
function is impaired. To avoid personal injury or material damage, the maintenance staff responsible
must be informed of these changes without delay.
In case of doubt, switch off the motor immediately as soon as this is allowed by the system’s state.
Mounting of ring bolts for transport
The number, position and thread size of the ring bolts provided for transport varies depending on the
motor size.
Size Threads Position

63 … …
71 … …
80 M6 2, 4
90 M8 1, 2, 3, 4
100 M8 1, 2, 3, 4
100 APAB M8 2, 4
112 M8 1, 2, 3, 4
132 M10 1, 2, 3, 4
160 M12 1, 2, 3, 4
180 M12 1, 2, 3, 4
200X M12 1, 2, 3, 4
Pos : 25 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Aufstellung @ 7\mod_1431348785190_388.docx @ 217460 @ 3 @ 1
1.3.2 Installation
• After installation, screwed-on lifting lugs must be tightened or removed.
167 / 396
• Smooth running: Precise alignment of the clutch and a well-balanced drive element (clutch, pulleys,
fan, etc.) are prerequisites for smooth vibration-free running.
• Complete balancing of the motor and the drive elements may be necessary.
• The top section of the terminal box and the position of the terminal box can be rotated by 4 x 90
degrees.
• Even if not required, on IEC B14 motors all four fixing screws, must be screwed into the flanged
bearing plate! The fixing screw threads must be inserted with a sealant, e.g. Loctite 242.
WARNING Electric shock

The maximum depth for screwing into the type plate is 2 x d. There is a danger that the motor windings may be
damaged if longer screws are used. This creates a danger of potential transfer to the housing and danger of
electric shock if touched.
• The motor must be inspected for damage before installation and commissioning. A damaged motor
must not be commissioned.
• Rotating shaft ends and unused shaft ends must be protected against contact. Unused parallel shaft
keys must be secured against being thrown out.
• The motor must be suitable for the installation location. (requirements prescribed by standards,
ambient conditions, installation altitude)
• Motor surfaces may become very hot during operation. Suitable protective measures must be taken
if there is a danger of contact or a hazard to the vicinity of the installation.
Pos : 26 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/W uc htung, Abtriebs elem ente @ 7\m od_1431349031782_388.docx @ 217491 @ 3 @ 1
1.3.3 Balancing, drive elements

The fitting and removal of drive elements (clutch, pulley, gear wheel,…) must be performed with suitable
equipment. As standard the rotors are balanced with half key balancing. The appropriate form of
balancing must be observed if drive elements are installed on the motor shaft. Drive elements
must be balanced according to ISO 1940.
The generally required measures for protection against touching the drive elements must be observed.
If a motor is started without a drive element, the parallel key must be secured against being thrown out.
This also applies for any second shaft end. Alternatively, the parallel shaft key must be removed.
168 / 396
Pos : 27 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Ausrichten @ 7\mod_1431349204216_388.docx @ 217522 @ 3 @ 1
1.3.4 Alignment
In particular with direct coupling, the motor shafts and the driven machine must be axially and radially
aligned to each other. Incorrect alignment may result in damage to the bearings, excessive vibration
and breakage of the shaft.
Pos : 28 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Abtriebsw ellen @ 64\m od_1611922605855_388.docx @ 2726037 @ 3 @ 1
1.3.5 Output shafts

The maximum permissible axial (FA) and radial forces (FR) for the A side end of the motor shaft can be
obtained from the table below. Getriebebau NORD should be consulted if the radial force (FR) is applied
at a distance which is greater than the length E/2.
Type FR [N] FA [N]
63 530 480
71 530 480
80 860 760
90 910 810
100 1300 1100
112 1950 1640
132 2790 2360
160 3500 3000
180 .X 3500 3000
180 5500 4000
200 .X 5500 4000
225 8000 5000
250 8000 5000
No axial (FA) and radial forces (FR) are permissible for the B side shaft end.
NOTICE! Attachments must not cause rubbing (danger of excessive temperatures and sparking) or
impair the necessary flow of cooling air.
Pos : 29 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/M aximal e thermische Ausdehnung bei Bem ess ungsw erten @ 82\mod_1636719215815_388.docx @ 2843980 @ 3 @ 1
1.3.6 Maximum thermal expansion at rated values

Size Shaft Housing length Housing diameter
[mm] [mm] [mm]
63 0.19 0.39 0.28
71 0.22 0.47 0.31
80 0.25 0.53 0.36
90 0.30 0.62 0.40
100 0.35 0.69 0.45
112 0.36 0.78 0.50
132 0.46 0.91 0.60
160 0.57 1.04 0.73
180 .X 0.62 1.04 0.73
180 0.67 1.26 0.82
200 .X 0.67 1.26 0.82
225 0.85 0.58 0.41
250 0.85 0.58 0.41
169 / 396
Pos : 31 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Elektrischer Anschl uss @ 72\mod_1619773263117_388.docx @ 2773520 @ 3 @ 1
1.3.7 Electrical connection

The connection cables must be inserted into the terminal box using cable glands. The terminal box must
be sealed against dust and water. Mains voltage and mains frequency must match the data on the rating
plate. ±5 % voltage or ±2 % frequency deviations are permissible without power reduction. The
connection and configuration of the jumpers must be made according to the circuit diagram in the
terminal box.
Please refer to the following table for the designations of the auxiliary terminals.
Auxiliary terminal designation
Additional equipment Labelling of auxiliary terminals Comment
EN 60034-8
Thermistor TP1 – TP2 Switch-off
1TP1 – 1TP2 Warning Winding 1
2TP1 – 2TP2 Switch-off Winding 1
3TP1 – 3TP2 Warning Winding 2
4TP1 – 4TP2 Switch-off Winding 2
Option: TF 5TP1 – 5TP2 Brake
1TB1 – 1TB2 Warning Winding 1
Bi-metal temperature sensor
2TB1 – 2TB2 Switch-off Winding 1
Normally closed
3TB1 – 3TB2 Warning Winding 2
Option: TW
4TB1 – 4TB2 Switch-off Winding 2
Bi-metal temperature 1TM1 – 1TM2 Warning Winding 1
sensor, normally open 2TM1 – 2TM2 Switch-off Winding 1
3TM1 – 3TM2 Warning Winding 2
4TM1 – 4TM2 Switch-off Winding 2
PT100 / PT1000 1R1 – 1R2 Winding 1 (Phase U)
2R1 – 2R2 Winding 1 (Phase V)
3R1 – 3R2 Winding 1 (Phase W)
KTY (+) 4R1 – 4R2 (-) Winding 1
Silicon temperature sensor (+) 5R1 – 5R2 (-) Winding 2
Anti-condensation heater 1HE1 – 1HE2 Motor heater
Option: SH 2HE1 – 2HE2 Brake heater
Capacitor 1CA1 – 1CA2 for operating capacitor 1
Motor option: 2CA1 – 2CA2 for operating capacitor 2
EAR/EHB/EST 3CA1 – 3CA2 for starting capacitor 1
4CA1 – 4CA2 for starting capacitor 2
Direct current brake BD1 – BD2
Option: BRE...
Option: DBR… Brake1: BD1-BD2
Brake2: BD3-BD4
170 / 396
Pos : 33 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Betrieb am Freq uenz umrichter @ 78\mod_1629901858673_388.docx @ 2817407 @ 3 @ 1
1.3.8 Operation with frequency inverters

Three-phase asynchronous motors of type SK 63 /. – SK 250 /. have been qualified for operation with
link circuit inverters according to DIN EN 60034-18-41 (2014).
Please also observe the operating instructions for the frequency inverter in use.
The insulation system used by NORD consists of suitable varnished copper wire, phase insulation,
homogeneous impregnation and groove lining as insulation against earth and is designed for the
increased requirements of the link circuit inverter in the standard version.
The maximum permissible FI input voltage is 500 V +10 %. Link circuit voltages in excess of 750 V DC
are not permissible. Peak voltages due to the system of inverter, cable and motor must not exceed the
following values when the motor is warm due to operation.
Permissible impulse voltages depending on the voltage rise time

Impulse voltage [V]
Voltage rise time [µs]
If the values are outside of the permissible range, du/dt or sine wave filters may be used (note additional
voltage drop).
The cable lengths shown in the diagram are for guidance only and may deviate corresponding to the
specific conditions.
In principle, attention must be paid to an EMC-compliant installation.
Additional information on operation on the frequency inverter, in particular information on the max.
permissible speed, the thermal design and the possible torques, can be found in the current NORD
motor catalogue M7000.
171 / 396
Pos : 34 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Betrieb am Freq uenz umrichter_02_Leistungsv erlus te gemäß EU 2019/1781 ( Öko-D esign- Ver ordnung) @ 89\m od_1655807898840_388.doc x @ 2918640 @ 5 @ 1
Power losses according to (EU) 2019/1781

Please find the “power losses expressed in percentage (%) of the rated output power (speed vs. torque)
according to (EU) 2019/1781” in the below overview.
Pos : 35 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Betrieb am Freq uenz umrichter_03_Leistungsv erlus te Tabelle - Kopf @ 89\m od_1655809872285_388.docx @ 2918679 @ @ 1
Motor type Relative losses

(Speed/torque)
Frequency 25/25 25/100 50/25 50/50 50/100 90/50 90/100
[Hz] [%] [%] [%] [%] [%] [%] [%]

Pos : 36 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/Hinw eis für spr achneutral e T abellen_Komma= Punkt_nur englisch! @ 87\m od_1649408206263_388.doc x @ 2901120 @ @ 1
Notice: A comma counts as a full stop and signifies a decimal place.

Pos : 37 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Betrieb am Freq uenz umrichter_04_Leistungsv erlus te Tabelle - W erte 1 @ 89\m od_1655810910077_0.docx @ 2918717 @ @ 1
63SP/4 50 20,1 41,3 21,8 26,1 42,9 30,0 47,0

63SP/4 60 16,6 32,6 17,8 23,3 34,7 27,7 40,6
63LP/4 50 18,3 38,1 19,6 23,5 38,5 26,9 41,2
63LP/4 60 18,6 31,4 20,0 23,0 33,0 27,0 36,8
71SP/4 50 9,6 24,7 12,1 15,1 27,3 20,4 33,2
71SP/4 60 9,2 19,6 12,1 14,5 23,2 21,4 30,4
71LP/4 50 9,4 27,8 12,0 15,5 29,3 20,6 34,2
71LP/4 60 9,0 20,9 11,9 14,5 24,5 21,0 31,5
80SP/4 50 5,4 19,4 6,6 9,1 20,0 11,3 21,8
80SP/4 60 5,0 14,3 6,2 8,1 15,4 11,0 18,6
80LP/4 50 4,0 17,2 4,9 7,2 17,3 9,2 19,0
80LP/4 60 3,7 12,3 4,7 6,4 13,2 8,9 15,9
90SP/4 50 2,5 9,9 4,5 6,2 14,0 8,1 16,0
90SP/4 60 3,2 10,1 4,3 5,7 11,1 8,3 13,8
90LP/4 50 3,2 16,7 4,0 6,1 15,8 7,6 16,9
90LP/4 60 2,9 11,4 3,8 5,3 11,8 7,3 13,9
100LP/4 APAB 50 2,6 10,4 3,5 4,7 10,8 6,9 13,3
100LP/4 APAB 60 2,4 7,9 3,7 4,4 9,3 7,1 11,7
100AP/4 APAB 50 2,0 11,4 2,9 4,4 11,7 6,0 13,5
100AP/4 APAB 60 1,8 7,9 2,6 3,5 8,6 5,8 10,9
172 / 396
Pos : 39 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Betrieb am Freq uenz umrichter_03_Leistungsv erlus te Tabelle - Kopf @ 89\m od_1655809872285_388.docx @ 2918679 @ @ 1
Motor type Relative losses

(Speed/torque)
Frequency 25/25 25/100 50/25 50/50 50/100 90/50 90/100
[Hz] [%] [%] [%] [%] [%] [%] [%]

Pos : 40 /Allgem ein/Allgem eing ültige M odul e/Hinw eis für spr achneutral e T abellen_Komma= Punkt_nur englisch! @ 87\m od_1649408206263_388.doc x @ 2901120 @ @ 1

Pos : 41 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Betrieb am Freq uenz umrichter_05_Leistungsv erlus te Tabelle - W erte 2 @ 89\m od_1655811315088_0.docx @ 2918755 @ @ 1
112MP/4 50 2,1 11,2 2,8 4,1 11,3 5,7 12,4

112MP/4 60 1,9 7,8 2,9 3,8 8,7 5,6 10,7
132SP/4 50 1,7 7,3 2,7 3,5 8,1 5,3 10,1
132SP/4 60 1,8 5,5 2,7 3,4 6,6 6,1 9,2
132MP/4 50 1,8 8,3 2,4 3,5 8,8 5,0 10,6
132MP/4 60 1,7 6,0 2,5 3,2 6,8 5,7 8,9
160SP/4 50 1,2 6,1 1,6 2,5 6,5 3,9 8,3
160SP/4 60 1,1 4,5 1,9 2,5 5,2 4,4 7,8
160MP/4 50 1,1 6,4 1,6 2,6 6,7 3,7 8,0
160MP/4 60 0,9 4,6 1,5 2,4 5,0 3,8 6,3
160LP/4 50 1,1 5,9 1,6 2,4 6,6 3,4 8,5
160LP/4 60 1,0 4,1 1,7 2,2 4,9 3,5 6,5
180MP/4 50 1,1 4,3 1,4 2,0 4,8 2,9 6,2
180MP/4 60 0,9 3,3 1,4 1,9 4,4 2,8 5,7
180LP/4 50 0,8 4,8 1,1 1,7 4,9 2,5 5,4
180LP/4 60 0,7 3,5 1,1 1,6 4,1 2,1 4,7
225RP/4 50 0,7 3,7 1,2 1,6 4,1 2,8 5,3
225RP/4 60 0,7 2,8 1,2 1,7 3,8 3,6 5,2
225SP/4 50 0,7 3,8 1,0 1,6 4,2 2,4 4,8
225SP/4 60 0,6 2,9 0,9 1,4 3,4 1,8 5,0
225MP/4 50 0,6 3,7 0,8 1,3 3,9 2,0 4,6
225MP/4 60 0,6 2,8 0,8 1,3 3,0 2,3 3,6
250WP/4 50 0,5 4,2 0,7 1,3 4,5 1,5 5,3
250WP/4 60 0,5 3,0 0,7 1,2 3,4 1,9 4,3
173 / 396
Pos : 43 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Ü berprüfung des Is olationswiderstandes @ 7\m od_1431353806825_388.doc x @ 217716 @ 3555 @ 1
1.3.9 Checking the insulation resistance

Prior to initial commissioning of the motor after a long period of storage or standstill (approx. 6 months)
the insulation resistance of the windings must be checked. During and immediately after the
measurements, the terminals have voltages which can be dangerous, and must not be touched.
Insulation resistance
The insulation resistance of new, cleaned, repaired windings against the housing and against each other
is > 200 MΩ.
Measurement
The insulation of the windings against the housing for operation voltages up to 400 V must be measured
with 500 V DC. For operating voltages up to 725 V the measurement must be made with 1000 V DC.
The temperature of the windings should be 25°C ± 15°C.
Testing
If the minimum insulation resistance of the winding against earth is less than 50 MΩ, this may be due to
moisture. The windings must then be dried.
The insulation resistance may reduce after long periods of operation. As long as the measured value
does not fall below the calculated value for the critical insulation resistance of < 50 MΩ, operation of the
motor may continue. If the value is less than this, the cause must be established and if necessary the
windings or parts of the windings must be repaired, cleaned or dried.
Pos : 44 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Inbetriebnahme @ 7\m od_1431354073795_388.docx @ 217747 @ 3 @ 1
1.3.10 Commissioning
Information Electromagnetic compatibility

NORD motors comply with the EU-Directive 2014/30/EU. Assembly or installation work must not cause
impermissible interference. Immunity from interference must still exist.
Production of interference: In cases of large differences of torque (e.g. when driving a piston
compressor) a non-sine wave motor current is induced, whose harmonics can cause an impermissible
effect on the mains and therefore impermissible production of interference.
With supply by frequency inverters, various strengths of interference are produced according to the
design of the frequency inverter (type, interference suppression, manufacturer). The EMC information
of the inverter manufacturer must be observed. If a shielded motor supply cable is recommended, the
shielding is most effective if a large area is electrically connected to the metal terminal box of the motor
(with metal EMC cable gland). With motors with integrated sensors (e.g. thermistors) interference
voltages due to the inverter may be produced in the sensor cables.
Interference immunity: For motors with integrated sensors (e.g. thermistors) the operator must ensure
adequate immunity to interference by the selection of a suitable sensor cable (possibly with screening,
with connection as for the motor supply cable) and evaluation device. The information and instructions
in the operating instructions for the inverter and all other instructions must be observed before
commissioning. After installation of the motor, it must be checked for correct functioning. In the case of
brake motors, the correct function of the brake must also be checked.
174 / 396
Pos : 45 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/1. Allgem eines/Ents orgung @ 7\m od_1431354230589_388.doc x @ 217778 @ 3 @ 1
1.3.11 Disposal
NOTICE Environmental damage

Incorrect disposal of the product may cause damage to the environment.
• Ensure correct disposal
• Comply with current local regulations
Content: aluminium, iron, electronic components, copper

Please observe the additional documentation for the attachments
Pos : 47 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/2. Instandhaltung, Wartung/!1! Ins tandhaltung und Wartung @ 7\m od_1431354436983_388.doc x @ 217809 @ 1 @ 1
175 / 396
2 Maintenance and servicing
Pos : 48 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/Gefahr - Elek trischer Schl ag - Motor en [B1091] @ 11\m od_1459952302755_388.docx @ 316085 @ @ 1
DANGER! Electric shock

The motor is operated with a dangerous voltage. Touching certain conducting components (connection terminals
and supply cables) will cause electric shock with possibly fatal consequences.
Even when the motor is at a standstill (e.g. due to the electronic block of a connected frequency inverter or a
jammed drive unit) the connection terminals and supply cables may carry a dangerous voltage. A motor standstill
is not identical to electrical isolation from the mains.
Even if the drive unit has been disconnected from the mains, a connected motor may rotate and possibly generate
a dangerous voltage.
Installation and work must only be carried out when the motor is at a standstill and is disconnected (all phases
disconnected from the mains).
Follow the 5 Safety Rules (1. Switch off the power, 2. Secure against switching on, 3. Check for no voltage, 4.
Earthing and short circuiting, 5. Cover or fence off neighbouring live components).
Pos : 49 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/W arnung - Beweg ung - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\mod_1459953068537_388.docx @ 316120 @ @ 1
WARNING Injury due to movement

Under certain conditions (e.g. switching on the power supply, releasing a holding brake) the motor may start to
move. The machinery which it drives (press / chain hoist / roller / fan etc.) may then make an unexpected
movement. This may cause various injuries, including to third parties.
Before switching on, secure the danger area by warning and removing all persons from the danger area.
Pos : 50 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/2. Instandhaltung, Wartung/Sic herheitsm aßnahmen @ 7\mod_1431354500198_388.docx @ 217840 @ 2 @ 1
2.1 Safety measures

Before starting any work on the motor or the device, but especially before opening the covers of active
components, the motor must be isolated according to regulations. In addition to the main power circuits,
any additional or auxiliary circuits must be taken into account.
The usual "5 Safety Rules" e.g. according to DIN VDE 0105 are:
• Disconnect
• Secure to prevent reactivation
• Check for no voltage on all poles
• Earth and short circuit
• Cover or cordon off adjacent live components
These measures may only be removed when the maintenance work is complete.
Motors must be properly inspected at regular intervals; current national standards and regulations must
be complied with. In particular, special attention must be paid to any mechanical damage, free path of
the cooling air, abnormal noises and correct electrical connection.
Only original parts may be used as spare parts with the exception of standardised, commercially
available and equivalent parts.
Swapping parts between motors of the same type is not permissible.
Information Condensation outlets

If the motors are designed with closed condensation outlets, these must be opened occasionally in order to allow
any accumulated condensation to drain off. Condensation outlets must always be located at the lowest point of
the motor. During installation of the motor care must be taken that the condensation outlets point downwards
and are closed. Open condensation outlets cause a reduction of the protection class.
176 / 396
Pos : 51 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/2. Instandhaltung, Wartung/Lagerw echselfris ten @ 78\mod_1629902030594_388.docx @ 2817445 @ 2 @ 1
2.2 Bearing replacement periods

Under normal operating conditions, with horizontal motor installation, the bearing replacement period in
operating hours [h] for IEC motors is the following depending on the listed coolant temperature and
motor speeds:
25°C 40°C 60°C
to 1.800 rpm approx. 40,000 h approx. 20,000 h approx. 8,000 h
to 3,600 rpm approx. 20,000 h approx. 10,000 h approx. 4,000 h
In case of direct mounting of the gear units or special operating conditions, for example vertical motor
installation, high vibration and impact loads, frequent reversing operation, etc., the above-mentioned
operating hours can be significantly reduced. The ball bearings are lifelong lubricated.
177 / 396
Pos : 53 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/2. Instandhaltung, Wartung/Wartungsintervall e @ 78\m od_1629902151779_388.docx @ 2817483 @ 2 @ 1
2.3 Maintenance intervals

The motor must be checked for unusual running noises and/or vibrations once a week or every
100 hours of operation.
Please check the roller bearings at a minimum interval of 10,000 h and replace them if necessary. The
interval may be shorter depending on the operating conditions.
NOTICE
Bearing damage during inverter operation
During inverter operation, bearing currents can occur under unfavourable conditions, which lead to
damage of the bearings. Damaging bearing currents can be prevented by appropriate technical
measures.
• The effective value of the shaft voltage should not exceed 250 mV.
If necessary, please contact NORD service.
Also check the electrical connections, cables, strands and fans for strength and damages. Check the
function of the insulation system.
Replace the radial shaft seals every 10,000 h.
There must be no dust deposits on the motor’s surface that may impair cooling.
The motor must be completely overhauled at intervals of five years.
Pos : 54 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/2. Instandhaltung, Wartung/Gener alüber hol ung @ 67\mod_1613485340299_388.docx @ 2738745 @ 2 @ 1
2.4 General overhaul

The motor must be completely disassembled. The following work must be carried out:
• Clean all motor components
• Examine all motor components for damages
• Replace all damaged components
• Replace all roller bearings
• Replace all seals and radial shaft seals
• Perform a winding insulation resistance measurement
The general overhaul must be carried out by qualified personnel in a specialist workshop with
appropriate equipment. We urgently recommend that the general overhaul is carried out by the NORD
Service department.
If the drive unit is used in special ambient conditions, the above-mentioned intervals may be significantly
shorter.
Pos : 56 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/!1! ATEX - Ex plosi onsgefährdete Umgebung @ 7\mod_1431355541868_388.docx @ 217964 @ 1 @ 1
178 / 396
3 ATEX Explosion hazard areas
Pos : 57 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/!2! M otoren der Zündschutzart Er höhte Sicherheit Ex eb_01 [EXE] @ 7\m od_1431409396334_388.doc x @ 217998 @ 2 @ 1
3.1 Motors with increased ignition protection, type Ex eb

Pos : 58 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/GEF AHR _AT EX - Expl osionsgefahr Elek tischer Sc hlag - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\m od_1460010132024_388.docx @ 316266 @ @ 1
DANGER! Explosion hazard

All work must only be carried out with the machine at a standstill and the power to the system
switched off.
Higher temperatures than the maximum permitted surface temperature of the housing may
be present inside the motor. The motor must therefore never be opened in an explosive
atmosphere!
Failure to comply with this may result in the ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 59 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/W ARNUNG_ATEX_Ex plosi onsgefahr-T hermisc h - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\mod_1460010112266_388.docx @ 316231 @ @ 1
WARNING Explosion hazard

Excessively heavy dust deposits must be avoided, as these impair the cooling of the device!
Impairment or obstruction of the flow of cooling air, for example due to partial or large area
coverage of the fan cover or the entry of foreign bodies fall into the fan must be avoided in
order to ensure adequate cooling.
Only cable glands and reducers which are approved for use in explosion hazard areas may
be used.
All cable glands which are not used must be closed with blind screw plugs which are approved
for potentially explosive areas.
Only the original seals may be used.
Failure to comply increases the risk of ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 60 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/!2! M otoren der Zündschutzart Er höhte Sicherheit Ex eb_02 [EXE] @ 72\mod_1619623136952_388.docx @ 2772200 @ @ 1
For these motors, the following information specifically or complimentarily apply.

The motors are suitable for use in zone 1 and correspond to device group II, category 2G and may be
used at an ambient temperature from -20 °C to +40 °C.
Type suffix: 2G e.g.: 80 L/4 2G TF

Labelling: II 2G Ex eb IIC T3 Gb
0102
NOTICE
Motor attachments
Explosion-protected electric motors are often delivered with attached components and devices, such
as a gear unit or a brake.
• In addition to the labelling of the motor, observe any labelling on the attached components and
devices. Consider any resulting restrictions for the entire drive.
Explosive gas mixtures or dust concentrations may cause severe or fatal injuries in combination with
hot, electrically live and moving components of electrical machines.
179 / 396
The increased danger in explosion hazard areas requires especially strict observance of the general
safety and commissioning information. It is necessary that the persons responsible are qualified
according to national and local regulations.
Explosion protected electrical machines with ignition protection class Ex eb correspond to the standard
series EN 60034 (VDE 0530), as well as EN IEC 60079-0:2018 and EN IEC 60079-7:2015/A1:2018.
The degree of explosion hazards determines zone division. DIN EN 60079, Part 10 provides information
about this. The operator is responsible for the zone division. The use of motors which are not certified
for explosion hazard areas is prohibited in explosion hazard areas.
Pos : 61 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Leitungs einführung [Ex e, Ex n] @ 66\mod_1613047148339_388.docx @ 2734889 @ 3 @ 1
3.1.1 Cable glands

The cable glands must be approved for explosion hazard areas. Unused openings must be sealed with
approved blind plugs. When connecting the installation cables, the connections at the motor terminals
and the ground cable with U-shaped cables must be placed below the respective terminals so that the
clamping bracket and the clamping bolt are evenly loaded and are not deformed. As an alternative, the
connections may be designed with a cable lug. If the cables are subject to increased thermal
requirements, this information can be found listed on a label on the motor.
For sizes 63 to 132, an isolated cable lug must be provided, if it is used to connect the earthing cable
within the terminal box.
The nuts of the terminal board bolts must be tightened according to the following table.
Tightening torques for terminal board connections
Thread diameter M4 M5 M6 M8
Tightening torque (Nm) 1.2 2.0 3.0 6.0
The use of aluminium connection cables is not permitted.

Pos : 62 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Kabelv ersc hraubung en_1 [EXE] @ 7\m od_1431424689140_388.docx @ 218735 @ 3 @ 1
3.1.2 Cable connections

All motors with ignition protection class Ex eb are delivered with a certified cable gland.
Pos : 63 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Kabelv ersc hraubung en_2 [EXE, EXN] @ 51\mod_1601389456113_388.docx @ 2675215 @ @ 1
If the provided cable gland is used, cables with circular cable cross-section must be used. The cable
gland's lock nuts must be tightened with a torque according to the following table.
Tightening torques for lock nut
Cable gland M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M32x1.5 M40x1.5
Pos : 64 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Kabelv ersc hraubung en_3 [EXE] @ 64\m od_1612261712307_388.doc x @ 2727088 @ @ 1
Use of reduction adapters according to Directive 2014/34/EU and/or cable glands with ignition protection
class Ex eb is permissible. For this, a minimum certified temperature of 80°C is necessary.
When connecting, care must be taken that the permissible air gaps of at least 10 mm and the permissible
leakage tracks of at least12 mm between the electrically live components and components with the
same potential as the housing, or between live components are maintained.
Check that the terminal nuts and the screw for the earth lead are tight before closing the terminal box.
The terminal box seals and the seals of the cable glands must be correctly seated and must not be
damaged.
180 / 396
Pos : 66 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Kl emmenk astendeck eldic htung [EXE, EXN, Zone21+22, Clas s I und II Div.2] @ 7\m od_1431427943472_388.doc x @ 218892 @ 3 @ 1
3.1.3 Terminal box cover seals

The terminal box cover gasket is captively mounted on the terminal box cover. Please only use an
original seal when replacing the seal.
If the terminal box is opened during installation, maintenance, repair, troubleshooting or overhaul, the
terminal box cover must be re-fitted after the work is complete. There must be no dirt on the surface of
the seal or the sealing surface of the terminal box frame.
The screws for the terminal box cover must be tightened with a torque according to the list below.
Tightening torques for terminal box cover screws
Tightening torque (Nm) 0.8 - 1.2 1.2 - 1.8 1.5 - 2.5 3.0 – 5.0
Pos : 67 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Motorlag e – Bes onderheiten [EXE, EXN , Z one21+ 22, Cl ass I Div.2] @ 78\mod_1629902592793_388.docx @ 2817521 @ 3 @ 1
3.1.4 Motor position – special features IM V3, IM V6

If the end of the shaft faces upwards, e.g. version IM V3, IM V6, a cover must be provided by the
operator / installer, which prevents foreign bodies from falling into the fan cover of the motor (see
EN IEC 60079-0:2018). This must not obstruct the fan from cooling the motor. If the end of the shaft
faces downwards (AS, inclination 20° to 90°), e.g. versions IM V1, IM V5, the motors are to be used with
a protective cover on the fan cover. For an inclination of less than 20°, an appropriate protective device,
which meets the above mentioned conditions, must be provided by the operator / installer.
A hand wheel on the second shaft end is not permitted.
181 / 396
Pos : 68 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Weitere Betriebs bedi ngunge [EXE, EXN] @ 7\m od_1431428217184_388.docx @ 218956 @ 3 @ 1
3.1.5 Further operating conditions

The motors are designed for continuous operation and normal, non recurring starting, in which no
significant starting heat occurs.
Range A in EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530 Part 1) - Voltage ± 5%, Frequency ± 2%, curve form, mains
symmetry - must be complied with so that the development of heat remains within the permissible limits.
Any major deviations from the rated values can cause an impermissible increase in the development of
heat in the motor.
The motor temperature class stated on the type plate must at least conform to the temperature class of
any combustible gas that may occur.
Pos : 69 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Weitere Betriebs bedi ngunge [EXE, EXN]_02 @ 78\mod_1629902781905_388.docx @ 2817559 @ @ 1
When operated on a frequency inverter, damaging bearing currents must be ruled out. This could be
caused by excessively high shaft voltages.
If the effective value of the shaft voltage (RMS) exceeds 250 mV, permissible technical measures must
be taken. If necessary, please contact the NORD service. Please also pay attention to the relevant PTB
data sheets. In addition to further information, details on the permissible frequency characteristic curves
can be found here.
Pos : 70 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Sc hutz einric htung en_1 [EXE] @ 66\mod_1613047373844_388.docx @ 2734927 @ 3 @ 1
3.1.6 Protective devices

Each machine must be protected against impermissible heating during all phases by a current-
dependent and delayed circuit breaker with phase failure protection according to VDE 0660, functionally
tested by a notified body, or by an equivalent effective device. The protective device must be set to the
rated current. For windings with a delta circuit, the triggers are connected in series with the phase
windings and set to 0.58-x the rated current. If this circuit is not possible, additional protection measures
are required (e.g. thermal protection of the machine).
In case of a blocked rotor, the protective device must switch off within the E time specified for the
respective temperature class.
Electrical machines for heavy starting (acceleration time > 1,7 x tE time) must be protected by a start
monitoring device as specified in the EU type-examination certificate.
Thermal protection of the machine by means of direct temperature monitoring of the windings with a
PTC resistor temperature sensor is permitted, if this is certified and stated on the rating plate.
Do not apply voltages higher than 30 V to the PTC resistor temperature sensors!
For sole protection by PTC resistor temperature sensors, a functionally tested and certified PTC
triggering device of a notified body must be used. The PTC triggering device must have the following
protection class labelling:
II (2) G
182 / 396
Pos : 71 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Sc hutz einric htung en_3 - Hinw eis e z um M otorschutz [EXE] @ 7\m od_1431412228873_388.doc x @ 218132 @ 5 @ 1
Information for motor protection

Type plate example: Type plate example:
No sole means of protection via temperature sensor Sole protection via temperature sensor
Notice! Danger! If the time tA is not stated on the A thermistor is permissible as the sole
type plate, the thermistor is not permissible as the sole
means of protection
It is essential that the motor is protected with a
motor protection relay which has been approved
by a testing facility. The motor protection relay must
be approved for the ignition protection class which is
stated on the motor.
Pos : 72 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Betrieb am Fr equenz umrichter [EXE] @ 7\mod_1431425436223_388.docx @ 218798 @ 3 @ 1
3.1.7 Operation with frequency inverter

Operation with a frequency inverter must be explicitly certified. The separate manufacturer's information
must be observed. The EMC Directive must be complied with.
183 / 396
Pos : 74 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Reparaturen [EXE, EXN] @ 7\m od_1431422270100_388.docx @ 218512 @ 3 @ 1
3.1.8 Repairs
Repairs must be carried out by Getriebebau NORD or by an officially recognised expert. The work must
be indicated with an additional repair plate. With the exception of standard, commercially available and
equivalent components, only original spare parts (see spare parts list) may be used. The particularly
applies for seals and connecting components.
For motors with closed condensation outlets, the threads of the closing screws must be coated with
Loctite 242 or Loxeal 82-21 after the condensation has been drained. The closing screws must be re-
inserted immediately. The electrical connections must be checked at regular intervals.
Check that the connection terminals, and the electrical bonding terminal are firmly fastened. Check that
the cable gland and the terminal box gasket are in good condition
All work on electrical machinery must be performed when the machine is at a standstill and with all poles
disconnected from the mains.
The motor must be removed for any measurement of the insulation resistance. The measurement must
not be performed in the explosion hazard area. As soon as measurement has been completed,
discharge the connecting terminals again immediately by shorting them in order to prevent any spark
discharges occurring in the explosive area.
Pos : 75 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/GEF AHR _AT EX - Is olationsm ess ung - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\mod_1460013200941_388.docx @ 316406 @ @ 1

Insulation measurements may cause sparks and therefore ignition of an explosive
atmosphere.
• Only perform insulation measurements outside of an explosive atmosphere.
• Discharge the connection terminals by short circuiting them after the measurement and
before returning to an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 76 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Lacki erung [EXE, EXN, Z one21+ 22] @ 67\mod_1613486826666_388.docx @ 2738934 @ 3 @ 1
3.1.9 Painting
The motors are equipped with a suitable, electrostatically tested painting ex-works. Subsequent painting
may only be carried out in consultation with Getriebebau NORD or a repair workshop approved for the
repair of explosion-protected electric motors. The valid standards and regulations must be observed.
184 / 396
Pos : 78 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Ty pensc hild N ORD Ex eb- M otoren nach EN 60079 [EXE] @ 72\m od_1619623980393_388.doc x @ 2772275 @ 3 @ 1
3.1.10 Name plate of NORD Ex eb motors according to EN IEC 60079-0:2018

1 Data matrix code
2 Code number of notified body
3 Number of phases
4 Type designation
5 Order number/motor number
6 Year of manufacture
7 Thermal class of insulation system
8 IP protection class
9 Operating mode
10 Standard specifications
11 Nominal frequency
12 Nominal voltage
13 Permissible voltage range
14 EU type-examination certificate number
15 Power factor
16 Speed
17 Explosion protection marking
18 Locked-rotor current/nominal current
19 tE times
20 Note: TMS when indicating the tA time with
only PTC triggering device according to:
II (2)G PTC DIN 44082
21 Notice! Pay attention to operating instructions

B1091.
22 Nominal power (mechanical shaft power)
23 Nominal current
24 Individual serial number
25 Efficiency
Pos : 79 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Ty pensc hild N ORD Ex _- Motor en_Ergänz ung [EXE, EXN , EX - FU-Betrieb EX tb, tc] @ 11\mod_1460031690739_388.docx @ 316441 @ @ 1
Before commissioning, the type plate must be compared with the requirements of the aforementioned
declaration, which result from the local regulations and operating conditions.
Pos : 80 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Ty pensc hild N ORD Ex _- Motor en - Erkl ärung der N ormenangabe [EXE, EXN] @ 7\m od_1431426076094_388.doc x @ 218829 @ 5 @ 1
Explanation of standard specification in rating plate
EN 60034 (H), (A)/ EN 60079

Used range of standards for explosion protection
(Please pay attention to conformity declaration.)
Voltage range A in accordance with EN 60034-1
Half key balancing in accordance with EN 60034-14
Product standard
Pos : 81 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Angew andte N ormenstände [EXE, EXN] @ 72\m od_1619624161278_388.doc x @ 2772313 @ 3 @ 1
3.1.11 Applied standard versions

EN standard Edition IEC standard Edition
EN 60034-7 2001-12 IEC 60034-7 1992+ A1:2000
EN 60034-6 1996-08 IEC 60034-6 1991-09
EN 60079-0 2018 IEC 60079-0 2017
EN 60079-7/A1 2015 /A1: 2018 IEC 60079-7/A1 2015/ 2017
EN 60529 2014-09 IEC 60529 1989/AMD2:2013/COR1:2019
185 / 396
Pos : 83 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/!2! M otoren der Zündschutzart Non Sparking Ex ec _01 [EXN] @ 7\m od_1431419417638_388.doc x @ 218225 @ 2 @ 1
3.2 Motors with ignition protection class Non Sparking Ex ec

Pos : 84 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/GEF AHR _AT EX - Expl osionsgefahr Elek tischer Sc hlag - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\m od_1460010132024_388.docx @ 316266 @ @ 1

switched off.
atmosphere!
Pos : 85 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/W ARNUNG_ATEX_Ex plosi onsgefahr-T hermisc h - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\mod_1460010112266_388.docx @ 316231 @ @ 1

be used.
Pos : 86 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/!2! M otoren der Zündschutzart Non Sparking Ex ec _02 [EXN] @ 72\mod_1619624749268_388.docx @ 2772351 @ @ 1

The motors are suitable for use in zone 2 and correspond to device group II, category 3G and may be
used at an ambient temperature from -20 °C to +40 °C.
Type suffix: 3G e.g.: 80 L/4 3G TF

Labelling: II 3G Ex ec IIC T3 Gc With indication of the temperature
class
NOTICE
Motor attachments
Explosive gas mixtures or dust concentrations may cause severe or fatal injuries in combination with
hot, electrically live and moving components of electrical machines.
safety and commissioning information. It is essential that the persons responsible are qualified according
national and local regulations.
Explosion protected electrical machines with ignition protection class Ex n correspond to the standard
series EN 60034 (VDE 0530), as well as IEC 60079-0:2018 and EN IEC 60079-7:2015/A1:2018. The
degree of explosion hazards determines zone division. DIN EN 60079, Part 10 provides information
about this. The operator is responsible for the zone division. The use of motors which are not certified
for explosion hazard areas is prohibited in explosion hazard areas.
186 / 396
Pos : 87 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Leitungs einführung [Ex e, Ex n] @ 66\mod_1613047148339_388.docx @ 2734889 @ 3 @ 1
3.2.1 Cable glands

The cable glands must be approved for explosion hazard areas. Unused openings must be sealed with
approved blind plugs. When connecting the installation cables, the connections at the motor terminals
and the ground cable with U-shaped cables must be placed below the respective terminals so that the
clamping bracket and the clamping bolt are evenly loaded and are not deformed. As an alternative, the
connections may be designed with a cable lug. If the cables are subject to increased thermal
requirements, this information can be found listed on a label on the motor.
The nuts of the terminal board bolts must be tightened according to the following table.
The use of aluminium connection cables is not permitted.

Pos : 88 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Kabelv ersc hraubung en_1 [EXN , Cl ass I und II Div.2] @ 7\m od_1431424754843_388.docx @ 218766 @ 3 @ 1

If the provided cable gland is used, cables with circular cable cross-section must be used. The cable
gland's lock nuts must be tightened with a torque according to the following table.
Cable gland M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M32x1.5 M40x1.5
Pos : 90 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Kabelv ersc hraubung en_3 [EXN ] @ 64\m od_1611927350626_388.docx @ 2726170 @ @ 1
Use of reduction adapters according to Directive 2014/34/EU and/or cable glands with ignition protection
class Ex ec is permissible. For this, a minimum certified temperature of 80°C is necessary.
leakage tracks of at least12 mm between the electrically live components and components with the
The terminal box seals and the seals of the cable glands must be correctly seated and must not be
damaged.
187 / 396
Pos : 92 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Kl emmenk astendeck eldic htung [EXE, EXN, Zone21+22, Clas s I und II Div.2] @ 7\m od_1431427943472_388.doc x @ 218892 @ 3 @ 1

Pos : 93 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Motorlag e – Bes onderheiten [EXE, EXN , Z one21+ 22, Cl ass I Div.2] @ 78\mod_1629902592793_388.docx @ 2817521 @ 3 @ 1

188 / 396
Pos : 94 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Weitere Betriebs bedi ngunge [EXE, EXN] @ 7\m od_1431428217184_388.docx @ 218956 @ 3 @ 1

The motors are designed for continuous operation and normal, non recurring starting, in which no
significant starting heat occurs.
Range A in EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530 Part 1) - Voltage ± 5%, Frequency ± 2%, curve form, mains
symmetry - must be complied with so that the development of heat remains within the permissible limits.
Any major deviations from the rated values can cause an impermissible increase in the development of
heat in the motor.
The motor temperature class stated on the type plate must at least conform to the temperature class of
any combustible gas that may occur.
Pos : 95 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Weitere Betriebs bedi ngunge [EXE, EXN]_02 @ 78\mod_1629902781905_388.docx @ 2817559 @ @ 1
When operated on a frequency inverter, damaging bearing currents must be ruled out. This could be
caused by excessively high shaft voltages.
If the effective value of the shaft voltage (RMS) exceeds 250 mV, permissible technical measures must
be taken. If necessary, please contact the NORD service. Please also pay attention to the relevant PTB
data sheets. In addition to further information, details on the permissible frequency characteristic curves
can be found here.
Pos : 96 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Sc hutz einric htung en_1 [EXN ] @ 7\mod_1431421520250_388.docx @ 218417 @ 3 @ 1
3.2.6 Protective devices

Protective devices must be adjusted to the rated current. For windings with a delta circuit, the triggers
are connected in series with the windings and adjusted to 0.58x the rated current.
Alternatively, the motors can be protected with thermistor temperature sensors. Protection with
thermistor temperature sensors is mandatory for inverter operation.
Do not apply voltages greater than 30 V to the thermistor temperature sensor.
We recommend the use of a functionally tested, certified PTC trigger device for protection with a
thermistor temperature sensor.
Pos : 97 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Sc hutz einric htung en_2 [EXE, EXN] @ 7\mod_1431421395276_388.docx @ 218385 @ @ 1
The following standards must be observed for the installation of electrical systems in explosion
hazard areas in Germany: DIN EN 60079-14 (VDE 0165-1), the Technical Rules for Operating
Safety (TRBS), the Operating Safety Regulations (BetrSichV), the Hazardous Substances
Regulation (GefStoffV) as well as the Explosion Protection Regulations (Ex-RL). Other
regulations must be observed if applicable. The applicable national regulation must be observed
outside of Germany.
Pos : 98 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/3. AT EX/Reparaturen [EXE, EXN] @ 7\m od_1431422270100_388.docx @ 218512 @ 3 @ 1
3.2.7 Repairs
equivalent components, only original spare parts (see spare parts list) may be used. The particularly
applies for seals and connecting components.
For motors with closed condensation outlets, the threads of the closing screws must be coated with
Loctite 242 or Loxeal 82-21 after the condensation has been drained. The closing screws must be re-
inserted immediately. The electrical connections must be checked at regular intervals.
Check that the connection terminals, and the electrical bonding terminal are firmly fastened. Check that
the cable gland and the terminal box gasket are in good condition
The motor must be removed for any measurement of the insulation resistance. The measurement must
not be performed in the explosion hazard area. As soon as measurement has been completed,
189 / 396
discharge the connecting terminals again immediately by shorting them in order to prevent any spark
discharges occurring in the explosive area.
Pos : 99 /Anl eitungen/M otoren/B1091 Drehstromm otoren/Sic her heitshi nweis e/GEF AHR _AT EX - Is olationsm ess ung - M otoren [B1091] @ 11\mod_1460013200941_388.docx @ 316406 @ @ 1

Insulation measurements may cause sparks and therefore ignition of an explosive
atmosphere.
• Only perform insulation measurements outside of an explosive atmosphere.
• Discharge the connection terminals by short circuiting them after the measurement and
before returning to an explosive atmosphere.
Pos : 100 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Lackier ung [EXE, EXN, Z one21+ 22] @ 67\m od_1613486826666_388.docx @ 2738934 @ 3 @ 1
3.2.8 Painting
190 / 396
Pos : 102 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/T ypenschil d N ORD Ex ec- Motor en nac h EN 60079 [EXN] @ 72\m od_1619625291614_388.doc x @ 2772388 @ 3 @ 1
3.2.9 Type plate for NORD Ex ec motors according to EN IEC 60079-0:2018

1 Data matrix code
3 Number of phases
4 Type designation
9 Operating mode
11 Nominal frequency
12 Nominal voltage
13 Permissible voltage range
15 Power factor
16 Speed
18 Locked-rotor current/nominal current
21 Notice! Pay attention to operating instructions

B1091.
23 Nominal current
25 Efficiency
Pos : 103 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/T ypenschil d N ORD Ex_- M otoren_Ergänz ung [EXE, EXN, EX - FU- Betrieb EX tb, tc ] @ 11\m od_1460031690739_388.docx @ 316441 @ @ 1
Pos : 104 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/T ypenschil d N ORD Ex_- M otoren - Erklär ung der Norm enangabe [EXE, EXN ] @ 7\mod_1431426076094_388.docx @ 218829 @ 5 @ 1
Explanation of standard specification in rating plate
EN 60034 (H), (A)/ EN 60079

Used range of standards for explosion protection
(Please pay attention to conformity declaration.)
Voltage range A in accordance with EN 60034-1
Half key balancing in accordance with EN 60034-14
Product standard
Pos : 105 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Ang ewandte N ormenstände [EXE, EXN] @ 72\mod_1619624161278_388.docx @ 2772313 @ 3 @ 1
3.2.10 Applied standard versions

EN standard Edition IEC standard Edition
EN 60034-7 2001-12 IEC 60034-7 1992+ A1:2000
EN 60034-6 1996-08 IEC 60034-6 1991-09
EN 60079-0 2018 IEC 60079-0 2017
EN 60079-7/A1 2015 /A1: 2018 IEC 60079-7/A1 2015/ 2017
EN 60529 2014-09 IEC 60529 1989/AMD2:2013/COR1:2019
191 / 396
Pos : 107 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Motor en für den Eins atz in der Z one 21 und Z one 22 nac h EN 60079- 0 s owie IEC 60079_01 [Zon21+ 22] @ 67\m od_1613485501018_388.docx @ 2738783 @ 2 @ 1
3.3 Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22 according to EN 60079 and
IEC 60079
Pos : 108 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/Sicherheits hinw eis e/GEF AHR_ATEX - Ex plosi onsgefahr El ektisc her Schl ag - Motor en [B1091] @ 11\m od_1460010132024_388.doc x @ 316266 @ @ 1

switched off.
atmosphere!
Pos : 109 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/Sicherheits hinw eis e/WARNUN G_AT EX_Expl osionsg efahr-Thermisc h - M otor en [B1091] @ 11\m od_1460010112266_388.docx @ 316231 @ @ 1

be used.
Pos : 110 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Motor en für den Eins atz in der Z one 21 und Z one 22 nac h EN 60079- 0 s owie IEC 60079_02 [Zon21+ 22] @ 83\m od_1638957466222_388.docx @ 2849978 @ @ 1

Motors which comply with EN 60079 and IEC 60079 are suitable according to their labelling for use in
zone 21 or zone 22 - non-conductive dust.
Type suffix:
According to Zone 21 2D e.g.: 80 L/4 2D TF
EN 60079
Zone 22 3D e.g.: 80 L/4 3D TF
According to Zone 21 EPL Db e.g.: 80 L/4 IDB TF
IEC 60079
Zone 22 EPL Dc e.g.: 80 L/4 IDC TF
Labelling:
According to II 2D Ex tb IIIC T125°C Db For category 2 (zone 21)1)
IEC 60079 and
2014/34 EU 0102
II 3D Ex tc IIIB T125°C Dc For category 3 (zone 22 –
non-conducting dust)1)
According to EX tb IIIC T125°C Db For category 2 1)

IEC 60079
Ex tc IIIB T125°C Dc For category 3 (zone 22 –
non-conducting dust)1)
1) The indicated surface temperature may deviate from 125 °C and can be found on the name plate.
192 / 396
NOTICE
Motor attachments
DANGER Explosion hazard

The increased danger in areas with flammable dust requires the strict consideration of the
general safety and commissioning information. Explosive concentrations of dust may cause
explosions if ignited by hot or sparking objects. Such explosions may cause serious or fatal
injuries to persons or severe material damage.
It is essential that the persons responsible are qualified according to the national and local
regulations.
Pos : 111 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Inbetriebnahmehinw eis e / Anwendungsbereic h [Zone 21+ 22] @ 66\m od_1613047574635_388.docx @ 2735003 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.1 Commissioning information / Application area

If the motors are to be suitable for inverter operation, this must be indicated when placing the order. The
additional operating instructions B1091-1 must be observed. The motors must be protected against
overheating with suitable monitoring devices! The dust deposit must not be thicker than 5 mm. The
motors are designed for voltage and frequency range B of EN 60034, part 1.
Exception: The motors of sizes 132MA/4 2D, 132MA/4 3D, 132LH/4 2D and 132LH/4 3D correspond to
voltage and frequency range A.
Motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22 with TF labelling may be thermally monitored – as sole protection
– via the installed PTC in combination with a suitable triggering device.
Electrical equipment for use in areas with flammable dust comply with the DIN EN 60079-0, IEC 60079-
0, EN 60079-31, IEC 60079-31, DIN EN 60034 and IEC 60034 standards.
The standard’s valid version can be found in the EU Declaration of Conformity or in the IECEx CoC. The
degree of explosion hazards determines zone division. The operator/employer is responsible for zone
division (in Europe: RL 1999/92/EC).
If an X has been added to the certificate, special requirements must be observed in the EU type-
examination certificate, the IECEX CoC and/or the documentation to be considered. It is prohibited to
use standard motors that are not certified for explosion hazard areas in explosion hazard areas.
193 / 396
Pos : 112 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Klemm enkas tendec kel dichtung [EXE, EXN, Z one21+22, Cl ass I und II Div .2] @ 7\mod_1431427943472_388.docx @ 218892 @ 3 @ 1

Pos : 113 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Elektrischer Anschl uss [Zone21+ 22 + Clas s I und II Div.2] @ 7\m od_1431433133025_388.doc x @ 219085 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.3 Electrical Connection

The electrical connections of the terminal board are protected against twisting. The voltage supply to
the terminal board must be made by means of suitable ring terminals. The ring terminals are installed
between the two brass washers below the lock washer. The nuts must be tightened with a torque
according to the table below. The contact pressure is permanently maintained by means of the specified
torque and the lock washer. In addition, twisting of the ring terminals of the voltage supply is prevented.
The connection elements are corrosion-proof.
Tightening torque (Nm) 0,8 - 1,2 1,8 - 2,5 2,7 - 4,0 5,5 - 8,0
Exploded diagram of electrical connection
Cable lug provided by Brass nut

customer Lock washer
Brass washer
Brass nut
Ring terminal
Brass thread with collar
Mechanical protection against twisting
194 / 396
Pos : 114 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Kabel- und Leitungsei nführ ungen [Zone21+22] @ 67\m od_1613486509122_388.docx @ 2738858 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.4 Cable glands

Cable glands must be approved for explosion hazard areas of Zone 21 (protection class: at least IP66)
and be secured against self-loosening. Unused openings must be sealed with approved plugs
(protection class: at least IP66).
For Zone 22, cable glands according to EN 60079-0 and IEC 60079-0 must comply with at least one
protection class that is indicated on the name plate. Unused openings must be sealed with blind plugs
that comply with at least the motor protection class as well as with the requirements according to
EN 60079-0 and IEC 60079-0. The cable and blind plugs must be suitable for temperatures of at least
80°C.
In order to connect cables or carry out other works, the motor must not be opened in explosive
atmospheres. The voltage must always be switched off and secured against switch-on before opening.
The motors are equipped with threads for cable glands according to the following overview.
Assignment of cable gland to motor size
Standard motor cable glands Braking motor cable glands
Type Quantity Threads Quantity Threads Quantity Threads Quantity Threads Quantity Threads Quantity Threads
63 2 M20x1.5 4 M20x1.5 2 M12x1.5
71 2 M20x1.5 4 M20x1.5 2 M12x1.5
80 2 M25x1.5 4 M25x1.5 2 M12x1.5
90 2 M25x1.5 4 M25x1.5 2 M12x1.5
100 2 M32x1.5 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5
112 2 M32x1.5 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5
132 2 M32x1.5 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
160/ 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
180/..X
180/ 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
200/..X
225 2 M50x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 2 M50x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
250 WP 2 M63x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 2 M63x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
If the motor is supplied with a certified cable

gland, the cable gland's lock nuts must be
tightened with a torque according to the
following table.
Cable entry

Cable gland M20x1.5 M25x1.5 M32x1.5 M40x1.5 M50x1.5 M63x1.5
Tightening torque (Nm) 3.0 6.0 12.0 14.0 20.0 25.0
Pos : 115 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Z ul ässiger Umgebungstem per aturbereic h [Z one21+22] @ 67\mod_1613486622150_388.docx @ 2738896 @ 3 @ 1
195 / 396
3.3.5 Permissible ambient temperature range
For all motors, the permissible ambient temperature range is -20°C...+40°C. For IE1/IE2 motors for
operation in Zones 21 and 22, an extended ambient temperature range from -20°C...+60°C is
permissible. In this case, the rated power must be reduced to 72% of the value stated in the catalogue.
If the maximum ambient temperature is between +40°C and +60°C, the power output should be inversely
linearly interpolated between 100% and 72%. Thermal motor protection by PTC resistor temperature
sensors is mandatory. The motor connection cables and the cable glands must be suitable for
temperatures of at least 80°C.
The extended ambient temperature range does not apply for optional attachments such as a brake, an
encoder and/or an external fan. Contact the manufacturer in case of doubt with regard to permissibility!
3.3.6 Painting
Pos : 117 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/IEC- B14-Motor en [Z one21+ 22, Clas s II Div.2] @ 7\m od_1431436005842_388.docx @ 219211 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.7 IEC-B14 motors

Please comply with the information in Section 1.3.2. Otherwise, explosion protection is not ensured.
Pos : 118 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/M otorlage – Bes onderheiten [EXE, EXN, Zone21+22, Clas s I Div.2] @ 78\mod_1629902592793_388.docx @ 2817521 @ 3 @ 1

196 / 396
Pos : 119 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/W eitere Betriebs beding unge [Z one21 +22] @ 67\mod_1613486927413_388.docx @ 2738972 @ 3 @ 1

If nothing is stated to the contrary regarding operating mode and tolerances, electrical machines are
designed for continuous operation and normal infrequent starts, where there is no significant start-up
warming. The motors must only be used for the operating mode indicated on the rating plate.
The installation regulations must be observed!
Pos : 120 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Aufbau und Arbeitsw eise [Z one21+ 22] @ 67\mod_1613487005012_388.docx @ 2739010 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.10 Design and operating principle

The motors are self-cooled. Radial shaft seals are used on the drive side (AS) as well as on the
ventilation side (BS). Motors for Zones 21 and 22 have a metal fan. Motors with brakes intended for
Zone 22 (Category 3D, non-conducting dust) have a special plastic fan. The motors have been designed
with protection class IP55, optionally with protection class IP66 (Zone 22 - non-conducting dust, EPL
Dc) or IP66 (Zone 21, EPL Db). The surface temperature does not exceed the surface temperature
indicated on the name plate. The prerequisite is the consideration of the operating instructions.
Pos : 121 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Mi ndestq uersc hnitte v on Schutzl eitern [Zone21+ 22, Clas s II] @ 7\m od_1431436347149_388.docx @ 219273 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.11 Minimum cross section of bonding conductors

Cross section of the phase conductor Minimum cross section of the associated
of the installation S [mm2] protective conductor SP [mm2]
S ≤ 16 S
16 < S ≤ 35 16
S > 35 0.5 S
197 / 396
Pos : 122 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Ins tandhaltung [Zone21+22, Class II] @ 67\m od_1613487261161_388.docx @ 2739048 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.12 Maintenance
The voltage must always be switched off and secured against switch-on before opening.
Notice! Temperatures may occur within the motor that are higher than the maximum permissible
surface temperature of the housing. The motor must therefore not be opened in an explosive
dust atmosphere. The motors must be checked and tested for functional safety on a regular
basis. The valid national standards and regulations must be observed.
Impermissibly high dust deposits > 5 mm are to be avoided. The motor must not be further operated if
functional safety is not guaranteed. Upon replacement of the ball bearings, the radial shaft seals must
also be replaced. Please use the radial shaft seals prescribed by Getriebebau NORD. It is essential to
pay attention to professional installation. The radial shaft seal’s outer ring and sealing lip must be
lubricated. If an explosion-protected gear unit is flanged to the motor in a dust-proof manner, a NBR
radial shaft seal may be used on the motor’s A side if the gear oil temperature does not exceed 85°C.
Only original parts may be used as spare parts, except for standardised, customary and equivalent
parts. This is particularly valid for seals and connection parts. In case of terminal box parts or spare
parts for outer earthing, the parts must be ordered according to the spare parts list of the operating
instructions.
Seals, radial shaft seals and cable glands must be checked for functionality on a regular basis.
The maintenance of the motor’s dust protection is of outstanding importance for explosion
protection. Maintenance must be carried out by qualified personnel in a specialist workshop with
Service department.
198 / 396
Pos : 123 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Opti onen für M otoren für den Eins atz in Zone 22 [Z one22] @ 7\m od_1431437187222_388.docx @ 219335 @ 2 @ 1
3.4 Options for motors for use in Zone 21 and Zone 22


switched off.
atmosphere!

be used.
Pos : 126 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Betrieb am Freq uenz umrichter [Zone22] @ 67\mod_1613487358920_388.docx @ 2739086 @ 3 @ 1

ATEX NORD motors with ignition protection classes tb and tc are suitable by their insulation system
design for operation with the frequency inverter. The variable speed range requires temperature
monitoring using PTC resistors. For safe planning and application, the planning guideline for operating
and installation instructions B1091-1 must be observed. The planning guideline provides information on
the necessary prerequisites with inverter operation and on the approved speed ranges. Option Z (Heavy
fan, cast-iron fan) is not permitted for inverter operation.
If the frequency inverter is not approved for operation within the specified explosion hazard zone, the
frequency inverter is to be installed outside the explosion hazard area.
199 / 396
Pos : 127 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Fr emdl üfter [Zone22] @ 67\mod_1613487555362_388.docx @ 2739124 @ 3 @ 1
3.4.2 External fan

Motors having the additional labelling F (e.g. 80LP/4 3D TF F) are equipped with an external fan and
have to be monitored via the installed temperature sensor.

The motor may only be commissioned together with the external fan. A failure of the external
fan may lead to overheating of the motor and thus to material damage and/or personal injury
or even the ignition of an explosive atmosphere.
Observe the operating instructions of the external fan!
The external fan is separately supplied with voltage via the external fan’s terminal box. The external
fan’s supply voltage must match the voltage information indicated on the name plate. Suitable monitoring
devices shall protect the external fan against overheating. The IP protection classes of the external fan
and the motor may deviate. The lower IP protection class applies to the drive unit. The cable glands
must at least match the protection class indicated on the name plate. Unused openings must be sealed
with blind plugs that comply with at least the motor protection class.
External fans and motors for use in explosion hazard areas have Ex labelling according to
RL 2014/34/EU. The label must be available on the external fan and on the motor. If the labels deviate
between external fan and motor, the lower labelled explosion protection applies to the entire drive. If the
surface temperature is indicated, the indicated maximum temperature of the individual component
applies to the entire drive unit. In this context, any existing gear unit must be observed. Please contact
Getriebebau NORD in case of uncertainties. If any one component of the entire drive has no Ex labelling,
the entire drive must not be commissioned in explosion hazard areas.
200 / 396
Pos : 129 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Zw eiter T emperaturfühler @ 10\mod_1455525855678_388.docx @ 299648 @ 3 @ 1
3.4.3 Second temperature sensor 2TF

Category 3D motors (Zone 22, non-conducting dust) can be supplied with a second temperature sensor
(2TF). This option can be used to implement a warning signal (overheating in the winding). It should be
noted that the temperature sensor with the lower trigger temperature should be used for the warning;
the temperature sensor with the higher trigger temperature must be used to evaluate the switch-off
signal.
Pos : 130 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/R ückl aufs perre [Z one22] @ 67\m od_1613487660022_388.docx @ 2739162 @ 3 @ 1
3.4.4 Back stop

Motors having the additional labelling RLS (e.g. 80LP/4 3D RLS) are equipped with a back stop. For
motors with back stop, the direction of rotation is marked by an arrow on the fan cover. The arrow head
points to the drive shaft’s direction of rotation (AS). When connecting the motor and during motor control,
it must be ensured – for example by testing the field of rotation – that the motor can only operate in the
direction of rotation. Switching the motor into the blocked direction of rotation, i.e. the wrong direction of
rotation, may cause damage.
Back stops work from a speed of approx. 800 min-1 without wear. To avoid impermissible heating and
faster wear of the back stop, back stops must not be operated with a speed below 800 min-1. This must
be observed for motors having a frequency of 50 Hz and a pole number of ≥ 8 as well as for motors
used with a frequency inverter.
Pos : 131 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Brems e [Zone22] @ 67\mod_1613487746071_388.docx @ 2739200 @ 3 @ 1
3.4.5 Brake
Motors having the additional labelling BRE (e.g. 80LP/4 3D BRE 10) are equipped with a brake and
have to be monitored via the installed temperature sensors. The triggering of the temperature sensor of
one of the components (motor or brake) must lead to safe shut-down of the entire drive. The PTC
resistors of motor and brake must be connected in series.
If the motor is operated via a frequency inverter, an external fan must be used in the case of stator
supply frequencies below 25 Hz. Operation without an external fan in case of stator supply frequencies
below 25 Hz is not permitted.
The brake may be used as a holding brake with up to 4 switching cycles per hour.
An optional manual brake release (with lockable manual release lever, where required) must only be
used if there is no explosive dust atmosphere.
NOTICE! Also observe the operating instructions of the brake!
The DC voltage supply of the brake is realised via a rectifier in the motor terminal box or via direct supply
with DC voltage. The brake voltage indicated on the name plate must be complied with.
The power supply lines and the temperature sensor line must not be installed together in one cable.
Check the brake’s functionality before commissioning. There must be no grinding noises as
impermissible heating may occur.
201 / 396
Pos : 132 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Inkr ementalgeber @ 83\mod_1638950032642_388.docx @ 2849940 @ 3 @ 1
3.4.6 Incremental encoder

Motors with the additional labelling IG or IGK (e.g. 80LP/4 3D IG F) are equipped with an incremental
encoder, which is suitable for ignition protection Ex tc. This option is always delivered with an external
fan, which is also suitable for ignition protection Ex tc. Operation of the motor is only permissible if the
external fan is connected.
NOTICE
Malfunction of the drive during operation with connected incremental encoder
If the motor is operated with a connected incremental encoder, there is a risk of a motor malfunction
due to faulty connection and impermissible operating conditions of the incremental encoder.
Therefore, it is mandatory to note before commissioning
• the operating instructions of the incremental encoder with the corresponding installation and
maintenance regulations,
• the maximum permissible speed of the incremental encoder,
• the information label attached to the incremental encoder,
• the superordinate motor name plate and possibly the restricting information.
If the operating instructions are not available, contact the Getriebebau NORD service department.
Pos : 133 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Ü bersicht Br ems anbau N ORD ATEX- M otoren nac h 94/9 EG @ 67\mod_1613488057199_388.docx @ 2739238 @ 3 @ 1
3.4.7 Overview of brake attachment for NORD ATEX motors

Permissible brake sizes for Category 3D motors
Size LKZ Braking torques [Nm]

63 S, L, SP, LP 5
71 S, L, SP, LP 5
80 S, SH, SP 5 10
80 L, LH, LP 5 10
90 S, SH, SP 10 20
90 L, LH, SP 10 20
100 L, LH, LP 20 40
100 LA, AH, AP 20 40
112 M, SH, MH, 20 40
MP
132 S, SH, SP 60
132 M, MH, MP 60
132 MA 60
160 MH, MP 100 150 250
160 LH, LP 100 150 250
180 MH, MP 250
180 LH, LP 250
200 XH 250
225 SP, MP 400
250 WP 400
202 / 396
Pos : 135 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/T ypenschil d N ORD Ex- Motor Ex tb- Ex tc @ 66\m od_1613047975062_388.docx @ 2735041 @ 3 @ 1
3.4.8 Name plate of motors (Ex tb, Ex tc) according to EN 60079 for FI operation
1 Data matrix code
2 Code number of notified body (only for Ex tb)
3 Number of phases
4 Type designation
9 Operating mode
11 Stator frequency
12 Stator voltage
14 EU type-examination certificate number
15 Power factor
16 Speed
Notice! Pay attention to operating instructions
21
B1091.
Name plate example Ex tb
23 Nominal current in operating point
25 Efficiency
26 Weight
27 Information on brake (option with Ex tc only)
28 Note: Supply by frequency inverter
29 Maximum permitted stator frequency
30 Minimum pulse frequency of frequency inverter
31 Modulation procedure of frequency inverter
32 Data field for operation with frequency inverters
33 Data field for mains operation
34 Nominal torque on the motor shaft
Pos : 136 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/T ypenschil d N ORD Ex_- M otoren_Ergänz ung [EXE, EXN, EX - FU- Betrieb EX tb, tc ] @ 11\m od_1460031690739_388.docx @ 316441 @ @ 1
203 / 396
Pos : 138 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Expl osionsgeschützte Motor en gem äß T P TC 012/2011 für die Eurasis che Wirtsc hafts union_01 @ 67\m od_1613654279423_388.docx @ 2739989 @ 2 @ 1
3.5 Motors according to TP TC012/2011 for the Eurasian Economic Union

Pos : 139 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Expl osionsgeschützte Motor en gem äß T P TC 012/2011 für die Eurasis che Wirtsc hafts union_02 @ 23\m od_1532954671989_388.docx @ 2434724 @ @ 1
In addition to the information which is stated in the operating and maintenance instruction B1091, the
following information must be noted for EAC EX motors. If the motor is supplied with further components
or devices, the associated operating and maintenance instructions must also be observed.
Pos : 140 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/T ypenschil der/ Kennz eic hnung EAC Ex @ 23\m od_1532955209849_388.docx @ 2434761 @ 3 @ 1
3.5.1 Type plates / Labelling

Motors with the labelling listed below have EAC Ex approval according to TP TC 012/2011 for the
Eurasian Economic Union.
These motors have two type plates. One type plate complies with ATEX Directive 2014/34 EU and the
relevant standards from the standard series EN 60079; the second type plate contains the additional
specifications according to Directive TP TC 012/2011.
The motors may only be operated in areas in which the ignition protection type stated on the motor type
plate is permissible. In addition, compliance with the temperature class and the maximum surface
temperature as stated on the type plate is mandatory.
204 / 396
Pos : 142 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/N ormen ( EAC EX) @ 23\m od_1532955681176_388.doc x @ 2434798 @ 3 @ 1
3.5.2 Standards
ГОСТ Standard IEC Standard
ГОСТ 31610.0-2014 IEC 60079-0:2011
ГОСТ Р МЭК 60079-31-2013 IEC 60079-31:2013
ГОСТ Р МЭК 60079-7-2012 IEC 60079-7:2006
ГОСТ 31610.15-2014 IEC 60079-15:2010
Pos : 143 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Lebensdauer @ 23\mod_1532956394784_388.docx @ 2434835 @ 3 @ 1
3.5.3 Service life

In addition to the service intervals which are stated in the operating and maintenance instructions, it
should be noted that the use of motors which are more than 30 years old is not permitted.
The year of manufacture of the motor is stated on the type plate.
WARNING Danger to persons

The motors must be disconnected from the mains before opening the terminal box.

Opening the terminal box in an explosive atmosphere is prohibited.
Pos : 144 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Besonder e Betri ebsbedi ngungen (X- Kennzeic hnung) @ 67\m od_1613488202245_388.doc x @ 2739276 @ 35 @ 1
3.5.4 Special operating conditions (X-labelling)

Permissible ambient temperature range
For all motors with ignition protection type tb or tc, the permissible ambient temperature range is
-20°C...+40°C. For IE1/IE2 motors for operation in Zones 21 and 22, an extended ambient temperature
range from -20°C...+60°C is permissible. In this case, the rated power must be reduced to 72 % of the
value stated in the catalogue.
If the maximum ambient temperature is between +40°C and +60°C, the power output should be inversely
linearly interpolated between 100 % and 72 %. Thermal motor protection by PTC resistor temperature
sensors is mandatory. The motor connection cables and the cable glands must be suitable for
temperatures of at least 80°C.
The extended ambient temperature range does not apply for optional attachments such as a brake, an
encoder and/or an external fan. Contact the manufacturer in case of doubt with regard to permissibility!
205 / 396
Pos : 146 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Expl osionsgeschützte El ektr omotor en gemäß GB12476.1 2013 s owi e GB12476.5 2013 für die VRC hina_01 @ 67\mod_1613654637015_388.docx @ 2740027 @ 2 @ 1
3.6 Motors according to GB 12476.1-2013 / GB 12476.5-2013 for the People's

Republic of China
Pos : 147 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Expl osionsgeschützte El ektr omotor en gemäß GB12476.1 2013 s owi e GB12476.5 2013 für die VRC hina_02 @ 51\mod_1601386630821_388.docx @ 2675028 @ @ 1
In addition to the information which is stated in the operating and maintenance instructions B1091 and
B1091-1, the following information must be noted for the C2D and C3D versions of explosion-protected
NORD electric motors.
If the motor is supplied with further components or devices, the associated operating and maintenance
instructions must also be observed.
Pos : 148 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/T ypenschil der/ Kennz eic hnung CCC EX (C hina) @ 51\m od_1601387433200_388.docx @ 2675065 @ 3 @ 1
3.6.1 Type plates / Labelling

Motors with CC Ex approval are certified according to the Chinese standards GB12476.1-2013 and
GB12476.5-2013 The motors have two name plates and are labelled according to the Chinese and
European standards.
Motor type Labelling according to GB standard Labelling according to ATEX

C2D Ex tD A21 IP6X T***°C Ex II 2D Ex tb IIIC T ***°C Db
C3D Ex tD A22 IP5X T***°C Ex II 3D Ex tc IIIB T ***°C Dc
Name plate examples for the labelling of NORD CCCEx motors according to the Chinese standard.
Name plate example C2D Name plate example C3D
206 / 396
Pos : 150 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/N ormen (CCC EX - C hina) @ 51\m od_1601388865096_388.docx @ 2675177 @ 3 @ 1
3.6.2 Standards to be observed during operation and maintenance
WARNING Danger to persons

The motors must be disconnected from the mains before opening the terminal box.

Opening the terminal box in an explosive atmosphere is prohibited.
Installation, use, parametrisation and maintenance of explosion-protected NORD CCCEx motors must
be performed by the operator in accordance with the operating and maintenance instructions B1091 and
B1091-1 and in accordance with the following Chinese standards.
• GB 3836.13-2013 Explosive atmosphere - Part 13: Repair, overhaul, maintenance and changes of
equipment
(GB 3836.13-2013 爆炸性环境第 13 部分：设备的修理、检修、修复和改造)
• GB/T 3836.15-2017 Explosive atmosphere - Part 15: Design, selection and installation of electrical
devices
(GB/T 3836.15-2017 爆炸性环境第 15 部分：电气装置的设计、选型和安装)
• GB/T 3836.16-2017 Explosive atmosphere - Part 16: Inspection and maintenance of electrical
devices
(GB/T 3836.16-2017 爆炸性环境第 16 部分：电气装置的检查与维护)
• GB 50257-2014 Design specifications and acceptance of electrical installations for explosion hazard
and flammable environments.
(GB 50257-2014 电气装置安装工程爆炸和火灾危险环境电气装置施工及验收规范)
• GB 15577-2018 Safety regulations for dust explosion protection
(GB 15577-2018 粉尘防爆安全规程)

207 / 396
Pos : 152 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Expl osionsgeschützte El ektr omotor en gemäß Class I Div.2_01 @ 72\m od_1619777126761_388.docx @ 2773722 @ 2 @ 1
3.7 Explosion-protected electric motors according to Class I Div.2


switched off.
atmosphere!

be used.
Pos : 155 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/W eitere Sic her heitsinformationen_01 [Class I und Class II] @ 73\m od_1620287106819_388.docx @ 2776560 @ 5 @ 1
Further safety information

Pos : 156 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/W eitere Sic her heitsinformationen_02 [Class I und Class II] @ 73\m od_1620287796525_0.doc x @ 2776678 @ @ 1
“THIS EQUIPMENT IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I DIVISION 2 GROUPS A,B,C,D/CLASS II

DIVISION 2 GROUPS F & G”
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
DO NOT DISCONNEC T EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED
OFF OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS
AVERTISSEMENT
RISQUE D'EXPLOSION
AVANT DE DECONNECTER L'EQUIPEMENT, COUPER LE COURANT OU
S'ASSURER QUE L'EMPLACEMENT EST DESIGNE 'NON DANGEREUX
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I
DIV.2/CLASS II DIV.2
208 / 396
AVERTISSEMENT
RISQUE D'EXPLOSION
LA SUBSTITUTION DE COMPOSANTS PEUT RENDRE CE MATERIEL
INACCEPTABLE POUR LES EMPLACEMENTS DE CLASSE I DIVISION 2/ CLASSE
II DIVISION 2
Pos : 157 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Expl osionsgeschützte El ektr omotor en gemäß Class I Div.2_02 @ 72\m od_1619776292502_388.docx @ 2773645 @ @ 1

The motors are suitable for use in Class I Div.2 and may be used at an ambient temperature from -20 °C
to +40 °C.
Type suffix: ID2 e.g.: 80 LP/4 ID2 CUS TF

Labelling: Class I Div.2 Group A,
B, C, D with details of
the temperature class
Explosive gas mixtures may cause severe or fatal injuries in combination with hot, electrically live and
moving components of electrical machines.
These explosion-protected electrical machines comply with the standards CSA C.22.2 No. 100-14, CSA
C22.2 No. 213-M1987 (R2013), UL Subject 1836, UL 1004-1.
The degree of explosion hazards determines the zone classification. The operator is responsible for the
classification of the zones. The use of motors which are not certified for explosion hazard areas is
prohibited in explosion hazard areas.
Pos : 158 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Kabelvers chr aubungen_1 [EXN, Clas s I und II Div.2] @ 7\m od_1431424754843_388.doc x @ 218766 @ 3 @ 1

Pos : 159 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Kabelvers chr aubungen_2 [Class I Div2] @ 72\m od_1620045496645_388.docx @ 2774030 @ @ 1
Cable glands must be certified and suitable for Class I Div 2. explosion hazard areas. Unused openings
must be sealed with approved blind plugs.

209 / 396

Brass washer
Brass nut
Ring terminal
Pos : 162 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Elektrischer Anschl uss _02 [Clas s I und II Div.2] @ 73\mod_1620046300205_388.docx @ 2774127 @ @ 1
The motor must be grounded at one of the marked earthing terminals.

The use of aluminium connecting cables is not permissible.
Cables with a circular cross-section must be used with the supplied cable glands. The clamping nuts of
the cable gland must be tightened to the torque specified in the following table.
leakage tracks of at least 12 mm between the electrically live components and components with the
The terminal box seals and the cable gland seals must be correctly seated and must not be damaged.

210 / 396
Pos : 164 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/W eitere Betriebs beding unge [Cl ass I, Div . 2] @ 73\m od_1620053458572_388.docx @ 2774205 @ 3 @ 1

The motors are designed for continuous operation and normal one-time starting in which no significant
starting heat is generated.
Voltage supply deviations are only permitted to a limited extent: Voltage ± 5%, frequency ± 2%. Mains
symmetry must be maintained to keep heat generation within permissible limits. Significant deviations
from the nominal values can lead to an impermissible increase in heat generation in the motor.
Each machine must be protected against impermissible heating by a current-dependent and delayed
circuit breaker that has been tested for operation by an approved facility. If such a configuration is not
possible, additional protection measures are required (e.g. thermal protection of the machine).
equivalent components, only original spare parts (see spare parts list) may be used. This particularly
applies for seals and connection parts.
Check that the connection terminals, protective conductor terminal and the equipotential bonding
terminal are firmly fastened. Check that the cable glands and the terminal box seals are in good
condition.
The motor must be removed for measurement of the insulation resistance. The measurement must not
be performed in the explosion hazard area. As soon as measurement has been completed, discharge
the connection terminals again immediately by short-circuiting in order to prevent any spark discharges
occurring in the explosion hazard area.
211 / 396
Pos : 165 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Expl osionsgeschützte El ektr omotor en gemäß Class II Div.2_01 @ 73\mod_1620136298757_388.docx @ 2774580 @ 2 @ 1
3.8 Explosion-protected electric motors according to Class II Div.2


switched off.
atmosphere!

be used.
Pos : 168 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/W eitere Sic her heitsinformationen_01 [Class I und Class II] @ 73\m od_1620287106819_388.docx @ 2776560 @ 5 @ 1
Further safety information

Pos : 169 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/W eitere Sic her heitsinformationen_02 [Class I und Class II] @ 73\m od_1620287796525_0.doc x @ 2776678 @ @ 1
“THIS EQUIPMENT IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I DIVISION 2 GROUPS A,B,C,D/CLASS II

DIVISION 2 GROUPS F & G”
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
DO NOT DISCONNEC T EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED
OFF OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS
AVERTISSEMENT
RISQUE D'EXPLOSION
AVANT DE DECONNECTER L'EQUIPEMENT, COUPER LE COURANT OU
S'ASSURER QUE L'EMPLACEMENT EST DESIGNE 'NON DANGEREUX
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I
DIV.2/CLASS II DIV.2
212 / 396
AVERTISSEMENT
RISQUE D'EXPLOSION
LA SUBSTITUTION DE COMPOSANTS PEUT RENDRE CE MATERIEL
INACCEPTABLE POUR LES EMPLACEMENTS DE CLASSE I DIVISION 2/ CLASSE
II DIVISION 2
Pos : 170 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/!2! Expl osionsgeschützte El ektr omotor en gemäß Class II Div.2_02 @ 73\mod_1620136454224_388.docx @ 2774618 @ @ 1

The motors are suitable for use in Class II Div.2 and may be used at an ambient temperature from -
20 °C to +40 °C.
Type suffix: IID2 e.g.: 80 LP/4 IID2 CUS TF

Labelling: Class II Div.2 Group F,
G T3B 165°C
Explosive dust may cause severe or fatal injuries in combination with hot, electrically live and moving
components of electrical machines.
It is necessary that the persons responsible for the use of these motors and frequency inverters in
explosion hazard areas are trained in their correct use.
These explosion-protected electrical machines comply with the standards CSA C.22.2 N°25-1966, CSA
C.22.2 N°100-14, UL Subject 1836, UL 1004-1 and are suitable for the Class II Div.2 area.
The degree of explosion hazards determines the zone classification. The operator is responsible for the
classification of the zones. The use of motors which are not certified for explosion hazard areas is
prohibited in explosion hazard areas.

213 / 396


Brass washer
Brass nut
Ring terminal
Pos : 173 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Elektrischer Anschl uss _02 [Clas s I und II Div.2] @ 73\mod_1620046300205_388.docx @ 2774127 @ @ 1
The motor must be grounded at one of the marked earthing terminals.

The use of aluminium connecting cables is not permissible.
Cables with a circular cross-section must be used with the supplied cable glands. The clamping nuts of
the cable gland must be tightened to the torque specified in the following table.
leakage tracks of at least 12 mm between the electrically live components and components with the
The terminal box seals and the cable gland seals must be correctly seated and must not be damaged.

214 / 396
Pos : 175 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Kabel- und Kabelv ersc hraubungen [Cl ass II Div .2] @ 73\m od_1620140130351_388.docx @ 2774655 @ 3 @ 1
3.8.4 Cables and cable glands

For Class II Div. 2, the cable glands must as a minimum correspond to the protection type specified on
the name plate. Unused openings must be sealed with blind plugs that comply with at least the protection
class of the motor and zone.
The cable and blind plugs must be suitable for temperatures of at least 80 °C.
In order to connect cables or carry out other works, the motor must not be opened in explosive
atmospheres. The voltage must always be switched off and secured against switch-on before opening.
The motors are equipped with threads for cable glands according to the following overview.
Assignment of cable gland to motor size
Standard motor cable glands Braking motor cable glands
Type Quantit Threads Quantity Threads Quantity Threads Quantity Threads Quantity Threads Quantity Threads
y
63 2 M20x1.5 4 M20x1.5 2 M12x1.5
71 2 M20x1.5 4 M20x1.5 2 M12x1.5
80 2 M25x1.5 4 M25x1.5 2 M12x1.5
90 2 M25x1.5 4 M25x1.5 2 M12x1.5
100 2 M32x1.5 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5
112 2 M32x1.5 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5
132 2 M32x1.5 4 M32x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
160/ 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5 2 M40x1.5 2 M12x1.5 2 M16x1.5
180/..X
3.8.5 Painting
Pos : 177 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/IEC- B14-Motor en [Z one21+ 22, Clas s II Div.2] @ 7\m od_1431436005842_388.docx @ 219211 @ 3 @ 1
3.8.6 IEC-B14 motors

Please comply with the information in Section 1.3.2. Otherwise, explosion protection is not ensured.
Pos : 178 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/W eitere Betriebs beding unge [Cl ass II, Div. 2] @ 73\mod_1620283437283_388.docx @ 2776050 @ 3 @ 1

Unless otherwise specified on the rating plate for operating modes and tolerances, electric machines
are designed for continuous operation and normal infrequent starting where insignificant start-up heating
occurs. The motors may only be used for the type of operation stated on the name plate.
The installation instructions must be observed.
215 / 396
The motors are self-cooled. Radial shaft seals are mounted both on the drive and ventilation side. The
motors are manufactured with protection class IP55, optionally IP66. Under normal operation conditions,
the surface temperature does not exceed the surface temperature indicated on the name plate.
Pos : 179 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Mi ndestq uersc hnitte v on Schutzl eitern [Zone21+ 22, Clas s II] @ 7\m od_1431436347149_388.docx @ 219273 @ 3 @ 1
3.8.8 Minimum cross section of bonding conductors

Cross section of the phase conductor Minimum cross section of the associated
of the installation S [mm2] protective conductor SP [mm2]
S ≤ 16 S
16 < S ≤ 35 16
S > 35 0.5 S
Pos : 180 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Mi ndestq uersc hnitte v on Schutzl eitern_02 [Clas s II] @ 73\m od_1620284355074_388.docx @ 2776165 @ @ 1
The minimum cross-section for connection of a cable to the outer earthing terminal is 4 mm².
216 / 396
Pos : 181 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Betrieb am Freq uenz umrichter @ 76\mod_1625221471421_388.docx @ 2802380 @ 3 @ 1

NORD motors that comply with Class II Div.2 are suitable for operation on a frequency inverter. The
variable speed range requires temperature monitoring using temperature sensors. The approved speed
ranges can be found in the following table:
Type VR 5:1 Type VN 10:1 Type VW 20:1
Motor type M nmax nmin M nmax nmin M nmax nmin
[Nm] [r/min] [r/min] [Nm] [r/min] [r/min] [Nm] [r/min] [r/min]

SK 80 LP/4 4.32 1680 350 3.16 1800 175 2.98 2400 110
SK 90 SP/4 6.10 1750 355 3.96 1800 185 4.45 2400 80
SK 90 LP/4 8.63 1695 360 6.28 1800 115 6.32 2400 110
SK 100 LP/4 12.50 1700 315 8.19 1800 100 9.25 2400 65
SK 112 MP/4 20.30 1750 360 11.87 1800 180 14.84 2400 115
SK 132 SP/4 30.50 1750 350 19.78 1800 185 22.25 2400 120
SK 132 MP/4 41.00 1745 350 29.67 1800 175 29.67 2400 125
SK 160 MP/4 60.30 1760 345 39.56 1800 175 44.51 2400 120
SK 160 LP/4 80.70 1760 350 59.34 1800 180 59.34 2400 115
SK 180 MP/4 100.60 1760 355 79.12 1800 180 74.18 2400 125
SK 180 LP/4 121.00 1765 350 98.90 1800 175 89.01 2400 120
If the frequency inverter is not approved for operation within the specified explosion hazard zone, the
frequency inverter is to be installed outside the explosion hazard area.
217 / 396
Pos : 183 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/3. ATEX/Ins tandhaltung [Zone21+22, Class II] @ 67\m od_1613487261161_388.docx @ 2739048 @ 3 @ 1
3.8.10 Maintenance
The voltage must always be switched off and secured against switch-on before opening.
Notice! Temperatures may occur within the motor that are higher than the maximum permissible
surface temperature of the housing. The motor must therefore not be opened in an explosive
dust atmosphere. The motors must be checked and tested for functional safety on a regular
basis. The valid national standards and regulations must be observed.
Impermissibly high dust deposits > 5 mm are to be avoided. The motor must not be further operated if
functional safety is not guaranteed. Upon replacement of the ball bearings, the radial shaft seals must
also be replaced. Please use the radial shaft seals prescribed by Getriebebau NORD. It is essential to
pay attention to professional installation. The radial shaft seal’s outer ring and sealing lip must be
lubricated. If an explosion-protected gear unit is flanged to the motor in a dust-proof manner, a NBR
radial shaft seal may be used on the motor’s A side if the gear oil temperature does not exceed 85°C.
Only original parts may be used as spare parts, except for standardised, customary and equivalent
parts. This is particularly valid for seals and connection parts. In case of terminal box parts or spare
parts for outer earthing, the parts must be ordered according to the spare parts list of the operating
instructions.
Seals, radial shaft seals and cable glands must be checked for functionality on a regular basis.
The maintenance of the motor’s dust protection is of outstanding importance for explosion
protection. Maintenance must be carried out by qualified personnel in a specialist workshop with
Service department.
218 / 396
4 Replacement parts
Please note our spare parts catalogue PL 1090 under www.nord.com.

We will be pleased to send you the spare parts catalogue on request.
Pos : 187 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/6. Konformitäts erklärungen/!1! Konformitätserkl ärungen (2022- 06- 14 09:32:19) @ 82\mod_1637149063402_388.docx @ 2845265 @ 1 @ 1
219 / 396
5 Declarations of Conformity
220 / 396
221 / 396
222 / 396
223 / 396
Pos : 189 /Anleitungen/Motor en/B1091 Dr ehs tromm otoren/6. Konformitäts erklärungen/Konformitäts erklär ung U KCA @ 89\m od_1656515298653_0.docx @ 2920280 @ @ 1
224 / 396
=== Ende der Liste für T extm arke Inhalt ===
225 / 396
226 / 396
6051302 / 2722
B 1091-1 – en
Motors in FI operation for Category 2D/3D

Planning guideline for B 1091
227 / 396
Motors in FI operation for Category 2D/3D – Planning guideline for B 1091
Intended use of three-phase asynchronous motors in frequency

inverter operation
Compliance with the planning guide B1091-1 for the operating and installation instructions B1091, as
well as with the operating instructions for the frequency inverter and the product overview G4014-1 is
essential for correct operation and the fulfilment of any warranty claims. Read the operating and
installation instructions before starting work with the motors and frequency inverters.
The operating instruction contains important information about servicing. It must therefore be kept
in close proximity to the motor.
The three-phase asynchronous motors and frequency inverters are suitable for industrial and
commercial systems for moving a wide variety of drive components and applications.
All details regarding technical data and permissible conditions at the installation site must be complied
with.
Commissioning (implementation of the intended use) is not permitted until it has been ensured that the
machine complies with the EMC directive 2014/30/EU and that the conformity of the end product
meets the machine directive 2006/42/EEC (note EN 60204).
2 B 1091-1 en-2422
228 / 396
Documentation
Documentation
Designation: B 1091-1 Planning guideline
Part No.: 6052102

Series: Three-phase asynchronous
motors in frequency inverter
operation
Motor series: IE1, IE2, IE3
Type of ignition Ex tb, Ex tc, Ex tD A21
protection:
Motor types: Size 63 … 180
4-pole
Version list
Date Version
Internal code
B 1091-1, 6052102 / 0613 • First edition, based on B1091-1 DE / January 2013
February
2013
B 1091-1, 6052102 / 3213 • Layout revision and error correction
August 2013
B 1091-1, 6052102 / 0517 • Supplementation of 2D FI motors
February
2017
B 1091-1, 6052102 / 4317 • Change of document reference from G4014 to G4014-1
October
2017
B 1091-1, 6052102 / 1221 • Supplementation of IE3 motors
March 2021
B 1091-1, 6052102 / 2422 • General corrections
June 2022 • Supplementation motor data IE3 Motors with external fan
34159
Table 1: Version list

G
Validity
This Planning Guideline for the operation and instructions B 1091 describes the planning requirements
for NORD three-phase asynchronous motors supplied by frequency inverters for Zone 22 (Ex tc) and
for Zone 21 (Ex tb).
B 1091-1 en-2422 3
229 / 396
Publisher
Fon +49 (0) 45 32 / 289-0 • Fax +49 (0) 45 32 / 289-2253
4 B 1091-1 en-2422
230 / 396
Publisher
B 1091-1 en-2422 5
231 / 396
Table of Contents
1 Technical explanations ............................................................................................................................... 8
1.1 General .............................................................................................................................................. 8
1.2 Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 8
1.2.1 Necessary frequency inverter characteristics: ...................................................................... 8
1.2.2 Category 3D motors according to EU Directive 2014/34/EU ................................................ 9
1.3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................. 9
1.4 Commissioning ................................................................................................................................ 10
1.5 Frequency inverter assignment and operating mode selection ........................................................ 11
1.6 Examples ......................................................................................................................................... 12
1.6.1 1. Example: motor 100L/4 3D TF........................................................................................ 12
1.6.2 2. Example: motor 100L/4 3D TF........................................................................................ 15
1.7 Motor data for frequency inverter parameterisation.......................................................................... 16
1.7.1 Frequency inverter parameterisation data for IE1 motors................................................... 16
1.7.1.1 50 Hz characteristic curve 16
2 Technical data (characteristic curve data) .............................................................................................. 23
2.1 Self-cooled motors ........................................................................................................................... 23
2.1.1 IE1 motors .......................................................................................................................... 24
2.1.1.1 IE1 motors, 50 Hz nominal point, Size 63S/4 to71L/4 for category 2D and 3D 24
2.1.1.2 IE1 motors, 50 Hz nominal point, Size 80S/4 to 132M/4 for category 3D 25
2.1.2 IE2 motors .......................................................................................................................... 30
2.1.2.1 IE2 motors, 50 Hz nominal point, Size 80SH/4 to 180LH/4 for category 2D and 3D 30
2.1.3 IE3 Motors .......................................................................................................................... 36
2.1.3.1 IE3 motors, 50 Hz nominal point, Size 63SP/4 to 180LP/4 for category 2D and 3D 36
2.2 Motors with external fan ................................................................................................................... 45
2.2.1 IE1 and IE2 motors with external fan, 50 Hz-nominal point, category 3D ........................... 46
2.2.2 IE1 and IE2 motors with external fan, 87 Hz-nominal point, category 3D ........................... 47
2.2.3 IE1 and IE2 motors with external fan, 100 Hz-nominal point, category 3D ......................... 48
2.2.4 IE3 Motors with external fan ............................................................................................... 49
2.2.4.1 IE3 motors with external fan, 50 Hz nominal point, size 63SP/4 to 180LP/4 for category 3D49
2.2.4.2 IE3 motors with external fan, 87 Hz nominal point, size 63SP/4 to 180LP/4 for category 3D52
2.2.4.3 IE3 motors with external fan, 100 Hz nominal point, size 63SP/4 to 180LP/4 for category
3D 55
3 Appendix .................................................................................................................................................... 58
6 B 1091-1 en-2422
232 / 396
Figure 1: Selection of V/f characteristic curves ...................................................................................................... 11
Figure 2: Motor 100L/4, 50 Hz characteristic curve ............................................................................................... 12
Figure 3: Motor 100L/4, 100 Hz characteristic curve ............................................................................................. 13
Figure 4: Motor 100L/4, 87 Hz characteristic curve ............................................................................................... 14
B 1091-1 en-2422 7
233 / 396
1 Technical explanations
1.1 General
Category 2D and 3D motors supplied by NORD DRIVESYSTEMS comply with the standards
EN 60079-0 and EN 60079-31. The insulation of the windings is designed for operation with frequency
inverters. For operation with frequency inverters, the motors are always equipped with triple
thermistors as per DIN 44082.
For variable speed drives, the thermistor is the most important protective element to ensure
compliance with the maximum surface temperature, which is stated in the type plate of the motor.
As the thermistor only provides indirect temperature monitoring of some components of the
motor, e.g. the motor shaft, it is necessary to observe all the specifications which are stated in
this planning guideline.
The operating ranges stated in the Appendix have been checked in the course of extensive test runs
and only these ranges are approved. Compliance with the stated procedures is therefore a
prerequisite for the planning and commissioning of Device Group II regulated drive units in Zone 22
(non-conducting dust), as well as in Zone 21.
1.2 Overview
1.2.1 Necessary frequency inverter characteristics:

• Only frequency inverters with a vector regulation method which provides load-dependent terminal
voltage adjustment in the low speed range may be used.
• The maximum output voltage of the frequency inverter must not be less than 91 % of the mains
voltage.
• The frequency inverter must provide i²*t monitoring which is adjustable to the nominal motor
current.
• The pulse frequency of the output stage must be adjustable to 4 kHz or higher.
• If the inverter does not have an input for evaluation of the thermistor, evaluation must be carried
out by a separate triggering device which switches off the inverter. Operation without evaluation of
the thermistor is not permitted.
• Evaluation of the thermistor for motors with ignition protection type tb as well as tD A21 must be
carried out with an external certified thermistor triggering device with an EU type test certificate.
Evaluation of the thermistor via the thermistor evaluation input on the frequency inverter is not
permitted. In case of a fault (excessive temperature) the motor and frequency inverter combination
must be safely switched off via the external thermistor triggering device.
• The values stated in the tables refer to frequency inverters that are not directly mounted on the
motor. For frequency inverters that are directly mounted on the motor reduced torques are to be
used. These can be found in the G4014-1 documentation.
8 B 1091-1 en-2422
234 / 396
1.2.2 Category 3D motors according to EU Directive 2014/34/EU

For Category 3D motors as per EU Directive 2014/34/EU with the frequency inverter mounted on the
motor, the following steps must be observed for the determination of the maximum permissible torque:
1. Determination of the maximum permissible torque on the basis of B1091-1
2. Determination of the maximum permissible torque for the required operating point according to
G4014-1 on the basis of a NORD standard motor (not ATEX) of the same size and power
rating.
3. The maximum permissible value must be obtained via the following comparison.
a) If the value of the torque from document G4014-1 is larger than the torque value in the
Planning Guideline B1091-1, the torque value from the Planning Guideline B1091-1
must be used.
b) If the value of the torque from the Planning Guideline B1091-1 is larger than the value
of the torque in document G4014-1, the value from document G4014-1 must be used.
1.3 Wiring
• No filters which come into the resonance range may be wired between the inverter and the motor.
Overvoltages resulting from that scenario may damage the insulation of the wires or the motor.
• Only filters which are prescribed or approved by the supplier of the frequency inverter may be
used.
• The wires used must have an insulation strength of at least 2,000 VDC.
• Additional mains or motor chokes reduce the output voltage of the frequency inverter and are not
considered in this planning guideline. With chokes, the field weakening threshold shifts downwards
and the field weakening increases.
• The maximum permissible length of the cable between motor and frequency inverter can be limited
by the frequency inverter’s manufacturer. For NORD frequency inverters, please enquire for
permissibility from a cable length of 30 m.
B 1091-1 en-2422 9
235 / 396
1.4 Commissioning
• Set the pulse frequency of the output stage to 4 - 6 kHz.
• Parameterise the vector control on the motor in use.
• i²*t monitoring is to be set to the nominal current of the motor.
• For NORD frequency inverters, please set parameter P535 in switch-off class 5 to the value 1
(100%).
• The maximum output frequency must be set depending on the application and and must not be
above 100 Hz.
• Activate evaluation of the thermistor. An external, certified thermistor triggering device must be
used for 2D motors (Ex tb, Ex tD A21).
• Check the thermistor monitoring by disconnecting the cable connected to the frequency inverter or
to the connection of the external thermistor triggering device.
The type plate of the motor which is suitable for the application must be observed. An explanation of
the details on the type plate can be found in the NORD Operating and Installation Instructions B1091.
The values for current, speed and torque which are stated in the tables are maximum values and must
not be exceeded.
If the minimum voltage values which are stated on the motor type plate are not achieved, the motor
must not be operated at the corresponding operating point.
NOTICE Damage to the gear unit – high speed

The maximum permissible input speed of the gear unit must be complied with.
Exceeding the permissible speed may lead to overheating and damage of gear unit parts or even complete
destruction of the gear unit.
For frequency inverter operation, the motor speed is to be limited according to the planning specifications.
10 B 1091-1 en-2422
236 / 396
1.5 Frequency inverter assignment and operating mode selection

The rated current of the frequency inverter must match the nominal motor current in order to achieve a
sufficient measurement precision of the current sensing. The rated frequency inverter current should
not be higher than 2 times the nominal motor current.
According to this planning guideline, multi-motor operation is not permitted as selective i²*t monitoring
of a motor is no longer possible.
Please note the technical data in chapter 2 "Technical data (characteristic curve data)".
Depending on the application, the operating mode of the motor can be selected from one of the
following three characteristic curves:
• 50 Hz characteristic curve: Nominal point 400 V / 50 Hz, 0 – 50 Hz no field weakening and

50 – 100 Hz field weakening.
• 87 Hz characteristic curve: Nominal point 400 V / 87 Hz, 0 – 87 Hz no field weakening and

87 – 100 Hz field weakening.
• 100 Hz characteristic curve: Nominal point 400 V / 100 Hz, 0 – 100 Hz reduced, constant torque with
slight field weakening.
U/f characteristic curves
Figure 1: Selection of V/f characteristic curves

Legend
50 Hz characteristic curve
B 1091-1 en-2422 11
237 / 396
1.6 Examples
1.6.1 1. Example: motor 100L/4 3D TF

Motor type plate information:
Nominal voltage 230 / 400 V Δ/Y
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz
Nominal power: 2.2 kW
Motor in star circuit (400 V / 50 Hz), frequency inverter 2.2 kW
Figure 2: Motor 100L/4, 50 Hz characteristic curve
Legend
Motor output power [kW]

Torque [%]
12 B 1091-1 en-2422
238 / 396

Motor in delta circuit (230 V / 50 Hz), frequency inverter 3.0 kW
Legend

Torque [%]
B 1091-1 en-2422 13
239 / 396
Motor in delta circuit (230 V / 50 Hz), frequency inverter 4.0 kW
Legend

Torque [%]
14 B 1091-1 en-2422
240 / 396
1.6.2 2. Example: motor 100L/4 3D TF

Motor type plate details:
Nominal voltage 400 / 690 V Δ/Y
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz
Nominal power: 2.2 kW
Due to the 400 / 690 V Δ/Y winding design, only the 50 Hz characteristic curve can be used on
the frequency inverter in this case.
B 1091-1 en-2422 15
241 / 396
1.7 Motor data for frequency inverter parameterisation

Motor types: IE1, IE2 and IE3 motors
The legend below applies to all following tables in this chapter.

Legend
Nominal
fN IN Nominal current PN Nominal power Circuit Δ/Y circuit
frequency
nN Nominal speed UN Nominal voltage cos φ Power factor RSt Line resistance
1.7.1 Frequency inverter parameterisation data for IE1 motors
1.7.1.1 50 Hz characteristic curve

Category
Motor fN nN IN UN PN RSt
type [Hz] [min-1] [A] [V] [kW] cos φ Circuit [Ω]
63S/4 2D/3D 50 1385 0,51 400 0,12 0,62 Y 68,35

63L/4 2D/3D 50 1368 0,65 400 0,18 0,66 Y 58,19
71S/4 2D/3D 50 1365 0,74 400 0,25 0,80 Y 39,76
71L/4 2D/3D 50 1385 1,05 400 0,37 0,76 Y 22,24
80S/4 3D 50 1385 1,51 400 0,55 0,75 Y 15,79
80L/4 3D 50 1395 2,03 400 0,75 0,75 Y 10,49
90S/4 3D 50 1410 2,76 400 1,1 0,76 Y 6,41
90L/4 3D 50 1390 3,53 400 1,5 0,78 Y 3,99
100L/4 3D 50 1415 5,0 400 2,2 0,78 Δ* 2,78
100LA/4 3D 50 1415 6,8 400 3,0 0,78 Δ* 5,12
112M/4 3D 50 1430 8,24 400 4,0 0,83 Δ* 3,47
132S/4 3D 50 1450 11,6 400 5,5 0,8 Δ* 2,14
132M/4 3D 50 1450 15,5 400 7,5 0,79 Δ* 1,42
132MA/4 3D 50 1445 18,8 400 9,2 0,82 Δ* 1,16
*) at 400/690V (at 230/400 V circuit type Y); RStY=RStΔ/3
16 B 1091-1 en-2422
242 / 396
Motor Category fN nN IN UN PN Circuit RSt

type [Hz] [min-1] [A] [V] [kW] cos φ (230/400V) [Ω]
63S/4 2D/3D 50 1385 0,88 230 0,12 0,62 Δ 68,35

63L/4 2D/3D 50 1368 1,12 230 0,18 0,66 Δ 58,19
71S/4 2D/3D 50 1365 1,28 230 0,25 0,80 Δ 39,76
71L/4 2D/3D 50 1385 1,82 230 0,37 0,76 Δ 22,24
80S/4 3D 50 1385 2,62 230 0,55 0,75 Δ 15,79
80L/4 3D 50 1395 3,52 230 0,75 0,75 Δ 10,49
90S/4 3D 50 1410 4,78 230 1,1 0,76 Δ 6,41
90L/4 3D 50 1390 6,11 230 1,5 0,78 Δ 3,99
100L/4 3D 50 1415 8,65 230 2,2 0,78 Δ 2,78
100LA/4 3D 50 1415 11,76 230 3,0 0,78 Δ 1,71
112M/4 3D 50 1430 14,2 230 4,0 0,83 Δ 1,11
132S/4 3D 50 1450 20,0 230 5,5 0,8 Δ 0,72
132M/4 3D 3D 50 1450 26,8 230 7,5 0,79 Δ 0,46
132MA/4 3D 50 1455 32,6 230 9,2 0,829 Δ 0,39

Category
Motor fN nN IN UN PN Circuit RSt

63S/4 2D/3D 100 2878 0,77 400 0,18 0,63 Δ 68,35

63L/4 2D/3D 100 2880 0,93 400 0,25 0,64 Δ 58,19
71S/4 2D/3D 100 2895 1,07 400 0,37 0,71 Δ 39,76
71L/4 2D/3D 100 2905 1,5 400 0,55 0,74 Δ 22,24
80S/4 3D 100 2910 2,0 400 0,75 0,72 Δ 15,79
80L/4 3D 100 2910 2,8 400 1,1 0,74 Δ 10,49
90S/4 3D 100 2925 3,75 400 1,5 0,76 Δ 6,41
90L/4 3D 100 2920 4,96 400 2,2 0,82 Δ 3,99
100L/4 3D 100 2930 6,95 400 3,0 0,78 Δ 2,78
100LA/4 3D 100 2950 7,46 400 4,0 0,76 Δ 1,71
112M/4 3D 100 2945 11,3 400 5,5 0,82 Δ 1,11
132S/4 3D 100 2955 16,0 400 7,5 0,82 Δ 0,72
132M/4 3D 3D 100 2965 19,6 400 9,2 0,79 Δ 0,46
132MA/4 3D 100 2960 23,0 400 11,0 0,8 Δ 0,39
B 1091-1 en-2422 17
243 / 396

Category
80SH/4 2D/3D 50 1415 1,38 400 0,55 0,7 Y 9,34

80LH/4 2D/3D 50 1410 1,8 400 0,75 0,75 Y 6,70
90SH/4 2D/3D 50 1430 2,46 400 1,1 0,8 Y 4,96
90LH/4 2D/3D 50 1420 3,38 400 1,5 0,79 Y 3,27
100LH/4 2D/3D 50 1445 4,76 400 2,2 0,79 Δ* 1,73
100AH/4 2D/3D 50 1420 6,4 400 3,0 0,77 Δ* 4,39
112MH/4 2D/3D 50 1440 8,12 400 4,0 0,83 Δ* 2,96
132SH/4 2D/3D 50 1455 10,82 400 5,5 0,83 Δ* 1,84
132MH/4 2D/3D 50 1455 15,08 400 7,5 0,8 Δ* 1,29
160MH/4 2D/3D 50 1465 20,5 400 11,0 0,85 Δ* 0,78
160LH/4 2D/3D 50 1465 27,5 400 15,0 0,87 Δ* 0,53
180MH/4 2D/3D 50 1475 34,9 400 18,5 0,84 Δ* 0,36
180LH/4 2D/3D 50 1475 40,8 400 22,0 0,86 Δ* 0,31
*) at 400/690V (at 230/400 V circuit type Y); RStY=RStΔ/3

Category
Motor fN nN IN UN PN Circuit RSt

cos φ
type [Hz] [min-1] [A] [V] [kW] (230/400V) [Ω]
80SH/4 2D/3D 50 1415 2,39 230 0,55 0,7 Δ 9,34

80LH/4 2D/3D 50 1410 3,12 230 0,75 0,75 Δ 6,70
90SH/4 2D/3D 50 1430 4,26 230 1,1 0,8 Δ 4,96
90LH/4 2D/3D 50 1420 5,85 230 1,5 0,79 Δ 3,27
100LH/4 2D/3D 50 1445 8,25 230 2,2 0,79 Δ 1,73
100AH/4 2D/3D 50 1420 11,1 230 3,0 0,77 Δ 1,48
112MH/4 2D/3D 50 1440 14,1 230 4,0 0,83 Δ 1,00
132SH/4 2D/3D 50 1455 18,8 230 5,5 0,83 Δ 0,60
132MH/4 2D/3D 50 1455 26,2 230 7,5 0,8 Δ 0,42
160MH/4 2D/3D 50 1465 35,5 230 11,0 0,85 Δ 0,26
160LH/4 2D/3D 50 1465 48,0 230 15,0 0,87 Δ 0,17
180MH/4 2D/3D 50 1475 60,8 230 18,5 0,84 Δ 0,12
180LH/4 2D/3D 50 1475 71,0 230 22,0 0,86 Δ 0,10
18 B 1091-1 en-2422
244 / 396

80SH/4 2D/3D 100 2930 1,9 400 0,75 0,7 Δ 9,34

80LH/4 2D/3D 100 2920 2,56 400 1,1 0,73 Δ 6,7
90SH/4 2D/3D 100 2930 3,53 400 1,5 0,79 Δ 4,96
90LH/4 2D/3D 100 2925 4,98 400 2,2 0,79 Δ 3,27
100LH/4 2D/3D 100 2955 6,47 400 3,0 0,78 Δ 1,73
100AH/4 2D/3D 100 2940 8,24 400 4,0 0,79 Δ 1,48
112MH/4 2D/3D 100 2950 11,13 400 5,5 0,82 Δ 1,0
132SH/4 2D/3D 100 2960 15,3 400 7,5 0,83 Δ 0,6
132MH/4 2D/3D 100 2965 19,5 400 9,2 0,79 Δ 0,42
160MH/4 2D/3D 100 2967 29,0 400 15,0 0,87 Δ 0,256
160LH/4 2D/3D 100 2975 35,7 400 18,5 0,86 Δ 0,168
180MH/4 2D/3D 100 2980 43,2 400 22 0,85 Δ 0,115
180LH/4 2D/3D 100 2980 55,5 400 30 0,88 Δ 0,306

Category
63SP 2D/3D 50 1342 0,41 400 0,12 0,70 Y 66,61

63LP 2D/3D 50 1373 0,58 400 0,18 0,66 Y 38,28
71SP 2D/3D 50 1408 0,7 400 0,25 0,73 Y 24,15
71LP 2D/3D 50 1397 0,93 400 0,37 0,78 Y 18,13
80SP 2D/3D 50 1402 1,42 400 0,55 0,75 Y 10,65
80LP 2D/3D 50 1414 1,78 400 0,75 0,75 Y 6,30
90SP 2D/3D 50 1429 2,45 400 1,1 0,79 Y 4,22
90LP 2D/3D 50 1414 3,24 400 1,5 0,81 Y 3,08
100LP 2D/3D 50 1460 4,5 400 2,2 0,81 Y 1,97
100AP 2D/3D 50 1454 6,25 400 3 0,81 Y 1,60
112MP 2D/3D 50 1440 7,94 400 4 0,84 Y* 0,90*
132SP 2D/3D 50 1465 11,24 400 5,5 0,79 Y* 0,497*
132MP 2D/3D 50 1458 15,49 400 7,5 0,79 Y* 0,367*
160SP 2D/3D 50 1474 16,95 400 9,2 0,86 Y* 0,307*
160MP 2D/3D 50 1467 20,39 400 11 0,85 Y* 0,27*
160LP 2D/3D 50 1467 27,5 400 15 0,87 Y* 0,178*
180MP 2D/3D 50 1480 34,8 400 18,5 0,83 Y* 0,103*
180LP 2D/3D 50 1475 40,83 400 22 0,85 Y* 0,10*
B 1091-1 en-2422 19
245 / 396
*) at 230/400 V (at 400/690 V circuit type ∆); RSt∆=RStY x 3
20 B 1091-1 en-2422
246 / 396

63SP 2D/3D 50 1342 0,71 230 0,12 0,70 Δ 66,61

63LP 2D/3D 50 1373 1 230 0,18 0,66 Δ 38,28
71SP 2D/3D 50 1408 1,21 230 0,25 0,73 Δ 24,15
71LP 2D/3D 50 1397 1,61 230 0,37 0,78 Δ 18,13
80SP 2D/3D 50 1402 2,46 230 0,55 0,75 Δ 10,65
80LP 2D/3D 50 1414 3,08 230 0,75 0,75 Δ 6,30
90SP 2D/3D 50 1429 4,24 230 1,1 0,79 Δ 4,22
90LP 2D/3D 50 1414 5,61 230 1,5 0,81 Δ 3,08
100LP 2D/3D 50 1460 7,79 230 2,2 0,81 Δ 1,97
100AP 2D/3D 50 1454 10,83 230 3 0,81 Δ 1,60
112MP 2D/3D 50 1440 13,75 230 4 0,84 Δ 0,91
132SP 2D/3D 50 1465 19,47 230 5,5 0,79 Δ 0,487
132MP 2D/3D 50 1458 26,83 230 7,5 0,79 Δ 0,371
160SP 2D/3D 50 1474 29,36 230 9,2 0,86 Δ 0,30
160MP 2D/3D 50 1467 35,32 230 11 0,85 Δ 0,261
160LP 2D/3D 50 1467 47,63 230 15 0,87 Δ 0,167
180MP 2D/3D 50 1480 60,28 230 18,5 0,83 Δ 0,103
180LP 2D/3D 50 1475 70,72 230 22 0,85 Δ 0,097
B 1091-1 en-2422 21
247 / 396

63SP 2D/3D 100 2885 0,55 400 0,18 0,65 Δ 66,61

63LP 2D/3D 100 2905 0,84 400 0,25 0,56 Δ 38,28
71SP 2D/3D 100 2923 1,01 400 0,37 0,69 Δ 24,15
71LP 2D/3D 100 2900 1,33 400 0,55 0,74 Δ 18,13
80SP 2D/3D 100 2935 1,77 400 0,75 0,73 Δ 10,65
80LP 2D/3D 100 2930 2,13 400 1,1 0,84 Δ 6,30
90SP 2D/3D 100 2945 3,1 400 1,5 0,79 Δ 4,22
90LP 2D/3D 100 2930 4,33 400 2,2 0,83 Δ 3,08
100LP 2D/3D 100 2970 5,6 400 3 0,85 Δ 1,97
100AP 2D/3D 100 2970 7,42 400 4 0,85 Δ 1,60
112MP 2D/3D 100 2950 10,3 400 5,5 0,85 Δ 0,91
132SP 2D/3D 100 2970 14,3 400 7,5 0,83 Δ 0,487
132MP 2D/3D 100 2970 18 400 9,2 0,82 Δ 0,371
160SP 2D/3D 100 2975 21 400 11 0,85 Δ 0,30
160MP 2D/3D 100 2970 27,5 400 15 0,86 Δ 0,261
160LP 2D/3D 100 2975 34,4 400 18,5 0,85 Δ 0,167
180MP 2D/3D 100 2985 40,6 400 22 0,85 Δ 0,103
180LP 2D/3D 100 2980 55 400 30 0,88 Δ 0,097
22 B 1091-1 en-2422
248 / 396
2 Technical data (characteristic curve data)
Data:
Motor type: IE1, IE2 and IE3
Mains voltage: 400 V Circuit: see tables
Surface temperature: T125°C / T140°C Ambient temperature Tu: -20 °C to +40 °C
2.1 Self-cooled motors
Information
Increased ambient temperature for category 3D motors IE1 and IE2
Operation is possible up to an ambient temperature of 60°C. The stated torques must then be
reduced to 72%.
Information
Interpolation
Linear interpolation of data between adjacent frequencies is permissible.
Legend
fS Stator frequency M Torque M Torque n Speed
[Hz] in hertz [Nm] In Newton metres [%] in % of nominal torque [rpm] Speed in rpm
P Motor power Us Motor voltage Is Motor current
[kW] in kilowatts [V] in volts [A] in amps
B 1091-1 en-2422 23
249 / 396
2.1.1 IE1 motors
2.1.1.1 IE1 motors, 50 Hz nominal point, Size 63S/4 to71L/4 for category 2D and 3D
Motor type
Voltage 3 20 40 60 100 fs [Hz]
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
0,65 0,86 0,86 0,86 0,54 M [Nm]

63S/4 0 450 1073 1484 1805 n [min-1]
0 0,04 0,1 0,13 0,1 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 80 187 347 363 361 Us [V]
Y 0,45 0,48 0,52 0,48 0,65 Is [A]
0,71 1,26 1,26 1,26 0,74 M [Nm]

63L/4 0 438 1060 1428 1886 n [min-1]
0 0,06 0,14 0,19 0,15 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 65 185 352 361 360 Us [V]
Y 0,5 0,61 0,66 0,71 0,8 Is [A]
1,15 1,76 1,76 1,56 0,72 M [Nm]

71S/4 0 441 1059 1448 2469 n [min-1]
0 0,08 0,2 0,24 0,19 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 62 187 342 356 357 Us [V]
Y 0,54 0,72 0,72 0,88 0,79 Is [A]
1,81 2,55 2,57 2,38 1,22 M [Nm]

71L/4 0 461 1069 1481 2312 n [min-1]
0 0,12 0,29 0,37 0,3 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 57 181 329 344 343 Us [V]
Y 0,83 1,02 1,04 1,24 1,3 Is [A]
24 B 1091-1 en-2422
250 / 396
2.1.1.2 IE1 motors, 50 Hz nominal point, Size 80S/4 to 132M/4 for category 3D
Motor type For the circuit, please refer to 1.7

Frequency inverter power and nominal current
Motor power in [kW] at 50 Hz (upper value) and 100 Hz (lower value)
3 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 fs [Hz]
0,55 kW 0,48 1,6 2,0 2,9 3,4 3,8 3,5 3,2 2,7 2,3 2,0 1,6 M [Nm]
80S/4 1,6 A 42 52 76 89 99 91 82 71 59 52 42 M [%]
0,43 30 150 463 765 1.061 1.314 1.604 1.837 2.073 2.296 2.529 n [min-1]
0,75 kW 0,67 2,1 3,1 4,0 4,7 5,2 4,7 4,4 3,8 3,2 2,8 2,3 M [Nm]
80L/4 2,2 A 40 60 77 90 100 90 85 73 62 54 45 M [%]
0,63 26 166 471 769 1.091 1377 1.614 1.864 2.108 2.348 2.564 n [min-1]
1,1 kW 1,01 3,5 5,4 6,6 7,3 7,6 7,0 6,4 5,6 5,1 4,3 3,9 M [Nm]
90S/4 3,0 A 46 71 87 96 100 92 84 73 68 57 51 M [%]
1,06 10 207 503 800 1.032 1.379 1.626 1.875 2.096 2.372 2.606 n [min-1]
1,5 kW 1,31 4,3 5,8 7,8 9,0 9,5 9,0 8,3 7,2 6,5 5,6 4,9 M [Nm]
90L/4 3,7 A 42 56 76 87 92 87 80 70 63 54 47 M [%]
1,37 0 196 495 790 1.091 1.388 1.654 1.909 2.173 2.437 2.695 n [min-1]
2,2 kW 1,92 5,5 9,5 12,1 13,6 14,3 13,1 12,2 10,8 9,9 8,3 7,4 M [Nm]
100L/4 5,5 A 38 66 84 95 99 91 84 75 69 58 51 M [%]
2,17 0 207 488 805 1.106 1.408 1.715 2.010 2.234 2.523 2.807 n [min-1]
3 kW 2,61 10,7 13,6 16,4 18,0 18,9 17,7 15,6 13,2 11,4 10,0 8,3 M [Nm]
100LA/4
7,0 A 53 67 81 89 93 87 77 65 56 49 41 M [%]
T140°C 2,39 12 256 541 833 1.140 1.410 1.681 1.940 2.233 2.490 2.760 n [min-1]
4 kW 3,52 13,2 18,1 21,9 24,0 25,5 23,8 21,1 18,0 15,9 14,0 12,1 M [Nm]
112M/4 9,5 A 50 69 83 91 97 90 80 68 60 53 46 M [%]
3,51 17 237 529 824 1.120 1.414 1.689 1.963 2.236 2.506 2.775 n [min-1]
5,5 kW 5,04 22,0 25,8 30,0 34,0 36,2 33,7 29,6 25,5 21,9 18,4 16,1 M [Nm]
132S/4 12,5 A 61 71 83 94 100 93 82 71 60 51 45 M [%]
4,78 44 240 536 832 1.130 1.428 1.714 1.995 2.276 2.556 2.834 n [min-1]
7,5 kW 6,66 30,0 35,0 41,0 47,1 49,5 44,5 39,3 32,2 27,7 23,8 20,5 M [Nm]
132M/4 16,0 A 60 70 82 94 99 89 79 64 55 48 41 M [%]
6,06 62 241 538 837 1.133 1.431 1.713 1.967 2.268 2.551 2.828 n [min-1]
B 1091-1 en-2422 25
251 / 396
Motor type
Voltage 3 20 40 100 fs [Hz]
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
0,65 0,86 0,86 0,86 M [Nm]

63S/4 0 450 1073 2741 n [min-1]
0 0,04 0,1 0,25 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 46 108 200 358 Us [V]
Δ 0,78 0,82 0,89 0,81 Is [A]
0,71 1,26 1,26 1,26 M [Nm]

63L/4 0 438 1060 2719 n [min-1]
0 0,06 0,14 0,36 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 38 107 203 361 Us [V]
Δ 0,87 1,06 1,15 1,1 Is [A]
1,15 1,76 1,76 1,88 M [Nm]

71S/4 0 441 1059 2661 n [min-1]
0 0,08 0,2 0,52 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 36 108 198 356 Us [V]
Δ 0,94 1,25 1,25 1,63 Is [A]
1,81 2,55 2,57 2,56 M [Nm]

71L/4 0 461 1069 2770 n [min-1]
0 0,12 0,29 0,74 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 33 104 190 342 Us [V]
Δ 1,43 1,77 1,8 2,12 Is [A]
26 B 1091-1 en-2422
252 / 396

3 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 fs [Hz]
1,1 kW 0,55 1,9 2,3 3,0 3,4 3,7 3,9 3,9 3,9 3,8 3,6 3,5 M [Nm]
80S/4 3,0 A 0.93 50 60 79 89 97 102 102 102 99 94 92 M [%]
1,03 0 164 440 757 1.052 1.351 1.638 1.947 2.237 2.457 2.814 n [min-1]
1,5 kW 0,78 2,9 3,3 4,2 4,7 5,0 5,4 5,6 5,7 5,5 5,3 5,0 M [Nm]
80L/4 3,7 A 1,36 56 63 81 90 96 104 108 110 106 102 95 M [%]
1,46 0 207 493 792 1.086 1.377 1.668 1.970 2.256 2.439 2.813 n [min-1]
2,2 kW 1,10 4,3 5,0 6,3 7,0 7,6 7,7 7,6 7,6 7,4 7,0 6,8 M [Nm]
90S/4 5,5 A 1,83 57 66 83 92 100 101 100 100 98 92 90 M [%]
2,03 0 192 482 778 1.070 1.370 1.675 1.978 2.270 2.489 2.833 n [min-1]
3 kW 1,39 4,1 5,4 7,3 8,5 9,3 9,6 9,9 9,9 9,8 9,1 8,6 M [Nm]
90L/4 7,0 A 2,38 40 52 71 83 90 93 96 96 95 88 83 M [%]
2,56 73 179 487 789 1.085 1.387 1.684 1.988 2.284 2.497 2.863 n [min-1]
4 kW 2,10 7,3 11,0 12,6 13,7 14,2 14,2 14,2 14,2 13,5 12,8 12,3 M [Nm]
100L/4 9,5 A 3,37 51 76 88 95 99 99 99 99 94 89 86 M [%]
3,73 0 207 520 809 1.106 1.409 1.709 2.008 2.307 2.518 2.887 n [min-1]
5,5 kW 2,98 11,3 14,1 17,2 18,6 19,6 19,8 20,2 20,0 18,8 18,0 17,6 M [Nm]
100LA/4
12,5 A 4,72 56 69 85 92 96 97 99 98 93 89 86 M [%]
T140°C 5,27 7 229 524 819 1.116 1.413 1.713 2.014 2.304 2.505 2.869 n [min-1]
7,5 kW 4,01 12,4 18,6 22,6 24,7 26,2 26,9 26,9 26,0 25,1 23,8 22,4 M [Nm]
112M/4 16,0 A 6,50 47 71 86 94 99 102 102 98 95 90 85 M [%]
6,79 34 244 535 830 1.126 1.425 1.725 2.024 2.325 2.609 2.890 n [min-1]
11 kW 5,75 20,7 25,9 31,0 34,9 36,7 38,2 38,5 38,3 36,8 34,3 29,7 M [Nm]
132S/4 24,0 A 9,14 57 71 86 96 101 105 106 106 102 95 82 M [%]
9,06 49 241 541 839 1.139 1.437 1.737 2.037 2.335 2.544 2.918 n [min-1]
15 kW 7,55 20,0 31,0 40,0 45,0 47,7 50,3 50,5 50,0 48,9 45,5 39,0 M [Nm]
132M/4 31,0 A 12,1 40 62 80 90 95 101 101 100 98 91 78 M [%]
11,91 18 244 541 837 1.137 1.434 1.734 2.034 2.332 2.540 2.916 n [min-1]
B 1091-1 en-2422 27
253 / 396
Motor type
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
0,55 0,61 0,61 0,6 M [Nm]

63S/4 0 500 1097 2835 n [min-1]
0 0,03 0,07 0,18 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 42 100 178 349 Us [V]
Δ 0,7 0,74 0,76 0,68 Is [A]
0,56 0,83 0,83 0,83 M [Nm]

63L/4 0 488 1088 2844 n [min-1]
0 0,04 0,09 0,25 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 32 94 170 349 Us [V]
Δ 0,73 0,89 0,91 0,88 Is [A]
0,92 1,22 1,22 1,22 M [Nm]

71S/4 0 474 1081 2832 n [min-1]
0 0,06 0,14 0,36 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 32 94 172 357 Us [V]
Δ 0,83 0,97 1,01 1,1 Is [A]
1,53 1,82 1,81 1,81 M [Nm]

71L/4 0 479 1087 2830 n [min-1]
0 0,09 0,21 0,54 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 30 91 168 342 Us [V]
Δ 1,3 1,44 1,46 1,51 Is [A]
28 B 1091-1 en-2422
254 / 396

3 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 fs [Hz]
0,75 kW 0,39 1,8 2,3 2,5 2,6 2,6 2,6 2,6 2,5 2,5 2,4 2,2 M [Nm]
80S/4 2,2 A 48 61 64 68 68 68 67 66 66 62 57 M [%]
0,67 0 163 410 810 1.108 1.416 1.712 2.028 2.344 2.627 2.910 n [min-1]
1,1 kW 0,53 3,0 3,3 3,6 3,6 3,6 3,6 3,6 3,6 3,5 3,4 3,2 M [Nm]
80L/4 3,0 A 58 63 69 69 69 69 69 69 67 66 62 M [%]
0,99 0 196 505 812 1.116 1.414 1.715 2.015 2.313 2.611 2.908 n [min-1]
1,5 kW 0,75 4,2 4,9 4,9 4,9 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 4,9 4,6 M [Nm]
90S/4 3,7 A 55 64 64 64 66 66 66 66 66 65 60 M [%]
1,40 0 183 516 822 1.120 1.425 1.725 2.025 2.321 2.620 2.911 n [min-1]
2,2 kW 1,06 4,0 5,6 7,2 7,2 7,2 7,2 7,2 7,2 7,1 6,9 6,6 M [Nm]
90L/4 5,5 A 39 54 70 70 70 70 70 70 69 67 64 M [%]
2,00 20 192 484 799 1.098 1.406 1.707 2.008 2.309 2.606 2.905 n [min-1]
3 kW 1,51 8,4 9,1 9,9 10,1 10,1 10,1 9,9 9,7 9,7 9,2 8,7 M [Nm]
100L/4 7,0 A 58 63 69 70 70 70 69 67 67 64 61 M [%]
2,68 25 205 524 829 1.132 1.429 1.736 2.036 2.335 2.631 2.927 n [min-1]
4 kW 1,99 6,6 11,3 13,1 13,2 13,2 13,2 13,2 13,3 13,3 12,6 12,0 M [Nm]
100LA/4
9,5 A 32 56 64 65 65 65 65 65 66 62 59 M [%]
T140°C 3,69 20 200 530 834 1.130 1.442 1.734 2.028 2.332 2.639 2.944 n [min-1]
5,5 kW 2,72 14,4 17,0 18,0 18,0 18,0 18,0 18,0 18,0 18,0 17,3 16,3 M [Nm]
112M/4 12,5 A 54 64 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 65 62 M [%]
5,02 36 233 539 840 1.142 1.442 1.742 2.042 2.341 2.640 2.933 n [min-1]
7,5 kW 3,63 20,6 22,0 24,3 24,3 24,3 24,3 24,3 24,3 24,3 24,3 24,3 M [Nm]
132S/4 16,0 A 57 61 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 M [%]
7,42 36 227 530 828 1.124 1.425 1.724 2.023 2.324 2.623 2.918 n [min-1]
11 kW 5,32 17,2 28,9 35,7 35,7 35,7 35,7 35,7 35,7 35,7 35,7 35,7 M [Nm]
132M/4 24,0 A 34 58 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 M [%]
10,9 16 233 530 826 1.125 1.423 1.723 2.022 2.321 2.625 2.916 n [min-1]
B 1091-1 en-2422 29
255 / 396
2.1.2 IE2 motors
2.1.2.1 IE2 motors, 50 Hz nominal point, Size 80SH/4 to 180LH/4 for category 2D and 3D
Motor type
Voltage 3 20 40 60 100 fs [Hz]
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
2,64 3,74 3,73 3,71 1,83 M [Nm]

80SH/4 15 516 1118 1628 2551 n [min-1]
0 0,2 0,44 0,63 0,49 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 38 174 328 368 352 Us [V]
Y 1,11 1,4 1,41 1,61 1,75 Is [A]
3,33 4,92 5,08 4,84 2,51 M [Nm]

80LH/4 10 508 1105 1596 2549 n [min-1]
0 0,26 0,59 0,81 0,67 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 36 172 333 363 363 Us [V]
Y 1,38 1,77 1,81 2,13 2,22 Is [A]
0,97 5,52 6,83 5,72 3,11 M [Nm]

90SH/4 76 540 1127 1676 2763 n [min-1]
0,01 0,31 0,81 1 0,9 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 29 168 332 361 362 Us [V]
Y 1,29 2,06 2,36 2,43 2,49 Is [A]
5,99 9,75 10,22 10,07 5,43 M [Nm]

90LH/4 33 521 1115 1605 2603 n [min-1]
0,02 0,53 1,19 1,69 1,48 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 35 173 338 361 361 Us [V]
Y 2,38 3,28 3,33 4,19 4,31 Is [A]
2,38 14,6 14,79 12,08 6,96 M [Nm]

100LH/4 80 545 1143 1704 2818 n [min-1]
0,02 0,83 1,77 2,16 2,05 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 27 171 334 360 361 Us [V]
Y 2,8 4,84 4,82 4,89 4,9 Is [A]
9,8 19,31 20,19 18,21 10,14 M [Nm]

100AH/4 49 528 1122 1646 2690 n [min-1]
0,05 1,07 2,37 3,14 2,86 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 32 172 336 363 363 Us [V]
Y 4,17 6,15 6,41 7,08 7,36 Is [A]
16,56 24,27 26,49 21,76 11,92 M [Nm]

112MH/4 47 543 1139 1683 2774 n [min-1]
0,08 1,38 3,16 3,83 3,46 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 33 170 338 349 349 Us [V]
Y 5,78 7,63 8,31 9 9,2 Is [A]
30 B 1091-1 en-2422
256 / 396
Motor type
Voltage 3 20 40 60 100 fs [Hz]
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
26,8 36 36 30,9 15,86 M [Nm]

132SH/4 57 558 1158 1712 2827 n [min-1]
0,16 2,11 4,37 5,53 4,7 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 33 172 338 345 344 Us [V]
Y 8,63 10,76 10,73 12,97 13,12 Is [A]
30,6 48,54 49,17 41,8 21,15 M [Nm]

132MH/4 62 559 1158 1720 2845 n [min-1]
0,2 2,84 5,96 7,53 6,3 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 31 169 337 350 341 Us [V]
Y 10,94 15 15,6 16,9 16,9 Is [A]
28,8 56,57 60,9 53,3 27,5 M [Nm]

132LH/4 68 556 1151 1704 2830 n [min-1]
0,21 3,29 7,34 9,5 8,15 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 29 168 333 354 355 Us [V]
Y 11,95 18,2 19,7 21 20,2 Is [A]
48,8 64,3 72 58,4 32,8 M [Nm]

160MH/4 67 564 1159 1739 2885 n [min-1]
0,34 3,8 8,75 10,6 9,9 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 30 155 308 351 352 Us [V]
Y 15,2 19,5 21,9 22,7 23,4 Is [A]
66,9 97,3 97,3 85,3 48 M [Nm]

160LH/4 2D TF 65 566 1167 1735 2875 n [min-1]
0,46 5,78 11,9 15,5 14,5 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 28 167 336 350 350 Us [V]
Y 21,1 27,8 27,8 32,2 33,2 Is [A]
79,9 121 120 102 51,7 M [Nm]

180MH/4 64 575 1176 1752 2908 n [min-1]
0,54 7,3 14,7 18,8 15,7 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 25 164 334 347 349 Us [V]
Y 28,7 37,5 36,2 41,6 41,1 Is [A]
102 142 142 117 54,6 M [Nm]

180LH/4 68 573 1173 1749 2926 n [min-1]
0,73 8,54 17,5 21,6 16,7 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 28 166 325 341 342 Us [V]
Y 32,3 40,6 40,8 47 41 Is [A]
B 1091-1 en-2422 31
257 / 396
Motor type
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
2,64 3,74 3,73 3,74 M [Nm]

80SH/4 15 516 1118 2840 n [min-1]
0 0,2 0,44 1,11 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 22 100 190 355 Us [V]
Δ 1,92 2,42 2,44 2,77 Is [A]
3,33 4,92 5,08 5,1 M [Nm]

80LH/4 10 508 1105 2803 n [min-1]
0 0,26 0,59 1,5 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 21 99 192 357 Us [V]
Δ 2,38 3,06 3,14 3,69 Is [A]
0,97 5,52 6,83 5,96 M [Nm]

90SH/4 76 540 1127 2882 n [min-1]
0,01 0,31 0,81 1,8 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 17 97 192 358 Us [V]
Δ 2,24 3,57 4,08 4,25 Is [A]
6 9,75 10,2 10,1 M [Nm]

90LH/4 33 521 1115 2822 n [min-1]
0,02 0,53 1,19 2,98 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 20 100 195 357 Us [V]
Δ 4,13 5,68 5,77 7,08 Is [A]
2,38 14,6 14,8 12,56 M [Nm]

100LH/4 80 545 1143 2905 n [min-1]
0,02 0,83 1,77 3,82 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 16 99 193 359 Us [V]
Δ 4,85 8,39 8,35 8,5 Is [A]
9,8 19,3 20,2 20,2 M [Nm]

100AH/4 49 528 1122 2840 n [min-1]
0,05 1,07 2,37 6 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 18 99 194 357 Us [V]
Δ 7,22 10,6 11,1 13 Is [A]
16,5 24,3 26,5 22,5 M [Nm]

112MH/4 47 543 1139 2884 n [min-1]
0,08 1,38 3,16 6,8 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 19 98 195 341 Us [V]
Δ 10 13,2 14,4 15,8 Is [A]
32 B 1091-1 en-2422
258 / 396
Motor type
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
26,8 36,1 36,1 31 M [Nm]

132SH/4 57 558 1158 2915 n [min-1]
0,16 2,11 4,37 9,46 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 19 99 195 338 Us [V]
Δ 14,9 18,65 18,6 22,15 Is [A]
30,6 48,5 49,17 39,5 M [Nm]

132MH/4 62 559 1158 2921 n [min-1]
0,2 2,84 5,96 12,1 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 18 98 195 332 Us [V]
Δ 18,95 26 27 28,4 Is [A]
28,8 56,6 60,9 48 M [Nm]

132LH/4 68 556 1151 2927 n [min-1]
0,21 3,29 7,34 14,7 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 17 97 192 353 Us [V]
Δ 20,7 31,5 34,1 31,5 Is [A]
48,8 64,3 72,1 56,9 M [Nm]

160MH/4 67 564 1159 2944 n [min-1]
0,34 3,8 8,75 17,5 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 17 89 178 348 Us [V]
Δ 26,4 33,9 37,9 37,2 Is [A]
66,9 97,4 97,4 82,4 M [Nm]

160LH/4 65 566 1167 2939 n [min-1]
0,46 5,78 11,9 25,4 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 16 96 194 344 Us [V]
Δ 36,5 48,1 48,2 53,4 Is [A]
79,9 121 120 93,6 M [Nm]

180MH/4 64 575 1176 2957 n [min-1]
0,54 7,3 14,8 29 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 14 95 193 343 Us [V]
Δ 49,8 65,1 62,7 65,8 Is [A]
102 142 142,8 96,8 M [Nm]

180LH/4 68 573 1173 2963 n [min-1]
0,73 8,54 17,5 30 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 16 96 188 335 Us [V]
Δ 56 70,4 70,7 65,4 Is [A]
B 1091-1 en-2422 33
259 / 396
Motor type
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
1,99 2,45 2,45 2,46 M [Nm]

80SH/4 29 534 1134 2913 n [min-1]
0,01 0,14 0,29 0,75 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 19 87 167 362 Us [V]
Δ 1,63 1,89 1,91 1,95 Is [A]
2,17 3,59 3,6 3,6 M [Nm]

80LH/4 0 511 1115 2886 n [min-1]
0 0,19 0,42 1,09 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 16 84 163 350 Us [V]
Δ 1,91 2,54 2,55 2,73 Is [A]
0,97 4,92 4,89 4,9 M [Nm]

90SH/4 76 529 1131 2902 n [min-1]
0,01 0,27 0,58 1,49 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 17 85 164 343 Us [V]
Δ 2,24 3,39 3,39 3,78 Is [A]
4,3 7,21 7,17 7,14 M [Nm]

90LH/4 0 518 1120 2913 n [min-1]
0 0,39 0,84 2,18 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 16 84 164 347 Us [V]
Δ 3,7 4,74 4,94 5,25 Is [A]
2,38 9,71 9,65 9,67 M [Nm]

100LH/4 80 551 1152 2934 n [min-1]
0,02 0,56 1,16 2,97 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 16 83 164 348 Us [V]
Δ 4,85 6,46 6,62 6,98 Is [A]
9,29 12,96 13,11 13 M [Nm]

100AH/4 0 535 1136 2932 n [min-1]
0 0,73 1,56 4 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 20 84 164 347 Us [V]
Δ 7,54 8,47 8,7 9,37 Is [A]
16,56 17,85 17,85 17,8 M [Nm]

112MH/4 47 548 1147 2915 n [min-1]
0,08 1,02 2,14 5,44 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 19 89 173 345 Us [V]
Δ 10,01 9,53 9,46 12,35 Is [A]
34 B 1091-1 en-2422
260 / 396
Motor type
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
24,3 24,2 24,2 24,2 M [Nm]

132SH/4 51 563 1163 2939 n [min-1]
0,13 1,43 2,95 7,45 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 18 88 167 342 Us [V]
Δ 13,8 14,6 14,6 17,2 Is [A]
29,7 29,6 29,6 29,7 M [Nm]

132MH/4 50 568 1167 2946 n [min-1]
0,16 1,76 3,62 9,15 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 16 84 166 335 Us [V]
Δ 18,2 17,4 16,95 20,1 Is [A]
28,81 35,4 35,5 35,3 M [Nm]

132LH/4 68 564 1163 2947 n [min-1]
0,21 2,09 4,32 10,9 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 17 84 164 340 Us [V]
Δ 20,7 22,1 21,6 21,4 Is [A]
48,4 48,4 48,3 48,2 M [Nm]

160MH/4 58 564 1164 2954 n [min-1]
0,29 2,86 5,88 14,9 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 15 77 151 347 Us [V]
Δ 27,1 29,2 25,1 32,1 Is [A]
59,5 59,7 59,4 59 M [Nm]

160LH/4 55 574 1173 2959 n [min-1]
0,34 3,59 7,3 18,3 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 14 82 163 346 Us [V]
Δ 35,5 32,9 31,9 37,3 Is [A]
70,7 70,5 69,8 70,8 M [Nm]

180MH/4 69 582 1181 2969 n [min-1]
0,51 4,29 8,63 22 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 14 85 163 344 Us [V]
Δ 42,2 41,2 38,6 36 Is [A]
95,9 94,5 96,3 96,4 M [Nm]

180LH/4 54 576 1176 2965 n [min-1]
0,54 5,7 11,9 29,9 P [kW]

230/400V, 50 Hz 15 82 162 337 Us [V]
Δ 65,5 53,6 54,6 65,7 Is [A]
B 1091-1 en-2422 35
261 / 396
2.1.3 IE3 Motors
2.1.3.1 IE3 motors, 50 Hz nominal point, Size 63SP/4 to 180LP/4 for category 2D and 3D
Motor type
Voltage 3 20 50 70 100 fs [Hz]
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
0,38 0,83 0,84 0,79 0,49 M [Nm]

63SP/4 0 445 1290 1555 2035 n [min-1]
0 0,038 0,11 0,13 0,11 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 48 181 350 350 348 Us [V]
Y 0,27 0,39 0,39 0,48 0,50 Is [A]
0,81 1,10 1,24 1,16 0,79 M [Nm]

63LP/4 0 484 1321 1682 2270 n [min-1]
0 0,056 0,17 0,21 0,19 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 50 174 350 349 349 Us [V]
Y 0,46 0,54 0,56 0,66 0,69 Is [A]
0,73 1,69 1,70 1,54 1,00 M [Nm]

71SP/4 41 506 1368 1808 2521 n [min-1]
0 0,089 0,24 0,29 0,26 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 37 174 348 349 349 Us [V]
Y 0,47 0,69 0,71 0,86 0,89 Is [A]
1,26 2,39 2,52 2,08 1,39 M [Nm]

71LP/4 10 496 1351 1810 2516 n [min-1]
0 0,12 0,36 0,39 0,37 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 38 174 354 352 351 Us [V]
Y 0,61 0,89 0,97 1,11 1,16 Is [A]
0,94 3,30 3,83 2,71 1,60 M [Nm]

80SP/4 60 514 1351 1852 2557 n [min-1]
0,01 0,18 0,54 0,53 0,43 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 31 171 349 349 350 Us [V]
Y 0,77 1,28 1,53 1,56 1,60 Is [A]
3,04 4,51 5,06 3,57 2,20 M [Nm]

80LP/4 20 520 1371 1880 2617 n [min-1]
0,006 0,25 0,73 0,70 0,60 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 34 168 350 346 349 Us [V]
Y 1,29 1,65 1,92 1,96 2,01 Is [A]
36 B 1091-1 en-2422
262 / 396
Motor type
Voltage 3 20 50 70 100 fs [Hz]
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
2,51 7,34 7,37 6,12 4,03 M [Nm]

90SP/4 61 530 1400 1908 2689 n [min-1]
0,02 0,41 1,08 1,22 1,13 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 29 170 347 347 347 Us [V]
Y 1,38 2,41 2,60 3,02 3,13 Is [A]
5,68 10,2 10,1 8,19 5,02 M [Nm]

90LP/4 34 514 1370 1861 2614 n [min-1]
0,02 0,55 1,45 1,60 1,37 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 33 172 348 351 351 Us [V]
Y 2,19 3,12 3,53 4,01 4,07 Is [A]
5,81 14,1 14,4 10,9 6,97 M [Nm]

100LP/4 40 559 1441 2003 2844 n [min-1]
0,02 0,83 2,17 2,29 2,07 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 28 167 343 344 344 Us [V]
Y 2,54 4,40 4,92 5,24 5,34 Is [A]
7,44 19,9 19,6 15,4 9,66 M [Nm]

100AP/4 50 549 1435 1985 2818 n [min-1]
0,04 1,14 2,95 3,21 2,85 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 25 164 349 349 350 Us [V]
Y 3,46 6,19 6,63 7,34 7,31 Is [A]
11,5 25,2 25,7 18,7 11,9 M [Nm]

112MP/4 59 542 1412 1963 2783 n [min-1]
0,07 1,43 3,80 3,84 3,46 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 28 167 342 344 343 Us [V]
Y 4,46 7,51 8,54 8,74 8,82 Is [A]
17,6 34,5 35,4 25,5 16,5 M [Nm]

132SP/4 69 565 1448 2020 2874 n [min-1]
0,13 2,04 5,37 5,38 4,95 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 27 166 343 343 342 Us [V]
Y 6,98 10,9 12,0 12,1 12,1 Is [A]
B 1091-1 en-2422 37
263 / 396
Motor type
Voltage 3 20 50 70 100 fs [Hz]
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
27,7 47,0 49,1 35,8 22,9 M [Nm]

132MP/4 61 559 1435 1997 2838 n [min-1]
0,18 2,75 7,37 7,50 6,80 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 28 165 341 340 340 Us [V]
Y 10,1 14,8 16,5 16,9 16,9 Is [A]
25,8 54,5 55,7 40,2 25,2 M [Nm]

160SP/4 66 570 1460 2044 2920 n [min-1]
0,18 3,25 8,52 8,61 7,71 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 24 161 343 345 344 Us [V]
Y 10,1 16,0 18,1 18,6 18,5 Is [A]
40,3 68,8 67,8 49,5 - M [Nm]

160MP/4 69 568 1453 2030 - n [min-1]
0,29 4,09 10,3 10,5 - P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 28 165 337 339 - Us [V]
Y 13,4 19,6 21,9 22,1 - Is [A]
52,7 88,1 88,4 64,3 42,2 M [Nm]

160LP/4 70 571 1455 2033 2896 n [min-1]
0,39 5,26 13,5 13,7 12,8 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 27 163 337 339 338 Us [V]
Y 17,4 25,1 28,6 29,1 29,3 Is [A]
79,5 120 114 80,5 49,3 M [Nm]

180MP/4 76 580 1471 2056 2935 n [min-1]
0,63 7,26 17,5 17,3 15,2 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 27 164 335 335 336 Us [V]
Y 25,7 35,3 38,0 38,2 36,5 Is [A]
82,8 141 133 93,0 56,6 M [Nm]

180LP/4 68 577 1471 2055 2927 n [min-1]
0,59 8,51 20,5 20,0 17,3 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 24 162 343 344 343 Us [V]
Y 29,4 40,5 43,0 43,6 43,0 Is [A]
38 B 1091-1 en-2422
264 / 396
Motor type
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
0,38 0,83 0,84 0,84 M [Nm]

63SP/4 0 445 2428 2740 n [min-1]
0 0,04 0,21 0,24 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 28 105 351 351 Us [V]
Δ 0,47 0,67 0,67 0,70 Is [A]
0,81 1,10 1,24 1,24 M [Nm]

63LP/4 0 484 2446 2769 n [min-1]
0 0,06 0,32 0,36 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 29 101 351 351 Us [V]
Δ 0,80 0,94 0,98 1,01 Is [A]
0,73 1,69 1,69 1,70 M [Nm]

71SP/4 41 506 2483 2816 n [min-1]
0 0,09 0,44 0,50 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 21 101 348 346 Us [V]
Δ 0,81 1,19 1,24 1,34 Is [A]
1,26 2,39 2,53 2,51 M [Nm]

71LP/4 10 496 2470 2793 n [min-1]
0 0,12 0,65 0,73 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 22 101 350 349 Us [V]
Δ 1,06 1,54 1,67 1,84 Is [A]
0,94 3,30 3,69 3,64 M [Nm]

80SP/4 60 514 2475 2805 n [min-1]
0 0,18 0,96 1,07 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 18 99 348 348 Us [V]
Δ 1,34 2,21 2,55 2,82 Is [A]
3,04 4,51 5,08 4,66 M [Nm]

80LP/4 20 520 2478 2830 n [min-1]
0 0,25 1,32 1,38 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 19 97 347 347 Us [V]
Δ 2,23 2,86 3,39 3,50 Is [A]
B 1091-1 en-2422 39
265 / 396
Motor type
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
2,51 7,34 7,35 7,35 M [Nm]

90SP/4 61 530 2512 2859 n [min-1]
0,02 0,41 1,93 2,20 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 17 98 346 345 Us [V]
Δ 2,38 4,17 4,50 5,12 Is [A]
5,68 10,2 10,1 10,1 M [Nm]

90LP/4 34 514 2483 2816 n [min-1]
0,02 0,55 2,63 2,99 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 19 99 346 348 Us [V]
Δ 3,79 5,40 6,05 6,87 Is [A]
5,81 14,1 14,4 13,4 M [Nm]

100LP/4 40 559 2550 2923 n [min-1]
0,02 0,83 3,84 4,11 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 16 97 341 342 Us [V]
Δ 4,39 7,62 8,57 9,08 Is [A]
7,44 19,9 19,6 19,3 M [Nm]

100AP/4 50 549 2547 2909 n [min-1]
0,04 1,14 5,24 5,88 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 15 95 345 346 Us [V]
Δ 6,00 10,7 11,4 12,7 Is [A]
11,5 25,2 25,8 22,5 M [Nm]

112MP/4 59 542 2520 2893 n [min-1]
0,07 1,43 6,81 6,83 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 16 97 339 341 Us [V]
Δ 7,73 13,0 15,0 15,0 Is [A]
17,6 34,5 33,0 29,3 M [Nm]

132SP/4 69 565 2560 2940 n [min-1]
0,13 2,04 8,84 9,01 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 16 96 339 340 Us [V]
Δ 12,1 18,9 19,9 20,0 Is [A]
40 B 1091-1 en-2422
266 / 396
Motor type
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
27,7 47,0 45,2 40,5 M [Nm]

132MP/4 61 559 2550 2926 n [min-1]
0,18 2,75 12,1 12,4 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 16 95 336 335 Us [V]
Δ 17,5 25,6 26,8 27,2 Is [A]
25,8 54,5 51,9 45,0 M [Nm]

160SP/4 66 570 2582 2962 n [min-1]
0,18 3,25 14,0 14,0 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 14 93 339 340 Us [V]
Δ 17,5 27,7 30,1 30,2 Is [A]
40,3 68,8 61,0 - M [Nm]

160MP/4 69 568 2567 - n [min-1]
0,29 4,09 16,4 - P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 16 95 332 - Us [V]
Δ 23,1 34,0 34,7 - Is [A]
52,7 88,1 82,2 71,4 M [Nm]

160LP/4 70 571 2566 2949 n [min-1]
0,39 5,26 22,1 22,1 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 16 94 331 332 Us [V]
Δ 30,1 43,6 46,9 46,7 Is [A]
79,5 120 98,0 84,4 M [Nm]

180MP/4 76 580 2584 2969 n [min-1]
0,63 7,26 26,5 26,3 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 16 95 328 329 Us [V]
Δ 44,6 61,1 58,1 57,4 Is [A]
82,8 141 116 95,3 M [Nm]

180LP/4 68 577 2585 2972 n [min-1]
0,59 8,51 31,4 29,7 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 14 93 333 334 Us [V]
Δ 50,9 70,1 67,8 64,0 Is [A]
B 1091-1 en-2422 41
267 / 396
Motor type
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
0,49 0,60 0,60 0,60 M [Nm]

63SP/4 0 464 1376 2802 n [min-1]
0 0,03 0,09 0,18 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 31 94 212 347 Us [V]
Δ 0,54 0,58 0,58 0,57 Is [A]
0,59 0,82 0,82 0,82 M [Nm]

63LP/4 0 496 1397 2850 n [min-1]
0 0,04 0,12 0,25 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 23 90 210 352 Us [V]
Δ 0,65 0,81 0,82 0,79 Is [A]
0,88 1,21 1,22 1,21 M [Nm]

71SP/4 0 513 1416 2874 n [min-1]
0 0,07 0,18 0,36 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 21 88 207 349 Us [V]
Δ 0,80 0,99 1,01 1,03 Is [A]
1,12 1,81 1,82 1,81 M [Nm]

71LP/4 0 498 1402 2864 n [min-1]
0 0,09 0,27 0,54 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 18 88 207 351 Us [V]
Δ 0,90 1,32 1,32 1,38 Is [A]
1,58 2,45 2,44 2,45 M [Nm]

80SP/4 0 520 1422 2881 n [min-1]
0 0,13 0,36 0,74 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 19 88 212 349 Us [V]
Δ 1,09 1,86 1,89 2,01 Is [A]
3,59 3,58 3,59 3,61 M [Nm]

80LP/4 0 518 1417 2876 n [min-1]
0 0,19 0,53 1,09 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 20 85 204 347 Us [V]
Δ 2,44 2,55 2,54 2,80 Is [A]
42 B 1091-1 en-2422
268 / 396
Motor type
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
4,01 4,87 4,87 4,87 M [Nm]

90SP/4 0 539 1439 2910 n [min-1]
0 0,27 0,73 1,48 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 17 85 205 347 Us [V]
Δ 3,17 3,29 3,29 3,55 Is [A]
5,70 7,2 7,2 7,2 M [Nm]

90LP/4 0 518 1417 2895 n [min-1]
0 0,39 1,06 2,17 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 18 86 205 347 Us [V]
Δ 4,08 4,59 4,52 5,03 Is [A]
9,46 9,65 9,66 9,67 M [Nm]

100LP/4 2 564 1465 2949 n [min-1]
0 0,57 1,48 2,98 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 18 83 201 341 Us [V]
Δ 8,31 6,11 6,12 6,69 Is [A]
12,9 13,0 12,8 12,9 M [Nm]

100AP/4 15 561 1462 2947 n [min-1]
0 0,76 1,97 3,97 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 19 85 204 346 Us [V]
Δ 9,67 7,95 7,94 8,69 Is [A]
17,8 17,8 17,9 17,8 M [Nm]

112MP/4 5 548 1445 2919 n [min-1]
0 1,02 2,71 5,45 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 17 84 203 340 Us [V]
Δ 12,6 10,6 10,6 12,0 Is [A]
24,1 24,1 24,2 24,1 M [Nm]

132SP/4 46 568 1467 2853 n [min-1]
0,12 1,43 3,72 7,20 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 15 83 202 340 Us [V]
Δ 16,1 15,0 15,1 16,8 Is [A]
B 1091-1 en-2422 43
269 / 396
Motor type
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
29,6 29,6 29,6 29,6 M [Nm]

132MP/4 51 566 1466 2949 n [min-1]
0,16 1,76 4,54 9,15 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 15 83 203 338 Us [V]
Δ 19,3 18,4 18,6 20,3 Is [A]
35,5 35,4 35,3 35,3 M [Nm]

160SP/4 58 581 1483 2980 n [min-1]
0,22 2,15 5,49 11,0 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 15 82 201 340 Us [V]
Δ 23,0 21,2 20,8 24,5 Is [A]
48,4 48,3 48,3 - M [Nm]

160MP/4 42 572 1470 - n [min-1]
0,21 2,89 7,43 - P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 15 83 201 - Us [V]
Δ 32,3 27,4 27,2 - Is [A]
59,5 59,4 59,5 59,5 M [Nm]

160LP/4 53 574 1473 2959 n [min-1]
0,33 3,57 9,18 18,4 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 14 82 201 334 Us [V]
Δ 39,1 34,2 34,1 39,1 Is [A]
70,7 70,5 70,6 70,6 M [Nm]

180MP/4 71 585 1484 2976 n [min-1]
0,53 4,32 11,0 22,0 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 14 81 201 332 Us [V]
Δ 44,4 42,0 41,9 48,2 Is [A]
96,2 96,1 96,1 96,2 M [Nm]

180LP/4 52 580 1484 2978 n [min-1]
0,53 5,84 14,9 30,0 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 14 81 201 338 Us [V]
Δ 66,1 55,0 54,6 64,7 Is [A]
44 B 1091-1 en-2422
270 / 396
2.2 Motors with external fan
Information
Interpolation
Linear interpolation of data between adjacent frequencies is permissible.
Legend
fS Stator frequency M Torque M Torque n Speed
[Hz] in hertz [Nm] In Newton metres [%] in % of nominal torque [rpm] Speed in rpm
P Motor power Us Motor voltage Is Motor current
[kW] in kilowatts [V] in volts [A] in amps
B 1091-1 en-2422 45
271 / 396
2.2.1 IE1 and IE2 motors with external fan, 50 Hz-nominal point, category 3D
3 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 fs [Hz]
0,55 kW 0,11 0,8 0,8 0,8 0,8 0,8 0,8 0,8 0,8 0,7 0,6 0,4 M [Nm]
63S/4 1,6 A 94 94 94 94 94 94 92 90 82 66 50 M [%]
0,09 10 150 375 690 1.010 1.320 1.381 1.441 1.641 1.840 1.932 n [min-1]
0,55 KW 0,17 1,3 1,3 1,3 1,3 1,3 1,3 1,2 1,2 1,1 0,9 0,8 M [Nm]
63L/4 1,6 A 96 96 96 96 96 96 93 91 83 73 61 M [%]
0,18 0 142 419 696 990 1.282 1.458 1.633 1.787 1.941 2.151 n [min-1]
0,55 kW 0,23 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,6 1,5 1,4 1,2 1,1 0,9 M [Nm]
71S/4 1,6 A 100 100 100 100 100 92 87 81 72 61 53 M [%]
0,23 10 150 437 733 1.032 1.364 1.537 1.710 1.939 2.168 2.388 n [min-1]
0,55 kW 0,33 2,4 2,4 2,4 2,4 2,4 2,4 2,2 1,9 1,6 1,4 1,3 M [Nm]
71L/4 1,6 A 92 92 92 92 92 92 83 73 62 55 48 M [%]
0,33 0 128 427 734 1.042 1.339 1.594 1.843 2.092 2.326 2.490 n [min-1]
0,55 kW 0,48 3,5 3,5 3,5 3,5 3,5 3,5 3,2 2,7 2,3 2,0 1,6 M [Nm]
80S/4 1,6 A 91 91 91 91 91 91 82 71 59 52 42 M [%]
0,43 30 150 463 765 1.061 1.314 1.604 1.837 2.073 2.296 2.529 n [min-1]
0,75 kW 0,67 4,7 4,7 4,7 4,7 4,7 4,7 4,4 3,8 3,2 2,8 2,3 M [Nm]
80L/4 2,2 A 90 90 90 90 90 90 85 73 62 54 45 M [%]
0,63 26 166 471 769 1.091 1.377 1.614 1.864 2.108 2.348 2.564 n [min-1]
1,1 kW 1,01 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 6,4 5,6 5,1 4,3 3,9 M [Nm]
90S/4 3,0 A 92 92 92 92 92 92 84 73 68 57 51 M [%]
1,06 10 207 503 800 1.032 1.379 1.626 1.875 2.096 2.372 2.606 n [min-1]
1,5 kW 1,31 9,0 9,0 9,0 9,0 9,0 9,0 8,3 7,2 6,5 5,6 4,9 M [Nm]
90L/4 3,7 A 87 87 87 87 87 87 80 70 63 54 47 M [%]
1,37 0 196 495 790 1.091 1.388 1.654 1.909 2.173 2.437 2.695 n [min-1]
2,2 kW 1,92 13,1 13,1 13,1 13,1 13,1 13,1 12,2 10,8 9,9 8,3 7,4 M [Nm]
100L/4 5,5 A 91 91 91 91 91 91 84 75 69 58 51 M [%]
2,17 0 207 488 805 1.106 1.408 1.715 2.010 2.234 2.523 2.807 n [min-1]
3 kW 2,68 20,3 20,3 20,3 20,3 20,3 18,2 16,1 13,9 12,1 10,1 9,0 M [Nm]
100LA/4
7,0 A 100 100 100 100 100 90 79 69 59 50 44 M [%]
T140°C 2,59 11 172 488 804 1.105 1.406 1.673 1.940 2.214 2.488 2.753 n [min-1]
4 kW 3,57 26,4 26,4 26,4 26,4 26,4 24,0 21,2 18,6 16,0 13,8 12,1 M [Nm]
112M/4 9,5 A 100 100 100 100 100 91 80 70 61 52 46 M [%]
3,53 2 224 402 827 1.123 1.418 1.691 1.967 2.242 2.519 2.793 n [min-1]
5,5 kW 4,88 35,2 36,4 36,4 36,4 35,8 32,3 28,3 23,4 19,5 17,3 14,2 M [Nm]
132S/4 12,5 A 97 100 100 100 98 89 78 64 54 47 39 M [%]
4,28 26 250 551 851 1.153 1.444 1.725 2.010 2.299 2.585 2.876 n [min-1]
7,5 kW 6,83 47,0 49,6 49,6 49,6 49,6 45,2 38,6 31,3 27,1 23,1 20,0 M [Nm]
132M/4 16,0 A 95 100 100 100 100 91 78 63 55 47 40 M [%]
6,03 27 249 551 851 1.151 1.442 1.727 2.011 2.302 2.585 2.875 n [min-1]
11 kW 8,19 57,2 60,8 60,8 60,8 60,8 54,5 46,8 38,8 32,9 28,9 25,1 M [Nm]
132MA/4
24,0 A 94 100 100 100 100 90 77 64 54 48 41 M [%]
T140°C 7,52 18 238 539 840 1.140 1.435 1.720 2.008 2.298 2.580 2.866 n [min-1]
46 B 1091-1 en-2422
272 / 396
3 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 fs [Hz]
0,55 kW 0,12 0,9 0,9 0,9 0,9 0,9 0,9 0,9 0,9 0,8 0,8 0,8 M [Nm]
63S/4 1,6 A 0,20 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 96 92 90 M [%]
0,22 20 152 369 688 1.007 1.310 1.612 1.914 2.213 2.419 2.763 n [min-1]
0,55 KW 0,18 1,3 1,3 1,3 1,3 1,3 1,3 1,3 1,3 1,3 1,2 1,2 M [Nm]
63L/4 1,6 A 0,30 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 96 92 90 M [%]
0,33 20 175 407 715 1.002 1.306 1.610 1.909 2.207 2.415 2.713 n [min-1]
0,55 kW 0,25 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,6 1,6 M [Nm]
71S/4 1,6 A 0,41 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 97 92 92 M [%]
0,47 100 146 442 734 1.031 1.364 1.663 1.962 2.260 2.460 2.818 n [min-1]
0,75 kW 0,35 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,4 2,3 M [Nm]
71L/4 2,2 A 0,61 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 92 90 M [%]
0,69 0 188 488 782 1.077 1.350 1.633 1.941 2.245 2.457 2.797 n [min-1]
1,1 kW 0,54 3,8 3,8 3,8 3,8 3,8 3,8 3,8 3,8 3,8 3,6 3,5 M [Nm]
80S/4 3,0 A 0,93 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 94 92 M [%]
1,03 0 164 440 757 1.052 1.351 1.638 1.947 2.237 2.457 2.814 n [min-1]
1,5 kW 0,79 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,5 5,3 5,0 M [Nm]
80L/4 3,7 A 1,36 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 106 102 95 M [%]
1,46 0 207 493 792 1.086 1.377 1.668 1.970 2.256 2.439 2.813 n [min-1]
2,2 kW 1,07 7,4 7,4 7,4 7,4 7,4 7,4 7,4 7,4 7,4 7,0 6,8 M [Nm]
90S/4 5,5 A 1,83 98 98 98 98 98 98 98 98 98 92 90 M [%]
2,03 0 192 482 778 1.070 1.370 1.675 1.978 2.270 2.489 2.833 n [min-1]
3 kW 1,42 9,8 9,8 9,8 9,8 9,8 9,8 9,8 9,8 9,8 9,1 8,6 M [Nm]
90L/4 7,0 A 2,38 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 88 83 M [%]
2,56 73 179 487 789 1.085 1.387 1.684 1.988 2.284 2.497 2.863 n [min-1]
4 kW 1,99 13,5 13,5 13,5 13,5 13,5 13,5 13,5 13,5 13,5 12,8 12,3 M [Nm]
100L/4 9,5 A 3,37 94 94 94 94 94 94 94 94 94 89 86 M [%]
3,73 0 207 520 809 1.106 1.409 1.709 2.008 2.307 2.518 2.887 n [min-1]
5,5 kW 3,02 20,3 20,3 20,3 20,3 20,3 20,3 20,3 20,3 19,3 18,5 17,3 M [Nm]
100LA/4
12,5 A 4,87 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 95 91 85 M [%]
T140°C 5,21 51 211 516 820 1.120 1.419 1.718 2.016 2.263 2.510 2.877 n [min-1]
7,5 kW 3,92 21,1 26,4 26,4 26,4 26,4 26,4 26,4 26,4 26,3 26,1 21,6 M [Nm]
112M/4 16,0 A 6,87 80 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 99 82 M [%]
6,54 15 213 518 820 1.119 1.419 1.719 2.016 2.312 2.517 2.896 n [min-1]
11 kW 5,52 33,5 36,4 36,4 36,4 36,4 36,4 33,8 31,7 28,7 25,3 20,5 M [Nm]
132S/4 24,0 A 6,79 92 100 100 100 100 100 93 87 79 70 56 M [%]
6,27 15 240 545 848 1.150 1.450 1.755 2.057 2.357 2.566 2.921 n [min-1]
15 kW 7,40 46,9 49,6 49,6 49,6 49,6 48,7 47,0 45,3 41,6 39,0 33,8 M [Nm]
132M/4 31,0 A 10,47 95 100 100 100 100 98 95 91 84 79 68 M [%]
10,43 19 244 547 849 1.151 1.452 1.757 2.054 2.356 2.562 2.944 n [min-1]
18 kW 9,01 51,9 60,8 60,8 60,8 59,7 59,6 56,4 53,9 50,4 45,6 42,6 M [Nm]
132MA/4
38,0 A 12,20 85 100 100 100 98 98 93 89 83 75 70 M [%]
T140°C 13,09 17 234 540 840 1.143 1.443 1.746 2.049 2.349 2.556 2.934 n [min-1]
B 1091-1 en-2422 47
273 / 396
3 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 fs [Hz]
0,55 kW 0,09 0,6 0,6 0,6 0,6 0,6 0,6 0,6 0,6 0,6 0,6 0,6 M [Nm]
63S/4 1,6 A 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 70 M [%]
0,18 6 134 401 731 1.033 1.346 1.652 1.947 2.253 2.542 2.827 n [min-1]
0,55 KW 0,13 0,9 0,9 0,9 0,9 0,9 0,9 0,9 0,9 0,9 0,9 0,8 M [Nm]
63L/4 1,6 A 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 67 64 M [%]
0,25 30 185 422 750 1.057 1.351 1.648 1.944 2.256 2.548 2.851 n [min-1]
0,55 kW 0,18 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,1 M [Nm]
71S/4 1,6 A 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 69 65 M [%]
0,34 30 181 462 774 1.076 1.389 1.687 1.985 2.284 2.583 2.884 n [min-1]
0,55 kW 0,24 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,6 1,5 1,4 M [Nm]
71L/4 1,6 A 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 58 54 M [%]
0,42 0 152 475 788 1.090 1.398 1.700 1.992 2.283 2.587 2.891 n [min-1]
0,75 kW 0,38 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,5 2,4 2,2 M [Nm]
80S/4 2,2 A 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 62 57 M [%]
0,67 0 163 410 810 1.108 1.416 1.712 2.028 2.344 2.627 2.910 n [min-1]
1,1 kW 0,52 3,5 3,5 3,5 3,5 3,5 3,5 3,5 3,5 3,5 3,4 3,2 M [Nm]
80L/4 3,0 A 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 66 62 M [%]
0,99 0 196 505 812 1.116 1.414 1.715 2.015 2.313 2.611 2.908 n [min-1]
1,5 kW 0,75 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 5,0 4,9 4,6 M [Nm]
90S/4 3,7 A 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 65 60 M [%]
1,40 0 183 516 822 1.120 1.425 1.725 2.025 2.321 2.620 2.911 n [min-1]
2,2 kW 1,05 7,1 7,1 7,1 7,1 7,1 7,1 7,1 7,1 7,1 6,9 6,6 M [Nm]
90L/4 5,5 A 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 67 64 M [%]
2,00 20 192 484 799 1.098 1.406 1.707 2.008 2.309 2.606 2.905 n [min-1]
3 kW 1,45 9,7 9,7 9,7 9,7 9,7 9,7 9,7 9,7 9,7 9,2 8,7 M [Nm]
100L/4 7,0 A 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 64 61 M [%]
2,68 25 205 524 829 1.132 1.429 1.736 2.036 2.335 2.631 2.927 n [min-1]
4 kW 1,96 13,1 13,1 13,1 13,1 13,1 13,1 13,1 13,1 13,1 12,4 11,8 M [Nm]
100LA/4
9,5 A 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 61 58 M [%]
T140°C 3,61 20 210 520 830 1.131 1.431 1.731 2.031 2.330 2.629 2.924 n [min-1]
5,5 kW 2,67 18,0 18,0 18,0 18,0 18,0 18,0 18,0 18,0 18,0 18,0 18,0 M [Nm]
112M/4 12,5 A 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 M [%]
5,46 5 220 520 820 1.120 1.420 1.720 2.020 2.320 2.599 2.898 n [min-1]
7,5 kW 3,68 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2 24,2 23,8 M [Nm]
132S/4 16,0 A 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 66 M [%]
7,36 15 240 550 850 1.150 1.450 1.750 2.050 2.350 2.650 2.950 n [min-1]
11 kW 5,42 35,7 35,7 35,7 35,7 35,7 35,7 35,7 35,7 35,7 35,7 33,9 M [Nm]
132M/4 24,0 A 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 68 M [%]
10,46 15 240 550 850 1.150 1.450 1.750 2.050 2.350 2.650 2.950 n [min-1]
15 kW 6,58 43,7 43,7 43,7 43,7 43,7 43,7 43,7 43,7 43,7 43,7 41,5 M [Nm]
132MA/4
31,0 A 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 68 M [%]
T140°C 12,73 15 238 536 837 1.138 1.439 1.731 2.029 2.329 2.633 2.930 n [min-1]
48 B 1091-1 en-2422
274 / 396
2.2.4 IE3 Motors with external fan
3D
Motor type
Voltage 3 20 50 70 100 fs [Hz]
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
0,86 0,85 0,86 0,68 0,39 M [Nm]

63SP/4 6 444 1251 1583 2184 n [min-1]
0 0,04 0,11 0,11 0,09 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 88 186 348 348 348 Us [V]
Y 0,54 0,43 0,44 0,48 0,47 Is [A]
1,25 1,24 1,24 1,07 0,62 M [Nm]

63LP/4 2 466 1302 1679 2372 n [min-1]
0 0,06 0,17 0,19 0,15 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 64 179 348 348 347 Us [V]
Y 0,65 0,59 0,60 0,67 0,63 Is [A]
1,69 1,69 1,69 1,60 0,98 M [Nm]

71SP/4 10 509 1369 1789 2550 n [min-1]
0,0 0,09 0,24 0,30 0,26 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 50 175 348 349 349 Us [V]
Y 0,71 0,72 0,74 0,91 0,87 Is [A]
2,52 2,52 2,52 2,05 1,32 M [Nm]

71LP/4 12 490 1341 1794 2547 n [min-1]
0 0,13 0,35 0,39 0,35 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 52 174 350 348 347 Us [V]
Y 0,93 0,94 0,99 1,12 1,08 Is [A]
3,71 3,70 3,71 2,86 1,69 M [Nm]

80SP/4 8 503 1355 1833 2572 n [min-1]
0 0,19 0,53 0,55 0,46 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 46 174 347 347 347 Us [V]
Y 1,34 1,41 1,54 1,65 1,60 Is [A]
5,06 5,07 5,07 3,81 2,30 M [Nm]

80LP/4 14 513 1365 1869 2647 n [min-1]
0 0,27 0,72 0,75 0,64 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 41 169 342 342 342 Us [V]
Y 1,76 1,80 1,94 2,05 1,96 Is [A]
B 1091-1 en-2422 49
275 / 396
Motor type
Voltage 3 20 50 70 100 fs [Hz]
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
7,33 7,35 7,35 6,17 3,93 M [Nm]

90SP/4 17 534 1404 1908 2723 n [min-1]
0 0,41 1,08 1,23 1,12 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 39 169 346 347 348 Us [V]
Y 2,49 2,43 2,62 3,05 2,93 Is [A]
10,1 10,1 10,2 8,14 4,94 M [Nm]

90LP/4 14 515 1373 1860 2646 n [min-1]
0 0,55 1,46 1,59 1,37 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 40 167 346 348 349 Us [V]
Y 3,27 3,24 3,54 4,06 3,90 Is [A]
14,3 14,3 14,3 11,6 7,22 M [Nm]

100LP/4 47 563 1444 1999 2854 n [min-1]
0,07 0,85 2,17 2,43 2,16 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 38 168 343 349 350 Us [V]
Y 4,63 4,55 4,97 5,58 5,32 Is [A]
19,6 19,6 19,6 15,2 8,99 M [Nm]

100AP/4 36 556 1431 1977 2821 n [min-1]
0,07 1,14 2,94 3,15 2,66 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 41 170 343 345 345 Us [V]
Y 6,48 6,22 6,83 7,50 7,06 Is [A]
26,6 26,5 26,6 19,0 12,3 M [Nm]

112MP/4 28 542 1407 1958 2794 n [min-1]
0,08 1,51 3,91 3,89 3,59 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 37 169 343 343 342 Us [V]
Y 8,04 8,02 8,96 9,01 8,65 Is [A]
35,9 35,9 33,7 23,6 15,1 M [Nm]

132SP/4 54 565 1451 2029 2899 n [min-1]
0,20 2,12 5,12 5,02 4,57 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 33 166 342 342 342 Us [V]
Y 11,3 11,3 11,5 11,1 10,4 Is [A]
50 B 1091-1 en-2422
276 / 396
Motor type
Voltage 3 20 50 70 100 fs [Hz]
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
49,2 49,2 49,1 32,8 20,2 M [Nm]

132MP/4 42 562 1449 2026 2893 n [min-1]
0,22 2,89 7,46 6,95 6,13 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 33 166 344 345 345 Us [V]
Y 15,6 15,5 16,5 15,4 14,5 Is [A]
45,1 59,8 54,5 37,1 23,4 M [Nm]

160SP/4 24 571 1468 2052 2931 n [min-1]
0,11 3,58 8,38 7,96 7,18 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 27 161 343 345 346 Us [V]
Y 19,6 17,5 17,8 17,0 16,2 Is [A]
49,9 71,8 69,1 48,0 30,6 M [Nm]

160MP/4 4 564 1457 2039 2917 n [min-1]
0,02 4,24 10,5 10,2 9,34 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 27 162 340 343 344 Us [V]
Y 24,0 23,6 22,5 21,8 20,7 Is [A]
74,9 98,7 91,3 64,4 42,0 M [Nm]

160LP/4 13 571 1461 2042 2918 n [min-1]
0,10 5,90 14,0 13,8 12,8 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 26 160 341 342 343 Us [V]
Y 31,7 27,9 29,4 28,6 27,5 Is [A]
119 120 111 77,5 47,1 M [Nm]

180MP/4 72 586 1478 2070 2958 n [min-1]
0,90 7,39 17,1 16,8 14,6 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 30 164 343 343 343 Us [V]
Y 36,5 36,3 37,1 35,9 33,2 Is [A]
109 142 133 89,6 53,1 M [Nm]

180LP/4 27 575 1468 2054 2948 n [min-1]
0,31 8,58 20,4 19,3 16,4 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 25 162 340 339 340 Us [V]
Y 49,0 41,9 43,7 42,1 36,8 Is [A]
B 1091-1 en-2422 51
277 / 396
3D
Motor type
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
0,86 0,85 0,86 0,86 M [Nm]

63SP/4 6 444 2390 2686 n [min-1]
0 0,04 0,21 0,24 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 51 108 348 349 Us [V]
Δ 0,94 0,74 0,76 0,78 Is [A]
1,25 1,24 1,25 1,24 M [Nm]

63LP/4 2 466 2428 2735 n [min-1]
0 0,06 0,32 0,35 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 37 103 349 349 Us [V]
Δ 1,12 1,03 1,04 1,08 Is [A]
1,69 1,69 1,69 1,69 M [Nm]

71SP/4 10 509 2483 2822 n [min-1]
0 0,09 0,44 0,50 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 29 101 350 349 Us [V]
Δ 1,22 1,25 1,27 1,34 Is [A]
2,52 2,52 2,51 2,50 M [Nm]

71LP/4 12 490 2457 2787 n [min-1]
0 0,13 0,65 0,73 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 30 101 348 347 Us [V]
Δ 1,60 1,63 1,69 1,83 Is [A]
3,71 3,70 3,71 3,62 M [Nm]

80SP/4 8 503 2477 2814 n [min-1]
0 0,19 0,96 1,07 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 26 100 346 346 Us [V]
Δ 2,33 2,44 2,50 2,73 Is [A]
5,06 5,07 5,07 4,57 M [Nm]

80LP/4 14 513 2479 2836 n [min-1]
0 0,27 1,32 1,36 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 24 97 341 340 Us [V]
Δ 3,05 3,12 3,33 3,38 Is [A]
52 B 1091-1 en-2422
278 / 396
Motor type
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
7,33 7,35 7,35 7,30 M [Nm]

90SP/4 17 534 2511 2864 n [min-1]
0 0,41 1,93 2,19 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 22 97 345 346 Us [V]
Δ 4,31 4,21 4,51 4,95 Is [A]
10,1 10,1 10,1 9,8 M [Nm]

90LP/4 14 515 2481 2829 n [min-1]
0,01 0,55 2,63 2,92 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 23 96 342 347 Us [V]
Δ 5,66 5,60 6,10 6,61 Is [A]
14,3 14,3 14,3 13,3 M [Nm]

100LP/4 47 563 2556 2929 n [min-1]
0,07 0,85 3,84 4,08 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 22 97 345 347 Us [V]
Δ 8,01 7,88 8,49 8,86 Is [A]
19,6 19,6 18,4 16,0 M [Nm]

100AP/4 36 556 2546 2927 n [min-1]
0,07 1,14 4,90 4,90 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 24 98 341 343 Us [V]
Δ 11,2 10,8 11,2 10,9 Is [A]
26,6 26,5 25,1 21,7 M [Nm]

112MP/4 28 542 2522 2898 n [min-1]
0,08 1,51 6,64 6,58 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 21 98 338 339 Us [V]
Δ 13,9 13,9 14,7 14,4 Is [A]
35,9 35,9 27,8 24,2 M [Nm]

132SP/4 54 565 2569 2952 n [min-1]
0,20 2,12 7,47 7,47 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 19 96 338 338 Us [V]
Δ 19,5 19,6 17,2 16,7 Is [A]
B 1091-1 en-2422 53
279 / 396
Motor type
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
49,2 49,2 37,3 32,5 M [Nm]

132MP/4 42 562 2577 2958 n [min-1]
0,22 2,89 10,1 10,1 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 19 96 341 339 Us [V]
Δ 27,1 26,9 23,0 22,5 Is [A]
45,1 59,8 43,0 37,0 M [Nm]

160SP/4 24 571 2586 2972 n [min-1]
0,11 3,58 11,6 11,5 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 15 93 340 340 Us [V]
Δ 33,9 30,3 25,4 24,8 Is [A]
49,9 71,8 50,5 43,9 M [Nm]

160MP/4 4 564 2584 2968 n [min-1]
0,02 4,24 13,7 13,6 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 15 94 336 337 Us [V]
Δ 41,5 40,8 29,7 29,0 Is [A]
74,9 98,7 78,4 67,9 M [Nm]

160LP/4 13 571 2581 2964 n [min-1]
0,10 5,90 21,2 21,1 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 15 92 340 341 Us [V]
Δ 54,9 48,4 43,8 43,0 Is [A]
119,5 120 86,4 72,5 M [Nm]

180MP/4 72 586 2599 2988 n [min-1]
0,90 7,39 23,5 22,7 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 17 95 338 339 Us [V]
Δ 63,3 62,9 53,1 50,3 Is [A]
109,5 142 95 78,6 M [Nm]

180LP/4 27 575 2588 2985 n [min-1]
0,31 8,58 25,8 24,6 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 15 93 335 336 Us [V]
Δ 85,0 72,5 56,9 53,1 Is [A]
54 B 1091-1 en-2422
280 / 396
2.2.4.3 IE3 motors with external fan, 100 Hz nominal point, size 63SP/4 to 180LP/4 for
category 3D
Motor type
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
0,60 0,60 0,60 0,60 M [Nm]

63SP/4 28 455 1344 2782 n [min-1]
0 0,03 0,08 0,17 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 48 95 209 349 Us [V]
Δ 0,89 0,63 0,64 0,63 Is [A]
0,83 0,82 0,83 0,83 M [Nm]

63LP/4 10 485 1384 2826 n [min-1]
0 0,04 0,12 0,25 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 30 91 210 349 Us [V]
Δ 0,90 0,86 0,86 0,85 Is [A]
1,21 1,21 1,22 1,21 M [Nm]

71SP/4 0 514 1415 2876 n [min-1]
0 0,07 0,18 0,37 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 23 88 206 350 Us [V]
Δ 0,97 1,06 1,06 1,07 Is [A]
1,81 1,81 1,81 1,81 M [Nm]

71LP/4 17 498 1395 2858 n [min-1]
0 0,09 0,26 0,54 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 25 88 205 348 Us [V]
Δ 1,31 1,36 1,36 1,40 Is [A]
2,03 2,45 2,44 2,44 M [Nm]

80SP/4 0 516 1422 2885 n [min-1]
0 0,13 0,36 0,74 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 19 89 210 348 Us [V]
Δ 1,65 1,96 1,90 1,96 Is [A]
3,60 3,59 3,59 3,59 M [Nm]

80LP/4 0 519 1418 2880 n [min-1]
0 0,20 0,53 1,08 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 19 85 204 341 Us [V]
Δ 2,55 2,56 2,55 2,74 Is [A]
B 1091-1 en-2422 55
281 / 396
Motor type
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
4,89 4,87 4,87 4,87 M [Nm]

90SP/4 11 543 1440 2912 n [min-1]
0 0,28 0,73 1,49 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 18 84 204 347 Us [V]
Δ 3,50 3,34 3,34 3,56 Is [A]
7,19 7,17 7,22 4,94 M [Nm]

90LP/4 22 521 1416 2646 n [min-1]
0 0,39 1,07 1,37 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 20 84 201 349 Us [V]
Δ 4,26 4,55 4,58 3,90 Is [A]
9,65 9,65 9,65 9,66 M [Nm]

100LP/4 46 566 1465 2949 n [min-1]
0,05 0,57 1,48 2,98 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 18 84 202 347 Us [V]
Δ 6,52 6,16 6,15 6,71 Is [A]
12,9 12,9 12,9 12,9 M [Nm]

100AP/4 42 562 1461 2942 n [min-1]
0,06 0,76 1,97 3,96 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 19 85 204 343 Us [V]
Δ 8,55 8,11 8,08 8,98 Is [A]
17,8 17,8 17,8 17,8 M [Nm]

112MP/4 30 549 1444 2922 n [min-1]
0,06 1,02 2,70 5,45 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 18 84 204 340 Us [V]
Δ 11,0 10,7 10,7 11,9 Is [A]
24,1 24,1 24,1 24,2 M [Nm]

132SP/4 53 568 1468 2952 n [min-1]
0,13 1,44 3,71 7,47 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 16 83 202 338 Us [V]
Δ 15,5 15,1 15,2 16,7 Is [A]
56 B 1091-1 en-2422
282 / 396
Motor type
Circuit type (Y/Δ)
30,3 29,8 29,9 29,5 M [Nm]

132MP/4 45 572 1476 2966 n [min-1]
0,14 1,78 4,62 9,17 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 15 82 202 342 Us [V]
Δ 19,8 18,7 18,9 20,6 Is [A]
35,4 35,3 35,3 35,3 M [Nm]

160SP/4 61 582 1483 2977 n [min-1]
0,23 2,15 5,49 11,0 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 15 82 201 341 Us [V]
Δ 20,8 21,2 20,9 24,2 Is [A]
49,2 48,3 48,3 48,3 M [Nm]

160MP/4 53 572 1479 2967 n [min-1]
0,27 2,90 7,48 15,0 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 17 83 202 340 Us [V]
Δ 30,1 28,2 28,6 31,6 Is [A]
59,4 59,4 59,4 59,5 M [Nm]

160LP/4 60 579 1480 2973 n [min-1]
0,37 3,60 9,21 18,5 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 15 82 201 340 Us [V]
Δ 34,8 34,7 34,6 38,3 Is [A]
69,8 70,5 70,4 70,4 M [Nm]

180MP/4 76 589 1491 2992 n [min-1]
0,55 4,35 11,0 22,1 P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 14 81 200 338 Us [V]
Δ 46,6 45,3 44,5 49,0 Is [A]
96,3 96,2 96,3 - M [Nm]

180LP/4 48 583 1481 - n [min-1]
0,48 5,88 14,9 - P [kW]
230/400V, 50 Hz 14 81 201 - Us [V]
Δ 68,5 55,9 55,6 - Is [A]
B 1091-1 en-2422 57
283 / 396
3 Appendix
Abbreviations
2D Category 2D
3D Category 3D
(non-conducting dust)
ATEX: ATmosphères EXplosible IE1 Efficiency as per IE1

DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm IE2 Efficiency as per IE2
EN European standard IE3 Efficiency as per IE3
FI Frequency inverter U/f Voltage/frequency characteristic curve
58 B 1091-1 en-2422
284 / 396
B 1091-1 en-2422 59
285 / 396
286 / 396
6052102 / 2422
Intelligent Drivesystems, Worldwide Services
DE EN FR
PL1011
Ersatzteilkatalog NORDBLOC
Spare parts catalogue NORDBLOC
Catalogue de pièces de rechange NORDBLOC
287 / 396
288 / 396
Inhaltsübersicht
Table Of Contents
Sommaire
Allgemeine Ersatzteile
General parts list
Vues éclatées et nomenclature
NORDBLOC.1 - Stirnradgetriebe
NORDBLOC.1 - Helical Gear Units
NORDBLOC.1 - Réducteurs à engrenages cylindriques
SK 071.1 - SK 771.1 .............................................................. 4- 7

SK 871.1 - SK 1071.1 ............................................................ 8 - 11
SK 072.1 - SK 672.1 .............................................................. 12 - 13
SK 772.1 - SK 972.1 .............................................................. 14 - 15
SK 373.1 - SK 673.1 .............................................................. 16 - 17
SK 773.1 - SK 973.1 .............................................................. 18 - 19
Bestellangaben ...................................................................... 20 - 21
Order details
Informations de commande
www.nord.com PL1011 3
289 / 396
SK 071.1 - SK Ersatzteilzeichnung
771.1
Spare Parts Drawing
DRIVESYSTEMS DRIVESYSTEMS
Stirnradgetriebe / Helical Gear Unit

SK 071.1
NORDBLOC.1 - Helical - SK
Gear Unit771.1 SK 071.1 - SK 771.1
NORDBLOC.1 - Reducteurs à engrenages cylindriques
310
320
330
300
105 325
900 326
911
332 652
653
EB 553 9000 E3 #1
620
615
644
632
648
650
630
651
649
100 645
120 610
631
600
150
400
410

Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
Datum / Date Name / Name
4 Schutzvermerk PL1011 www.nord.com
2 Text hinzugef. 10.08.16 ESie Gezeichnet
1 653 hinzugef. 28.07.16 ESie

nach
Drawn
26.07.2016
290 / 396 SieversE 553 9000 - E 2
SK 071.1 - SK 771.1
DE GB FR
100 Gehäuse 100 Housing 100 Boîtier

105 Dichtung 105 Seal 105 Bague d‘étanchéité
120 Schraube 120 Screw 120 Vis
300 Getriebedeckel 300 Gear unit cover 300 Couvercle du réducteur
326 Federring 326 Lock washer 326 Rondelle élastique
400 Flansch 400 Flange 400 Bride
600 Abtriebswelle 600 Output shaft 600 Arbre de sortie
610 Wälzlager 610 Roller bearing 610 Palier
620 Abtriebsrad 620 Output gear 620 Roue de sortie
630 Passfeder 630 Key 630 Clavette
631 Wellendichtring 631 Radial shaft seal 631 Bague d‘étanchéité de l‘arbre
644 Buchse 644 Socket 644 Douille
650 Sicherungsring 650 Circlip 650 Circlip
651 Stützscheibe 651 Supporting disc 651 Rondelle support
652 Passscheibe 652 Shim 652 Rondelles d‘ajustage
900 Antriebsritzel 900 Driving pinion 900 Pignon d‘entrée
291 / 396
SK 071.1 - SK Ersatzteilzeichnung
771.1
Spare Parts Drawing
NORDBLOC.1 - Stirnradgetriebe mit verstärkter Lagerung VL

Abtriebswelle
NORDBLOC.1 - Helical / Output
Gear Unit with reinforced ShaftVL
bearing
NORDBLOC.1 - Reducteurs à engrenages
Stirnradgetriebe VL cylindriques
Helical Gear Unit VL
avec roulements renforcés VL
SK 071.1 - SK 771.1
EB 553 9000 E3 #1
620
615
610
631 685
648
649
630
642
632
640
600
Restliche Getriebeteile siehe Ersatzteilkatalog

NORDBLOC Stirnradgetriebe
Remaining gear parts see catalogue

NORDBLOC Helical Inline Gear Unit

Schutzvermerk
2 Text hinzugef. 10.08.16 ESie Gezeichnet
6
1 653 hinzugef. 28.07.16 ESie
nach
Drawn
PL1011
26.07.2016 SieversE 553 9000 - Ewww.nord.com
2
Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
292 / 396
SK 071.1 - SK 771.1
DE GB FR

642 Nilosring 642 Nilos-ring 642 Bague Nilos
685 Nutmutter 685 Locknut 685 Écrou à encoches
293 / 396
SK 871.1 - SK 1071.1
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
NORDBLOC.1 - Helical Gear Unit
310
320
300
325
105 326
900
911
650
652
649 653
645
EB 556 9000 E1 #1
632
648
651
630
220 620
110 615
100 651
120 610
649
631
600
140
652 650
653
620
150
400
410
8 PL1011 www.nord.com
294 Tel.
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide / 39604532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
SK 871.1 - SK 1071.1
DE GB FR

295 / 396
SK 871.1 - SK 1071.1
Ersatzteilzeichnung
SparemitParts
NORDBLOC.1 - Stirnradgetriebe Drawing
verstärkter Lagerung VL
NORDBLOC.1 - Helical Gear Unit with reinforced bearing VL
avec roulements renforcés VL
685
620
615
EB 556 9000 E1 #2
610
631
684
648
630 649
642
632 685
640
649
600
684
296 Tel.
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide / 39604532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
SK 871.1 - SK 1071.1
DE GB FR

642 Nilosring 642 Nilos-ring 642 Bague Nilos
684 Sicherungsblech 684 Securing plate 684 Tôle de sécurité
685 Nutmutter 685 Locknut 685 Écrou à encoches
297 / 396
SK 072.1 - SK 672.1
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
NORDBLOC.1 - Helical
Stirnradgetriebe Gear-Unit
SK 072.1 SK 672.1 / Helical Gear Unit SK 072.1 - SK 672.1
325
326
310
330 320
331
300
105
900
911
612
648
EB 573 9000 E1 #1
630
634 615
602 620
600
610
604
605
631
737 712
701
753
711
700
710
100
120
121
130
131
400
410
420
12 PL1011
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com www.nord.com
Datum
298 / Date Name / Name
/ 396
Schutzvermerk
SK 072.1 - SK 672.1
DE GB FR

420 Stift 420 Pin 420 Goupille
700 Ritzelwelle 700 Pinion shaft 700 Arbre de pignon
701 Antreibsrad 701 Drive gear 701 Roue d‘entrée
299 / 396
SK 772.1 - SK 972.1
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Stirnradgetriebe
NORDBLOC.1 SK 772.1
- Reducteurs - 972.1 / Helical
à engrenages Gear Unit
cylindriques SK 772.1 - 972.1
325
326
220
230 242
241 240 243
310
900
911
615
620
648
600
200 630
610
603
604
210 602 605
632
631
EB 577 9000 E3 #1
712
753
737
710
733
732
701
711
121 700
734
735
140
120 141
131 140 100
130 730 141
400
410
420

603, 733 hinzugef., 12.12.17
3 ESie Datum / Date Name / Name
Aktual. Schutzvermerk
2 602, 604/605 geä., 30.05.16 ESie Gezeichnet
14 910 entf.
1 072.1-672.1 entf. 14.02.11 ESie
nach
Drawn
PL1011
26.02.2010 SieversE 577 9000 - Ewww.nord.com
3
ISO 16016 Kontrolliert300 / 396
SK 772.1 - SK 972.1
DE GB FR

200 Gehäusedeckel 200 Housing cover 200 Couvercle du carter
603 Stützscheibe 603 Supporting disc 603 Rondelle d’appui
701 Antriebsrad 701 Drive gear 701 Roue d‘entrée
730 Verschlusskappe 730 Sealing cap 730 Bouchon
301 / 396
SK 373.1 - SK 673.1
Ersatzteilzeichnung
NORDBLOC.1 - Helical Gear UnitParts Drawing
Spare
Stirnradgetriebe SK 373.1 - SK 673.1 / Helical Gear Unit SK 373.1 - SK 673.1

325
326
330 310
331 320
300
811 105
801
821 900
810 911
EB 573 9050 E1 #1
612
648
630
800
634
615
602
620
600
610
604
631 605
737 712
755
701
753
711
700
710
100
120
121 131
130
400
410
420

Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet
16
1 602, 604/605, 612, ESie
nach 26.02.2010
PL1011 SieversE 573 9050 - E 1 www.nord.com
634 geän., 910 entf. 26.05.16 Drawn
ISO 16016
beachten
Kontrolliert
302 / 396
26.02.2010 Hinkel Seite von Blatt
SK 373.1 - SK 673.1
DE GB FR

303 / 396
SK 773.1 - SK 973.1
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Stirnradgetriebe SK 773.1 - 973.1 / Helical Gear Unit SK 773.1 - 973.1
220
230 242
241 240 243 819
853
835
836 325
821 811 326
800 801
810
200
310
828 900
210 820 911
615
620
648
630
610 600
EB 577 9050 E4 #1
603
604
602 605
632
631
740
753
737
710
733
732
701
711
121 700
734
735
120
131 140 100 141
130 730 141 140
400
410
420

603, 733 hinzugef., Datum / Date Name / Name
Aktual. 4 12.12.17 ESie
Schutzvermerk
18 PL1011
577 9050 - E 4www.nord.com
3 828, 853 hinzug. 09.10.17 ESie Gezeichnet
nach 26.02.2010 SieversE
2 602, 604/605,
740geä.,910 entf. 04.11.16 ESie Drawn
ISO 16016 304 / 396
Status Änderungen Datum Name Kontrolliert
SK 773.1 - SK 973.1
DE GB FR
200 Gehäusedeckel 200 Housing cover 200 Couvercle du carter
730 Verschlusskappe 730 Sealing cap 730 Bouchon
305 / 396
Bestellangaben
SK 03 - SK 53
Order details
Kontaktdaten / Contact details / Contacts:

Getriebebau NORD
Firma / Company / Entreprise:
D-22941 Bargteheide
Straße / Street / Rue Telefon +49(0) 4532/289-0
Telefax +49(0)4532/289-2253
PLZ / Postcode/
E-Mail info@nord.com
Stadt / Town / Ville: Code postal: www.nord.com

Telefon / Telephone / Téléphone:
Fax:
E-mail:
DE EN FR
Diese NORD Ersatzteilliste beinhaltet This NORD spare parts list contains Cette liste de pièces de rechange
eine standardisierte Darstellung a standardised depiction of NORD NORD contient une représentation
der NORD Getriebe. Um Ihnen gear units. In order to enable you standard des réducteurs NORD.
das Finden und Nachbestellen von to find and re-order replacement Pour faciliter la recherche et la
Ersatzteilen zu erleichtern, finden parts more easily, you can find an commande de pièces de rechange,
Sie am Ende der Ersatzteilliste order form and important information un formulaire de commande se
ein Bestellformular mit wichtigen regarding the identification of the trouve à la fin de la liste des pièces
Hinweisen zur Bestimmung der correct components at the end of de rechange et vous donne toutes
richtigen Teile. this spare parts list. les informations essentielles pour
déterminer les pièces dont vous
Für Rückfragen stehen wir Ihnen We will be glad to help you if you avez besoin.
gerne zur Verfügung. Ihren lokalen have any queries: You can find your
Ansprechpartner finden Sie unter local contact partner under http://lo- En cas de questions, n’hésitez pas à
http://locator.nord.com. cator.nord.com. nous contacter. Pour connaître votre
interlocuteur local, veuillez consulter
le site http://locator.nord.com.
306 / 396
Bestellangaben SK 03 - SK 53
Order details
Erläuterung des Typenschildes

Explanation of the rating plate
Explication de la plaque signalétique
 
 
DE EN FR
1 Matrix – Barcode 1 Matrix – Barcode 1 Code matriciel, à barres
2 NORD - Getriebetyp 2 NORD gear unit type 2 Type de réducteur NORD
3 Betriebsart 3 Operating mode 3 Mode de fonctionnement
4 Herstellungsjahr 4 Year of manufacture 4 Année de fabrication
5 Fabrikationsnummer 5 Serial number 5 Numéro de série
6 Nenndrehmoment der 6 Rated torque of gear unit output 6 Couple nominal de l’arbre de sortie
Getriebeabtriebswelle shaft du réducteur
7 Antriebsleistung 7 Drive power 7 Puissance d’entraînement
8 Gewicht entsprechend 8 Weight according to ordered version 8 Poids selon l’exécution du contrat
Auftragsausführung 9 Overall gear unit ratio 9 Rapport de réduction total
9 Gesamte Getriebeübersetzung 10 Installation orientation 10 Position de montage
10 Einbaulage 11 Rated speed of gear unit output shaft 11 Vitesse de rotation nominale de
11 Nenndrehzahl der 12 Lubricant type, l’arbre de sortie du réducteur
Getriebeabtriebswelle viscosity and quantity 12 Type de lubrifiant,
12 Schmierstoffart, 13 Customer’s part number viscosité et quantité
-viskosität und –menge 14 Operating factor 13 Numéro d’article client
13 Kundenmaterialnummer 14 Facteur de service
14 Betriebsfaktor
Ersatzteil-Bestellung / Replacement parts order / Commande de pièces de rechange:
Bezeichnung / Designation / Désignation: Pos.-Nr. / Item No. / N° pos :
Stückzahl / Pieces / Quantité: Getriebetyp / Gear unit type / Type de réducteur:
Fabrikationsnummer / Serial No. / Numéro de série:
307 / 396
Notizen
Notes
Notes
308 / 396
Notizen
Notes
Notes
309 / 396
NORD DRIVESYSTEMS Group

Headquarters and Technology Centre
in Bargteheide, close to Hamburg
Innovative drive solutions
for more than 100 branches of industry
Mechanical products
parallel shaft, helical gear, bevel gear and worm gear units
Electrical products
IE2/IE3/IE4 motors
Electronic products
centralised and decentralised frequency inverters,
motor starters and field distribution systems
7 state-of-the-art production plants
for all drive components
Subsidiaries and sales partners
in 98 countries on 5 continents
provide local stocks, assembly, production,
technical support and customer service
More than 4.000 employees throughout the world
create customer oriented solutions
www.nord.com/locator
Headquarters:
Mat.Nr. 6002399 / 1019
D - 22941 Bargteheide
Fon +49 (0) 4532 / 289 - 0
Fax +49 (0) 4532 / 289 -2253
info@nord.com, www.nord.com
Member of the NORD DRIVESYSTEMS GROUP
310 / 396
DE EN FR
PL1080
Ersatzteilkatalog Anbauoptionen
Spare part catalogue for attachment options
Catalogue des pièces de rechange : options de montage
311 / 396
Inhaltsübersicht
Table Of Contents
Sommaire
General parts list
W-Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
W-Adapter
Lanterne W
IEC/NEMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
AI/AN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 13
Motorkonsole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 15
Motor bracket
Console moteur
Ölausgleichsbehälter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 17
Oil expansion tank
Vase d’expansion d’huile
Ölstandsbehälter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 19
Oil storage tank
Angle de commande d‘huile
Ölkontrollwinkel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 21
Oil-monitoring elbow
Vase d’expansion d’huile
Ölkontrolldeckel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 23
Oil control cover
Couvercle de commande huile
312 / 396
Inhaltsübersicht
Table Of Contents
Sommaire
General parts list
Ölkühler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 23
Oil cooler
Refroidisseur d‘huile
Wasserkühler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 - 25
Water cooler
Refroidisseur d‘eau
Taconite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 - 27
Gripmaxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 - 29
Screw Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 - 33
Bestellangaben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 - 35
Order details
Alu-Anbauten siehe auch Ersatzteilkatalog

PL1035 Universal-Schneckengetriebe
For aluminium attachments see also spare part catalogue
PL1035 Universal worm gear units
Pour les montages alu, voir également le catalogue de

pièces de rechange du réducteur à vis sans fin Universal
PL1035
313 / 396
W-Adapter
W-Adapter
Lanterne W
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare
SK 0, SK 01, SK 20, SK 25, SK 30, SK 33
SK 010, SK 200, SK 250, SK 300, SK 330
Parts Drawing
SK 11 E - SK 51 E / SK 02 - SK 62 / SK 03 - SK 63
SK 0182 NB - SK 1382 NB / SK 1282 - SK 5282 / SK 2382 - SK 6382
SK 02040 - SK 42125 / SK 13050 - SK 43125
SK 071.1 - SK 972.1 / SK 373.1 - SK 973.1
W-Adapter / W-Adaptor
SK 2S40, SK 2S50, SK 2S63, SK 2S75
SK 62 - SK 72 / SK 73 - SK 93
SK 6282 - SK 7282 / SK 7382 - SK 9382
SK 82 - SK 102 / SK 103
SK 8282 - SK 9282
SK 9072.1 - SK 9092.1 / SK 9096.1
SK 10382.1, SK 11382.1, SK 12382
1321 1245
1311 910 1230
1331 1330 910 1321
1332 900 1310 1305 1346
1311
EB 508 9014 E3 #1
1333 1305
1300 1311 1305 1231
1330 1227 1380 1232
900 910
1345 1321 1210 1321
1310 1356
1228 1300 1330 1234
1332 911 1356 1235 1357
1320 1333 1357 1311
1310
911 1312 1305
1200 910
1227 1240 1300
1200 1241 1320 911
1332 1310
1333 1330
900
1346
1227 1245
1348
1320
1200 1228
1300
1200
900
1331
1332
1333
1227
1228
1230
1231 1238
1228
1237
Getriebebau314
NORD
/ 396 GmbH & Co. KG
W-Adapter
W-Adapter
Lanterne W
DE GB FR
900 Antriebsritzel 900 Drive pinion 900 Pignon d'entrée

1200 Gehäuse 1200 Housing 1200 Carter
1210 Dichtung 1210 Gasket 1210 Bague d'étanchéité
1230 Deckel 1230 Lid 1230 Couvercle
1234 Passscheibe 1234 Shim 1234 Rondelles d'ajustage
1238 Mutter 1238 Nut 1238 mère
1245 Schmiernippel 1245 Lubricating nipple 1245 Graisseur
1300 Antriebswelle 1300 Drive shaft 1300 Arbre d'entréé
1320 Wellendichtring 1320 Radial shaft seal 1320 Bague d'étanchéité de l'arbre
1380 Gammaring 1380 Gamma ring 1380 Déflecteur
315 / 396
W-Adapter
W-Adapter Ersatzteilzeichnung
Lanterne W Spare Parts Drawing
W0 - WIV
W0 - WIV Adapter / W0 - WIV Adaptor
1231
1232
1230
1346 1380
1311
1312
1305 1234
1235
910
1356
1330
1357
900
1227 1362
1228 1340
1300
1310 1356 1380
1357
EB 526 9054 E1 #1
1200 1320
911 1340
1346
1311
1339
1230
1332
1333
1381
1231 1380
1232
1311
1332
1333
1241
1240

6 Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet
PL1080 www.nord.com
1 1227, 1228
1332, 1333, 1381 03.11.16 ESie
nach
Drawn
06.06.2014
316 / 396
SieversE 526 9054 - E 1
W-Adapter
W-Adapter
Lanterne W
DE GB FR

1230 Deckel 1230 Lip 1230 Couvercle
1339 Abstandshülse 1339 Spacer bush 1339 Douille-entretoise
1340 Abstandshülse 1340 Spacer bush 1340 Douille-entretoise
1380 Gammaring 1380 Gamma ring 1380 Déflecteur
1381 Scheibe 1381 Washer 1381 Rondelle
317 / 396
Ersatzteilzeichnung
IEC/NEMA Spare Parts Drawing
DRIVESYSTEM DRIVESYSTEM
IEC 63 - 112 / IEC 132 - 180 / IEC 160 - 315

IEC 63 - 112 / IEC 132 - 180 / IEC 160 - 315
NEMA 56C, 140TC, 180TC, 210TC, 250TC, 280TC, 320TC, 360TC, 400TSC
NEMA 56C, 140TC, 180TC, 210TC, 250TC, 280TC, 320TC, 360TC, 400TSC
1374
910
1347
1311 1375
1345 1374
1228 1327 1372
1227 1374 1354
900 1371 1355
1370 1250
1300 1253 1321
1200 1356
1357 1373
1375 1369
1349 1346
911 1373 910 1345
1350
1310 1320 1371
1320 1332
1231
1251 1333 1232
EB 507 9041 E1 #1
900
1241 1356 1230
1240 1357
1252
1349 1311
1350
911
1300
1310
1330
1260
1261
1262

Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet
1 1227,1228,1262 korrig. 22.06.15 ESie

nach
Drawn
25.06.2014 SieversE 507 9041 - E 1
beachten 25.06.2014 Hinkel Seite von Blatt
State Changes Date Name Checked Page 1 from 1 Page
318 / 396
IEC/NEMA
DE GB FR
1250 Schmierstoffkatusche 1250 Lubricant cartridge 1250 Cartouche de lubrifiant
1252 Abdeckung 1252 Cover 1252 Cache
1253 Verlängerung 1253 Extension 1253 Rallonge
1260 Zwischenflansche 1260 Intermediate flange 1260 Bride intermédiaire
1370 Kupplungsgehäuse 1370 Coupling housing 1370 Manchon d'accouplement
1371 Kupplungshälfte 1371 Half-coupling 1371 Demi-raccord
1372 Zahnkranz 1372 Ring gear 1372 Couronne dentée
319 / 396
AI/AN
AI160, AI180, AI200, AI225, AI250, AI280, AI315

AN250TC, AN280TC, AN320TC, AN360TC, AN400TC
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
1220
1376
1374
1372
1371
1347
1311
1294 1295 1345
1352
1292 1245
1369 1375
1353
1293 910 1373
1346
EB 753 1290 E0 #1
1310
900 1356 1321
1387 1349 1357
1350 1376
1343
1358
911 1300 1260
1320 1374
1330
1372
1371
1200 1231
1227
1228 1347
1261
1297 1311
1240 1345
1358 1220
1373
1346
1321
1230
1356
1349 1357
1350
1343
1352

Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet
0 31314 08.03.21 ESie

nach
Drawn
08.03.2021 SieversE 753 1290 - E 0
10 Status Änderungen Datum Name
ISO 16016 PL1080
Kontrolliert
www.nord.com
beachten 08.03.2021 Herrmann Seite von Blatt
State Changes Date Name Checked320 / 396 Page 2 from 2 Page
AI/AN
DE GB FR
1260 Zwischenflansche 1260 Intermediate flange 1260 Bride intermédiaire
1292 Klemmenkastendeckel 1292 Terminal box lid 1292 Couvercle de la boîte à bornes
1295 Ölschraube 1295 oil screw 1295 Vis à huile
1343 Dichtscheibe 1343 Sealing washer 1343 Rondelle d’appui
1352 Rücklaufsperre 1352 Back stop 1352 Anti-devireur
1387 Schalter/Sensor 1387 Switch/Sensor 1387 Changer/Capteur
321 / 396
Servo
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Servo 100/160 S, 130/160 S, 130/250 S, 165/160 S, DRIVESYSTEM
DRIVESYSTEM
165/250 S, 215/250 S, 215/300 S, 300/300 S, 300/350
Servo 100/160 S, 130/160 S, 130/250 S, 165/160 S,

165/250 S, 215/250 S, 215/300 S, 300/300 S, 300/350
1374
1372
1347
1311
1369 1373
910
1227
1310
1228 1371
EB 514 9021 E2 #1
900 1356
1357
1345
1300
1200 1320
911
1348
1336
1337
1241 1327
1240
1306
1336
1337
1327
1304

Schutzvermerk
12
2 1227,1228 geänd. 23.06.15 ESie Gezeichnet PL1080 www.nord.com
1 Aktualisierung 21.10.14 ESie
nach
Drawn
06.06.2014 SieversE 514 9021 - E 2
322 / 396
ISO 16016
Servo
DE GB FR

323 / 396
Motorkonsole
Motor bracket
Console moteur Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
MK I - MK V DRIVESYSTEMS
DRIVESYSTEMS
MK I - MK V
Motorkonsole MK I - MK V / Motor bracket MK I - MK V
1631
1630
1600
1620
EB 526 9052 E1 #1
1610
1635
1636
1634
1633

Schutzvermerk
14 Gezeichnet PL1080 www.nord.com
1 Nr. korrigiert 15.09.14 ESie
nach
Drawn
20.06.2014 SieversE 526 9052 - E 1
324 / 396
ISO 16016
Motorkonsole
Motor bracket
Console moteur
DE GB FR
1600 Motorkonsole 1600 Motor bracket 1600 Console moteur

1610 Halterung 1610 Holder 1610 Support
1634 Federring 1634 Spring lock washer 1634 Rondelle élastique
325 / 396
Ölausgleichsbehälter
Oil expansion tank
Réservoir d’expansion d’huile
SK 42, SK 43, SK 52, SK 53, SK 62, SK 63, SK 72, SK 73, SK 82, SK 83, SK 92, SK 93, SK 102, SK 103
SK 4282, SK 4382, SK 5282, SK 5382, SK 6282, SK 638 2, SK 7282, SK 7382, SK 8282, SK8382
SK 9042.1, SK 9043.1, SK 9052.1, SK 9053.1, SK 9072 .1, SK 9082.1, SK 9086.1, SK 9092.1, SK 9096.1
1879
1878
1885
1870
1884
1886
1874
EB 283 9039 E3 #1
1873
1881
1882
326 / 396
Ölausgleichsbehälter
Oil expansion tank
Réservoir d’expansion d’huile
DE GB FR
1870 Ölausgleichsbehälter 1870 Oil expansion chamber 1870 Réservoir d'expansion d'huile
1873 Schlauch 1873 Hose 1873 Tuyau
1874 Dichtung 1874 Seal 1874 Bague d'étanchéité
1878 Entlüftung 1878 Vent 1878 Évent
1881 Reduzierung 1881 Reducer 1881 Réduction
327 / 396
Ölstandsbehälter
Oil storage tank Ersatzteilzeichnung
Réservoir de niveau d’huile
Spare Parts Drawing
SK 9282, SK 9382, SK 10382.1, SK 11382.1, SK 12382
Ölstandsbehälter / Oil reservoir tank

Größe I und II
1846 1840
1860 1845
1830
1866 1867
1865 1868
1850
EB 283 9046 E #1
1825 1810
1864
1836 1863
1835

3 Text geändert 18.09.17 ESie Datum / Date Name / Name
Schutzvermerk
2 Text SK... hinz. 23.06.16 ESie Gezeichnet

nach
Drawn
24.06.2014 SieversE 283 9046 - E 3
18 ISO 16016 PL1080 www.nord.com
Status Änderungen Datum Name Kontrolliert
beachten 24.06.2014
328 / 396 Hinkel Seite von Blatt
Ölstandsbehälter
Oil storage tank
Réservoir de niveau d’huile
DE GB FR
1810 Gehäuseentlüftung 1810 Housing vent 1810 Évent de carter

1825 Halterung 1825 Holder 1825 Support
1830 Ölstandsbehälter 1830 Oil level vessel 1830 Vase d‘expansion d‘huile
1835 Mutter 1835 Nut 1835 Écrou
1840 Entlüftungsdeckel 1840 Ventilation cover 1840 Couvercle d‘évent
1845 Entlüftungsschraube 1845 Standard vent plug 1845 Vis d‘évent
1846 Dichtung 1846 Gasket 1846 Bague d’étanchéité
1850 Baugruppe 1850 Module 1850 Module
1860 Baugruppe 1860 Module 1860 Module
329 / 396
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
DRIVESYSTEMS Ölkontrollwinkel DRIVESYSTEMS
Angle de Ölkontrollwinkel
commande d‘huile / Oil-monitoring elbow
EB 283 9051 E1 #1
169

Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet
Text entf. 21.09.17 ESie

nach
Drawn
23.06.2014 SieversE 283 9051 - E 1
Änderungen Datum Name
Changes Date Name Checked Page 1 from 1 Page
330 / 396
Ölkontrollwinkel
Angle de commande d‘huile
DE GB FR
169 Ölstandsanzeiger 169 Oil level indicator 169 Affichage du niveau d’huile
331 / 396
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Ölkontrolldeckel Spare Parts Drawing
Oil control cover

Ölkontrolldeckel / Oil-monitoring cover
EB 606 9065 E1 #1
940

Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet
1 Text entf. 21.09.17 ESie

nach
Drawn
23.06.2014 SieversE 606 9065 - E 1
332 / 396
Ölkontrolldeckel
Oil control cover
DE GB FR
940 Ölkontrolldeckel 940 Oil contol cover 940 couvercle de commande huile
333 / 396
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Ölkühler Spare Parts Drawing
Oil cooler
Ölkühler / Oil cooler
SK 62, SK 72, SK 82, SK 102, SK 63, SK 73, SK 73, S K 103
SK 6282, SK 7282, SK 8282, SK 11282, SK 6382, SK 73 82, SK 8382, SK 11382 SK 9072.1,
SK 9082.1, SK 9086.1, SK 9096.1
1700
1712
1711
EB 280 9249 E3 #1
1716

3 Text entf. 21.09.17 ESie Datum / Date Name / Name

Schutzvermerk
2 Text SK ... hinzu. 23.06.16 ESie Gezeichnet

nach
Drawn
23.06.2014 SieversE 280 9249 - E 3
334 / 396
Ölkühler
Oil cooler
DE GB FR
1700 Ölkühler 1700 Oil cooler 1700 Refroidisseur d‘huile

1711 Schlauchleitung 1711 Hose 1711 Câble souple
1712 Schlauchleitung 1712 Hose 1712 Câble souple
1716 Anschlusskopf Druckschalter 1716 Pressure switch connector head 1716 Extrémité de connexion pressostat
335 / 396
Wasserkühler
Water cooler
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
SK 6282, SK 7282, SK 8282, SK 9282, SK 6382, SK 7382, SK 8382, SK9382,
DRIVESYSTEMS
SKDRIVESYSTEMS
10382.1, SK 11382.1, SK 12382
SK 9072.1, SK 9082.1, SK 9086.1, SK 9092.1, SK 9096.1
Wasserkühlung / Water-cooling
EB 894 9300 E1 #1
210
2965
230
243
242
241
240

Schutzvermerk
26 Gezeichnet PL1080 www.nord.com
nach
Drawn
19.10.2016
336 / 396
SieversE 894 9300 - E 1
ISO 16016
Wasserkühler
Water cooler
DE GB FR

2965 Deckel 2965 Lid 2965 Couvercle
337 / 396
Taconite
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
SK 9052.1, SK 9072.1, SK 9082.1, SK 9086.1, SK 9092 .1, SK 9096.1

Taconite / Taconite
409
407
408 411 416
406
EB 690 8215 E1 #1
415
421
420
403
401
410
402
404

Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet

nach
Drawn
26.06.2014 SieversE 690 8215 - E 1
28 beachten 26.06.2014
PL1080 Hinkel Seite www.nord.com
von Blatt
338 / 396
Taconite
DE GB FR
401 Labyrinthbuchse 401 Labyrinth bush 401 Douille à labyrinthe

403 O-Ring 403 O-ring 403 Joint torique
404 Gewindestift 404 Screw pin 404 Vis sans tête
408 O-Ring 408 O-ring 408 Joint torique
409 Gewindestift 409 Screw pin 409 Vis sans tête
339 / 396
Gripmaxx
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Gripmaxx / Gripmaxx
609
1400
EB 842 9009 E1 #1
606
607
Restliche Getriebeteile siehe Ersatzteilkataloge

Remaining gear parts see Spare parts catalogues

Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet

nach
Drawn
18.06.2014 SieversE 842 9009 - E 1
30 beachten 18.06.2014
PL1080 Hinkel Seite www.nord.com
von Blatt
340 / 396
Gripmaxx
DE GB FR
606 Klemmring 606 Clamping ring 606 Bague de serrage

607 Klemmbuchse 607 Clamping bush 607 Douille de serrage
1400 Schrumpfscheibe 1400 Shrink disc 1400 Frette de serrage
341 / 396
Screw Conveyor Ersatzteilzeichnung
SCP Spare Parts Drawing
SK 1282 SCP - SK 6282 SCP

SK 1382 SCP - SK 6382 SCP
SK 9012.1 SCP - SK 9052.1 SCP
SK 9013.1 SCP - SK 9053.1 SCP
400
458
842 9210 E0 #1
459
696
696
1500
410
460
690

Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet
0 30411 11.09.20 ESie

nach
Drawn
11.09.2020 SieversE 842 9210 - E 0
beachten 11.09.2020 Weger
32
State Changes Date Name Checked PL1080 Seite
Page 2 www.nord.com
von
from 2
Blatt
Page
342 / 396
Screw Conveyor
SCP
DE GB FR

460 Filzring 460 Felt ring 460 Bague en feutre
690 Einsteckwelle 690 Plug-in shaft 690 Arbre de sortie plein
1500 Baugruppe 1500 Modul fastening element 1500 Module élément de fixation
Befestigungselement
343 / 396
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Screw Conveyor Spare Parts Drawing
SC
SK 1282 SC - SK 9282 SC
SK 1382 SC - SK 9382 SC
400
470
842 9210 E+1 #1
696
696
1500
410
412
411
690

Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet
0 30411 11.09.20 ESie

nach
Drawn
11.09.2020 SieversE 842 9210 - E+1 0
34 beachten PL1080
11.09.2020 Weger Seite www.nord.com
von Blatt
344 / 396
Screw Conveyor
SC
DE GB FR

470 Dichtungspaket 470 Seal package 470 Paquet d‘étanchéité
690 Einsteckwelle 690 Plug-in shaft 690 Arbre de sortie plein
1500 Baugruppe 1500 Modul fastening element 1500 Module élément de fixation
Befestigungselement
345 / 396
Bestellangaben
Order details

Getriebebau NORD
D-22941 Bargteheide
Telefax +49(0)4532/289-2253
PLZ / Postcode/

Fax:
E-mail:
DE GB FR
der NORD Getriebe. Um Ihnen gear units. In order to enable you standard des réducteurs NORD.
das Finden und Nachbestellen von to find and re-order replacement Pour faciliter la recherche et la
Ersatzteilen zu erleichtern, finden parts more easily, you can find an commande de pièces de rechange,
Sie am Ende der Ersatzteilliste order form and important information un formulaire de commande se
ein Bestellformular mit wichtigen regarding the identification of the trouve à la fin de la liste des pièces
Hinweisen zur Bestimmung der correct components at the end of de rechange et vous donne toutes
richtigen Teile. this spare parts list. les informations essentielles pour
déterminer les pièces dont vous
Für Rückfragen stehen wir Ihnen We will be glad to help you if you avez besoin.
gerne zur Verfügung. Ihren lokalen have any queries: You can find your
Ansprechpartner finden Sie unter local contact partner under http://lo- En cas de questions, n’hésitez pas à
http://locator.nord.com. cator.nord.com. nous contacter. Pour connaître votre
interlocuteur local, veuillez consulter
346 / 396
Bestellangaben
Order details

 
 
DE GB FR

2 NORD - Getriebetyp 2 NORD gear unit type 2 Type de réducteur NORD
3 Betriebsart 3 Operating mode 3 Mode de fonctionnement
6 Nenndrehmoment der 6 Rated torque of gear unit output 6 Couple nominal de l’arbre de sortie
Getriebeabtriebswelle shaft du réducteur
7 Antriebsleistung 7 Drive power 7 Puissance d’entraînement
8 Gewicht entsprechend 8 Weight according to ordered version 8 Poids selon l’exécution du contrat
Auftragsausführung 9 Overall gear unit ratio 9 Rapport de réduction total
9 Gesamte Getriebeübersetzung 10 Installation orientation 10 Position de montage
10 Einbaulage 11 Rated speed of gear unit output shaft 11 Vitesse de rotation nominale de
11 Nenndrehzahl der 12 Lubricant type, l’arbre de sortie du réducteur
Getriebeabtriebswelle viscosity and quantity 12 Type de lubrifiant,
12 Schmierstoffart, 13 Customer’s part number viscosité et quantité
-viskosität und –menge 14 Operating factor 13 Numéro d’article client
13 Kundenmaterialnummer 14 Facteur de service
14 Betriebsfaktor

Stückzahl / Pieces / Quantité: Getriebetyp / Gear unit type / Type de réducteur:
www.nord.com PL1080
347 / 396
Notizen
Notes
Notes
348 / 396
Notizen
Notes
Notes
349 / 396
Intelligent
IntelligentDrivesystems,
Drivesystems,Worldwide
WorldwideServices
Services

Mechanical products
Electrical products
IE2/IE3/IE4 motors
Electronic products
motor starters and field distribution systems
More than 4,000 employees throughout the world
Headquarters:
Mat.Nr. 6002299 / 3321
22941 Bargteheide, Germany
Fon +49 (0) 4532 / 289 - 0
Fax +49 (0) 4532 / 289 - 2253
350 / 396
DE EN FR
PL1090
Ersatzteilkatalog - Motoren
Spare parts catalogue - Motors
Catalogue de pièces de rechange - Moteurs
351 / 396
Inhaltsübersicht
Table Of Contents
Sommaire
General parts list
Motoren
Motors
Moteurs
IEC B3+B5 - Motor Größe 63-250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

IEC B3+B5 - Motor size 63-250
IEC B3+B5 - Moteur à hauteur d’axe 63-250
IEC B3+B5 - Bremsmotor Größe 63-250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

IEC B3+B5 - Brake motor size 63-250
IEC B3+B5 - Moteur frein à hauteur d’axe 63-250
IEC B5 - Glattmotor nach IEC mit EKK Größe 71-100 . . . . . . . . 8-9

IEC B5 - Smooth motor acc. to IEC with EKK size 71-100
IEC B5 - Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification IEC B5
avec EKK à hauteur d’axe 71-100
IEC B14 - Glattmotor nach IEC mit EKK Größe 71-100 . . . . . . . 10 - 11

IEC B14 - Smooth motor acc. to IEC with EKK size 71-100
IEC B14 - Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification IEC B14
2 PL1090 DE EN FR www.nord.com
352 / 396
Inhaltsübersicht
Table Of Contents
Sommaire
General parts list
Motoren
Motors
Moteurs
Motor nach Werknorm B5 Größe 63-250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 13

Motor according to works standard B5, size 63-250
Moteur selon la spécification B5 à hauteur d’axe 63-250
Bremsmotor nach Werknorm B5 Größe 63-250 . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 15

Brake motor according to works standard B5, size 63-250
Moteur frein selon la spécification B5 à hauteur d’axe 63-250
Glattmotor nach Werknorm B5 mit EKK Größe 71-100 . . . . . . 16 - 17

Smooth motor acc. to works standard B5 with B5, size 71-100
Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification B5
Motor nach Werknorm B14 Größe 63-160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 19

Bremsmotor nach Werknorm B14 Größe 63-160 . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 21

Glattmotor nach Werknorm B14 mit EKK Größe 71-100 . . . . . . 22 - 23

Smooth motor acc. to works standard B14 with B5, size 71-100
Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification B14
Lüfterausschnitt Typ 160-250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 - 25

Fan cutout Type 160-250
Détail du ventilateur Type 160-250
Bestellangaben . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 - 27
Order details
www.nord.com PL1090 DE EN FR 3
353 / 396
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
IEC B3+B5 - Motor Größe 63-250
Lüfterausschnitt Type 160-250  24 - 25

Fan cutout
Détail du ventilateur
9430
9420
9400
9081 9080 9520

9100
9071
EB 0 - 860 04 (1) #1
9321
9070 9004
9290
9072 9003 9401
9390
9090 9330
9320 9006
9001
9323
9050 9008
9060 9260
9020 9160
9243
9260
9000 9242
1
9241
9240
9022
9021
9040

Schutzvermerk
EB 0 - 860 04 www.nord.com
(1)
Gezeichnet
4 nach PL1090 DE
08.02.2012 EN FR
Eisenberg
1 29178 28.01.20 Lau Drawn

354 / 396
IEC B3+B5 - Motor Größe 63-250
DE EN FR
9000 Läufer 9000 Rotor 9000 Rotor
9001 Paßfeder 9001 Parallel key 9001 Clavette
9020 A-Lagerschild 9020 A bearing cover 9020 Flasque A
9022 Schraubensicherung 9022 Screw securing 9022 Frein de vis
9040 Wellendichtring 9040 Radial packing ring 9040 Bague d’étanchéité sur l’arbre
9050 Kugellager 9050 Ball bearing 9050 Roulement à billes
9060 Kugellager- 9060 Ball bearing 9060 Cale de compensation des
Ausgleichscheibe spacer washer roulements à billes
9070 Klemmenkastenrahmen 9070 Terminal box frame 9070 Cadre de la boîte à bornes
9072 Blindverschlußstopfen 9072 Blind plug 9072 Bouchon aveugle
9080 Klemmenkastendeckel 9080 Terminal box cover 9080 Couvercle de boîte à bornes
9160 Stator gewickelt 9160 Wound stator 9160 Stator bobiné
9240 Motorfuß 9240 Motor foot 9240 Pied de moteur
9243 Sechskantmutter 9243 Hexagonal nut 9243 Écrou à six pans
9320 B-Lagerschild 9320 B-bearing cover 9320 Flasque B
9340-9354* Rücklaufsperre 9340-9354* Back stop 9340-9354* Antidévireur
9390 Lüfter 9390 Fan 9390 Ventilateur
9400 Lüfterhaube 9400 Fan cover 9400 Capot du ventilateur
9420 Schutzdach 9420 Protective shield 9420 Tôle parapluie
9430 Doppelte Lüfterhaube 9430 Double fan cover 9430 Double capot de ventilateur
9570* Stromrelais 9570* Relay 9570* Relais d‘intensité
9600* Motorsteckverbinder 9600* Motor plug connector 9600* Connecteur moteur
9680* Stillstandsheizung 9680* Standstill heating 9680* Résistance de préchauffage
9700-9774* Inkrementalgeber 9700-9774* Incremental encoder 9700-9774* Codeur incrémental
9850* Scheibenhandrad 9850* Disc-shaped handwheel 9850* Volant
9860* Impulsaufnehmer/ 9860* Chain wheel puls 9860* Récepteur d’impulsions/
Impulsgeber/Kettenrad transducer Générateur d’impulsions/Roue
à chaîne
9910* Reibflansch für IP66 9910* Rubbing flange IP66 9910* Bride de friction pour IP66
* Sonderteile ohne Abbildung / * Special parts, not illustrated / * Pièces spéciales sans illustration
355 / 396
IEC B3+B5 - Bremsmotor Größe 63-250
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
IEC B3+B5 - Moteur
DRIVESYSTEMS
frein à hauteur d’axe 63-250 DRIVESYSTEMS
Lüfterausschnitt IEC B3+B5

Type - Bremsmotor
160-250  24 - 2563 - 180
Fan cutout
9420
9400
9401
9006 9430
9383
9370
9380
EB 0 - 860 05 #1
9900 9006
9330 9390
9080 9120
9005
9081 9121 9006
9007 9360
9008
9100 9005
9070 9003
9071
9076 9321
9111 9320
9110
9290
9075
9323
9090
9001 9260
9050 9160
9060
9020
9243
9242
9000 9240
9260 9241
9022
9021
9040
6 Getriebebau NORD
PL1090 EN& Co.FR
DEGmbH KG www.nord.com
Rudolf-Diesel-Straße 1 D-22934 Bargteheide Tel. 04532/4010 - 04532/401253 - www.nord.com
356 / 396
IEC B3+B5 - Bremsmotor Größe 63-250
IEC B3+B5 - Moteur frein à hauteur d’axe 63-250
DE EN FR
9022 Schraubensicherung 9022 Screw securing 9022 Frein de vis
9075 Blindstopfen 9075 Blind plug 9075 Bouchon borgne
9076 Kabelverschraubung 9076 Cable gland 9076 Passe-câbles à vis
9110 2-poliges Klemmbrett 9110 2-pole terminal board 9110 Plaque à bornes à 2 pôles
9120 Gleichrichter 9120 Rectifier 9120 Redresseur
9240 Motorfuß 9240 Motor foot 9240 Pied de moteur
9243 Sechskantmutter 9243 Hexagonal nut 9243 Écrou à six pans
9360 Bremse 9360 Brake 9360 Frein
9370 Handlüftung 9370 Manual brake release 9370 Déblocage manuel du frein
9380 Bremsenmitnehmer 9380 Brake dog 9380 Entraîneur de frein
9520 Klemmenbuchse 9520 Clamping bush 9520 Douille de serrage
9860* Impulsaufnehmer/ 9860* Chain wheel puls transducer 9860* Récepteur d’impulsions/Générateur
Impulsgeber/Kettenrad d’impulsions/Roue à chaîne
9900 Reibblech 9900 Rubbing plate 9900 Tôle de frottement
357 / 396
IEC B5 - Glattmotor nach IEC mit EKK (B5) Größe 71-100
IEC B5 - Smooth motor according to IEC with EKK (B5) size 71-100
IEC B5 - Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification IEC B5 avec EKK
à hauteur d’axe 71-100

Fan cutout
EB 0 - 860 15 #1
358 / 396
DE EN FR
9001 Passfeder 9001 Parallel key 9001 Clavette
9040 Wellendichtring 9040 Radial packing ring 9040 Bague d'étanchéité sur l'arbre
9060 Kugellager- Ausgleichscheibe 9060 Ball bearing spacer washer 9060 Cale de compensation des
roulements à billes
9070 Klemmkastenrahmen 9070 Terminal box frame 9070 Cadre de la boîte à bornes
9320 B-Lagerschild 9320 B bearing cover 9320 Flasque B
359 / 396

Fan cutout
EB 0 - 860 14 #1
360 / 396
DE EN FR
9060 Kugellager- Ausgleichscheibe 9060 Ball bearing spacer washer 9060 Cale de compensation des
roulements à billes
361 / 396
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Motor nach Werknorm B5 Größe 63-250Parts Drawing
Spare
Motor according
DRIVESYSTEMSto works standard B5, size 63-250 DRIVESYSTEMS

Fan cutout
9430
9400
9401
9080
9081 9390
9100
9071 9320
EB 0 - 860 06 (1) #1
1 9070 9290 9420
9072
9520
9003
9330
9090
9321 9006
9260 9004
9001 9323
9008
9060 9260
9160
9000 1
9050
9021
9020
9040

12 PL1090 DE EN Name
Datum / Date FR / Name www.nord.com
Schutzvermerk
EB 0 - 860 06 (1)
Gezeichnet
nach 362 / 39617.02.2012 Eisenberg
Motor nach Werknorm B5 Größe 63-250
DE EN FR
à chaîne
363 / 396
Bremsmotor nach Werknorm B5 Größe 63-250
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare
Moteur selon la spécification B5 àParts Drawing
hauteur d’axe 63-250
LüfterausschnittBremsmotor nach Werknorm

Type 160-250  24 - 25(B5) 63 - 180
Fan cutout
9430
9420
9400
9401
EB 0 - 860 07 #1
9390
9370
9005
9081
9080
9100
9006
9121
9006
9076 9330
9120 9383
9070 9380
9290
9071 9360
9008 9003
9007 9005
9111 9900
9090 9075 9321
9110
9320
9001 9006
9260 9323
9050 9260
9160
9000
9060
9021
9020
9040
364 / 396
DE EN FR
à chaîne
365 / 396
Glattmotor nach Werknorm mit EKK (B5) Größe 71-100
Smooth motor according to factory standard with EKK (B5) size 71-100
Les moteurs lisses selon la spécification B5 avec EKK à hauteur d’axe 71-100

Fan cutout
EB 0 - 860 13 #1
366 / 396
Smooth motor according to factory standard with EKK (B5) size 71-100
DE EN FR
9060 Kugellager- 9060 Ball bearing spacer washer 9060 Cale de compensation des
Ausgleichscheibe roulements à billes
367 / 396
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare
Moteur selon la spécification B14 à Parts
hauteurDrawing
d’axe 63-160

Fan cutout
9430
9420
9400
9401
9390
EB 0 - 860 08 (1) #1
9081 9080
9320
9100
9071 9290
9070
9260 9520
9072
9003 9330
9321
9090
9004
9260 9323
9006
9001
9060
9160 9008
9000
1
9050
9020
9040 9021
18 GetriebebauPL1090
NORD DE EN
GmbH & Co. KG
FR www.nord.com
Getriebebau-Nord-Straße 1 D-22941 Bargteheide
368 /Tel.
39604532/289-0 - 04532/289-2253 - www.nord.com
DE EN FR
à chaîne
369 / 396
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing


Brake motor accordingBremsmotor
to works standard B14, size 63-160
nach Werknorm (B14) 63 - 160

Fan cutout 9430
9420
9400
9401
9390
9370 9006
9081
9080
EB 0 - 860 09 #1
9100
9121
9900 9006
9120
9070 9005
9321
9071 9076 9383
9111 9320 9380
9008
9110 9003
9360
9007
9075 9005
9330
9090
9001
9006
9260 9290
9050 9323
9060 9260
9160
9000
9020
9021
9040

Tel. 04532/4010 - 04532/401253 - www.nord.com
Rudolf-Diesel-Straße 1 D-22934 Bargteheide
Schutzvermerk
Datum / Date
Name / Name
Gezeichnet
nach 31.10.2011 Eisenberg EB 0 - 860 09
Drawn
Status Änderungen Datum Name ISO 16016 Kontrolliert
beachten Seite1 von
Blatt
State Changes Date Name Checked Page from1 Page
370 / 396
DE EN FR
à chaîne
371 / 396
Smooth motor acc. to factory standard with EKK (B14) 71-100

Fan cutout
EB 0 - 860 16 #1
372 / 396
Smooth motor acc. to factory standard with EKK (B14) 71-100
DE EN FR
9060 Kugellager- 9060 Ball bearing spacer washer 9060 Cale de compensation des
Ausgleichscheibe roulements à billes
373 / 396
Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Lüfterausschnitt Typ 160-250
Fan cutout Type 160-250Lüfterausschnitt / Fan cutout
Type: 160 - 250W
9390
9006
EB 0 - 860 12 #1
9003
9008
9006
9000

Schutzvermerk
Gezeichnet
24
nach
PL1090
Drawn
11.01.2017
DE EN
Borysewicz
FR EB 0 - 860 12
www.nord.com
ISO 16016
Status Änderungen Datum Name 374
Kontrolliert / 396
beachten 11.01.2017 Losak
Lüfterausschnitt Typ 160-250
Fan cutout Type 160-250
DE EN FR
375 / 396
Bestellangaben
Order details



DE EN FR
2 NORD - Motortyp 2 NORD - Motor type 2 Type de moteur NORD
4 Phasenzahl 4 Number of phases 4 Nombre de phases
6 Wärmeklasse 6 Heat class 6 Classe thermique
7 Schutzart 7 Protection class 7 Type de protection
8 Betriebsart 8 Operating mode 8 Type de fonctionnement
9 Norm 9 Standard 9 Norme
10 Halbkeilwuchtung 10 Half key balancing 10 Équilibrage dynamique avec une
demi-clavette
11 Frequenz 11 Frequency 11 Fréquence
12 Motorspannung 12 Motor voltage 12 Tension du moteur
13 Nennstrom 13 Nominal current 13 Intensité nominale
14 Nennleistung 14 Nominal power 14 Puissance nominale
15 Leistungfaktor 15 Power factor 15 Facteur de puissance
16 Nenndrehzahl 16 Nominal speed 16 Vitesse nominale
17 Motorspannung - Weitbereich 17 Motor voltage - wide range 17 Tension du moteur – plage étendue
18 Nennstrom - Weitbereich 18 Nominal current - wide range 18 Intensité nominale - plage étendue
19 Wirkungsgrad 19 Efficiency 19 Rendement
20 Bremsmoment 20 Braking torque 20 Couple de freinage
21 Anschlußspannung Bremse 21 Brake connection voltage 21 Tension de raccordement du frein
22 Bremsenspannung 22 Braking voltage 22 Tension de freinage
23 Gewicht 23 Weight 23 Poids
24 Lagerung A-Seite 24 A side bearing 24 Palier côté A
25 Lagerung B-Seite 25 B side bearing 25 Palier côté B
26 Kundenzeile 26 Customer line 26 Ligne réservée au client
376 / 396
Bestellangaben
Order details

Getriebebau NORD
D-22941 Bargteheide
Telefax +49(0) 4532/289-2253
PLZ / Postcode/
Fax:
E-mail:
Stückzahl / Pieces / Quantité: Motortyp / Motor type / Type de moteur:
DE EN FR
der NORD Motoren. Um Ihnen das motors. In order to enable you to find standard des moteurs NORD. Pour
Finden und Nachbestellen von and re-order replacement parts more faciliter la recherche et la commande
Ersatzteilen zu erleichtern, finden easily, you can find an order form de pièces de rechange, un formulaire
Sie am Ende der Ersatzteilliste and important information regarding de commande se trouve à la fin de
ein Bestellformular mit wichtigen the identification of the correct la liste des pièces de rechange et
Hinweisen zur Bestimmung der components at the end of this spare vous donne toutes les informations
richtigen Teile. parts list. essentielles pour déterminer les
pièces dont vous avez besoin.
Für Rückfragen stehen wir Ihnen We will be glad to help you if you
gerne zur Verfügung. Ihren lokalen have any queries: You can find your En cas de questions, n’hésitez pas à
Ansprechpartner finden Sie unter local contact partner under http://lo- nous contacter. Pour connaître votre
http://locator.nord.com. cator.nord.com. interlocuteur local, veuillez consulter
377 / 396
Intelligent
IntelligentDrivesystems,
Drivesystems,Worldwide
WorldwideServices
Services

Mechanical products
Electrical products
IE2/IE3/IE4 motors
Electronic products
motor starters and field distribution systems
More than 4,000 employees throughout the world
Headquarters:
Mat.Nr. 6002599 / 1320
22941 Bargteheide, Germany
Fon +49 (0) 4532 / 289 - 0
Fax +49 (0) 4532 / 289 - 2253
378 / 396
379 / 396
380 / 396
381 / 396
382 / 396
383 / 396
384 / 396
385 / 396
Betriebsanleitung

DATE : 23/09/2022 TAG N° A-110-PuE-01/02
Temperature sensor
5.4.
PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

www.pcm.eu
386 / 396
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SERIES: Dry running protection

Type: Electronic temperature sensor
Manual reference: NIPMCT00EN-EU (original manual)


387 / 396
Declaration of Conformity
We declare that the subassembly described below complies with the requirements of the following directives:
• directive 2014/30/EU relating to electromagnetic compatibility
• directive 2011/65/EU on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic
equipment
The following standards have been applied:
• IEC61000-6-2 : 2005
• IEC61000-6-3 : 2006 +AMD 1 : 2010
• EN50581 : 2012
Champtocé sur Loire, 11/01/2019
WARNING
You have acquired a safety device preventing PCM Moineau™ pumps from running dry.
This equipment requires specific configuration depending on how it is used.
Incorrect configuration can make the device ineffective against running dry. It is thus essential that all the
steps in the instructions are followed.
WARNING
This document is the property of the PCM group and may not be reproduced or circulated without
authorisation.
The QHSE department has sole responsibility for circulation of this document outside the company, and
external copies are not updated when the reference document evolves.
2 PCM temperature sensor – Instruction manual – NIPMCT00EN-EU
388 / 396
Table des matières
1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 4
1.1. General ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2. Limits of guarantee ................................................................................................................................. 5
2.1. Duration .................................................................................................................................................. 5
2.2. Limits ...................................................................................................................................................... 5
3. Description and installation
installation.....................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... 6
3.2. Characteristics ........................................................................................................................................ 6
3.2.1. Electrical characteristics ................................................................................................................................................................. 6
3.2.2. Mechanical characteristics .............................................................................................................................................................. 7
3.3. Assembly ................................................................................................................................................ 7
3.4. Electrical connection............................................................................................................................... 8
3.5. Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 9
3.5.1. Switching function ........................................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.5.2. Analogue function ........................................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.5.3. Initial adjustment ........................................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.5.4. Final adjustment............................................................................................................................................................................ 10
PCM temperature sensor – Instruction manual – NIPMCT00EN-EU 3
389 / 396
1. Introduction
1. 1. General
The PCM Moineau™ eccentric rotor pump is a volumetric pump based on the principle of a metal rotor rotating
within an elastomer stator. The contact between the rotor and the stator generates a rise in temperature that is
naturally dissipated by the passage of the product.
“Dry running” is an abnormal phase of pump operation due to an absence of product, which can damage the
stator and the rotor.
To overcome this, you have acquired a safety device that will detect an increase in the stator temperature,
indicating that your pump is running dry.
390 / 396
2. Limits of guarantee
2. 1. Duration
• 1 year
2. 2. Limits
• On receiving the equipment, examine it immediately to check that no signs of damage are apparent. If it is
visibly damaged, indicate clearly on the carrier's documents that the merchandise was received damaged,
with a brief description of the type of damage observed.
• Failure to respect instructions or technical data may cause equipment damage and/or physical injury.
• It is the user's responsibility to ensure that the measuring equipment used corresponds to its application. The
manufacturer accepts no liability for the consequences of incorrect installation or use by the user.
• Electrical power supply different from 24 V DC
• Sensor materials not compatible with the environment.
• Chemical attack
391 / 396
3. Description and installation
3. 1. Operating Principle
The safety element protecting against dry running operates on the basis of temperature measurements. The
measuring element is a PT1000 probe operating between -50°C and 150°C (-58°F to 302°F). When dry running
occurs, the friction between the rotor and the stator generates a rise in temperature. The purpose of this sensor
is to detect a critical temperature threshold before the elastomer, and thus the pump performance, is affected.
This threshold varies and is adjustable depending on the application and the pumped product.
The device generates two output signals depending on its configuration:
• OUT1 / IO-Link
◦ switching signal, temperature limit values
• OUT2: 2 selection options

◦ switching signal, temperature limit values
◦ analogue signal for the temperature
Depending on the final application, the sensor can thus be used as a safety sensor with a stop function or to light
a safety indicator.
It can also be used for monitoring applications with the analogue output.
3. 2. Characteristics
3. 2. 1. Electrical characteristics
• Supply voltage [V DC]: 18…32
• Consumption [mA]: <50
• Protection rating: III (IP67)
392 / 396
3. 2. 2. Mechanical characteristics
1: LED display unit/switch status. 2: 4-digit red/green alphanumeric display. 3: Programming buttons. 4: Upper
part of the unit that can be rotated through 345°. EL
EL: Probe lengths available (25 mm, 30 mm, 50 mm, 100 mm,
150 mm).
• Cable connection: Threaded M12x1
• Cable type: 4 x 0.34 mm²
• Process connection: Depends on the chosen sensor model and the probe length (G1/4 or G1/2)
3. 3. Assembly
We recommend fitting the probe at the suction end of the pump. This is where heating takes place most quickly.
A blind hole is drilled in the first cavity at the suction end. A progressive ring connector is added to adjust the
depth of the probe's position.
Installing the device:

The kit you have received contains a progressive ring connector (2) and a ring (1):
393 / 396
1. Place the ring (1) on the stator
2. Fit and screw the threaded part of the connector (2) into the thread in the stator until the ring (1) is tight.
3. Insert the sensor rod (3) into the connector (2) as far as it will go inside the stator.
4. Once the probe (3) is in place, tighten the hexagonal nut of the connector (2), by hand initially.
5. Then, using a wrench, finish tightening the hexagonal nut of the connector (2) with one or two additional
turns, holding the connector in position using a second wrench.
3. 4. Electrical connection
The device must be connected by an electrician with relevant qualifications.

The national regulations on installing electrical equipment must be respected.
Power supply voltage according to EN50178, TBTS, TBTP.
1. Shut down the installation.
2. Connect the device as follows:
OUT1: switching output / IO-Link

OUT2: analogue output.
Colours according to DIN EN 60947-5-2.
Wire colours:
• BK: black
• BN: brown
394 / 396
• BU: blue
• WH: white
3. 5. Configuration
For more details about how to configure the module, see the manufacturer's manual for the electronic
temperature sensor, IFM TN21xx, TN24xx, supplied with the sensor or available from the PCM service centre.
3. 5. 1. Switching function
OUT1 changes its switch status if the configured switching thresholds have not been reached or have been
exceeded. The hysteresis or window functions can be selected:
Hysteresis function. T: Temperature. SP1

SP1: Engagement threshold. rP1
rP1: Release threshold. HY
HY: Hysteresis. Hno/
Fno
Fno: NO (normally open) hysteresis. Hnc/Fnc
Hnc/Fnc: NC (normally closed) hysteresis.
Window function. T: Temperature. FH1

FH1: Upper limit value. FL1
FL1: Lower limit value. FE
FE: Window. Fno
Fno: NO
(normally open) window. Fnc
Fnc: NC (normally closed) window.
3. 5. 2. Analogue function
The device converts the signal measured into an analogue signal proportional to temperature. Depending on the
configuration, the output signal can be:
• 4…20 mA [ou2] = I
• 20…4 mA [ou2] = Ineg
• 0…10 V [ou2] = U
• 10…0 V [ou2] = Uneg
The analogue signal can be scaled, i.e. the limits of the measurement range for the lower output signal (min.
analogue output value = ASP2) and the upper output signal (max. analogue output value = AEP2) can be
configured.
395 / 396
3. 5. 3. Initial adjustment
The threshold configuration will change depending on the application. This type of sensor can be used for a wide
range of pumped fluids and thus a wide range of temperatures. The trigger thresholds must thus be configured
on start-up:
Set the temperature threshold to 20°C above the maximum process temperature
3. 5. 4. Final adjustment
1. Run the pump with the fluid at its maximum temperature in normal operation with the real-time temperate
display.
2. Wait for the temperature to stabilise (wait about 60 minutes).
3. Set a threshold (SP1) 10°C above the measured stable temperature.
A: Process temperature. B: Trigger threshold.

If the process includes a rinse cycle using hot water or cleaning in place, turn off temperature acquisition to avoid
any disruption or unwanted threshold triggering.
396 / 396

Databook CEBE-319613 312053

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Databook CEBE-319613 312053

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Client / Customer / Kunde: METITO (OVERSEAS) LTD

Commande n° / Purchase Order / Auftrag: CEBE-319613 / 329220017

Affaire / Project / Projekt: 312053

Site / Location / Ort: -

N° Série / Serial N° / Serien Nr: 070P140007051,070P140007052

Matériel / Material / Bezeichnung

Integrated PCM EcoMoineau™ M progressing cavity pump

CUSTOMER METITO (OVERSEAS) LTD SERIAL N°: 070P140007051,070P140007052

TECHNICAL DATASHEET & PERFORMANCE CURVE ................................ 3

PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

CUSTOMER METITO (OVERSEAS) LTD SERIAL N°: 070P140007051,070P140007052

1. TECHNICAL DATASHEET & PERFORMANCE CURVE

PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

CUSTOMER METITO (OVERSEAS) LTD SERIAL N°: 070P140007051,070P140007052

PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

Medium Data Technical Data

Serial Number : 312053

Quote Reference : CEBE-366522-1

CUSTOMER METITO (OVERSEAS) LTD SERIAL N°: 070P140007051,070P140007052

PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

Max rpm (rpm): 1500 Starting torque (N.m): 20 Fluid: grease

CUSTOMER METITO (OVERSEAS) LTD SERIAL N°: 070P140007051,070P140007052

2. DRAWINGS & PARTS LIST

PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

CUSTOMER METITO (OVERSEAS) LTD SERIAL N°: 070P140007051,070P140007052

General Arrangement Drawing

PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

Positions des raccords

CUSTOMER METITO (OVERSEAS) LTD SERIAL N°: 070P140007051,070P140007052

Cross section & parts list

PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

Landmark Réf. Article Description Qty Weight (Kg)

22 T220061030N Kit ligne d'arbre disponible 1 0.186

PRJT JT190-PD GASKET KIT NBR P13/ P47 1 0.115

1 36632-1646 0-60°C NBR stator 6-2 - Primer finish 1 2.300

13 40725-160 O-RING NBR P13 1 0.004

16/17 C09056C186 SINGLE MECH SEAL D20 SIC/SIC/FKM P16/ 17 1 0.064

20 T200142001 ROTOR 6-2 SS420 R1 P20 1 1.200

47 T900016160 Gasket D131x3 M4 NBR 3 0.040

50 T500379C051 BODY M4 CAST IRON P50 1 16.500

54 T540085C051 OUTLET PIPE CAST IRON P54 1 6.000

80 C06087S018 STUD P80 2 0.219

88 T880050051 BEARING HOUSING F115 M4 P88 1 1.900

103 C06013F043 WASHER 14 0.003

104 C06079J043 SCREW P104 12 0.020

105A/106 C06113B014 SCREW HC M8-10 TR 6 0.010

107 40308-046J NUT 16 0.012

127 C01042P014 STEPLESS EAR CLAMP COLLAR D42.3 - 45.5 MM 2 0.006

127A C01042F014 STEPLESS EAR CLAMP COLLAR D22.4 - 25.6 MM 2 0.000

143 C12231E000 G1/2 TEMPERATURE SENSOR-PROBE Ø6 LG 100MM-WITH DISPLAY UNIT 1 0.304

145 M-002748B085 SPACING WASHER HT 8.5MM 1 0.002

172 T000113278 HANDHOLE PLATE CAST IRON P172 2 0.508

250 C06118E018 BOLT M8 BM10-50 BBS 4 0.200

261 C06002E046J NUT Hm8 4 0.004

328 C06013D043 WASHER P328 4 0.001

: 1st Emergency : Maintenance 6000/8000h

CUSTOMER METITO (OVERSEAS) LTD SERIAL N°: 070P140007051,070P140007052

PCM EUROPE S.A.S.

CONDITIONS DE SERVICE / OPERATING CONDITIONS

Viscosité / Viscosity 5000

Abrasivité / Abrasivity No Pression de refoulement /

Concentration >10 Fonction / Function Transfer

pH TBC Remarque / Remarks 1 pump on duty + 1 pump stand by